Shepherd (SFL - E 2019) PDF

“SHEPHERD
THE FLOCK OF GOD”

1 PETER 5:2
sfl-E
190129
“SHEPHERD
THE FLOCK OF GOD”
1 PETER 5:2
THIS BOOK HAS BEEN ISSUED TO

This publication is not for sale. It is provided as part of a worldwide
Bible educational work supported by voluntary donations.
To make a donation, please visit donate.jw.org.
Unless otherwise indicated, Scripture quotations are from the
modern-language New World Translation of the Holy Scriptures.
“Shepherd the Flock of God”—1 Peter 5:2
January 2019 Printing
English (sfl-E)
˘ 2019
WATCH TOWER BIBLE AND TRACT SOCIETY OF
REPUBLIC OF KOREA, INCORPORATED ASSOCIATION
Publishers
Christian Congregation of Jehovah’s Witnesses
Wallkill, New York, U.S.A.
Made in the United States of America
Table of Contents
TOPIC CHAPTER
INTRODUCTION
HOW ELDERS WORK TOGETHER AS A BODY.................................................. 1
CONGREGATION SERVICE COMMITTEE ............................................................ 2
COORDINATOR OF THE BODY OF ELDERS ...................................................... 3
SECRETARY........................................................................................................... 4
SERVICE OVERSEER ............................................................................................ 5
WATCHTOWER STUDY CONDUCTOR ................................................................. 6
FIELD SERVICE GROUP OVERSEER ................................................................... 7
APPOINTMENT AND DELETION OF ELDERS

AND MINISTERIAL SERVANTS ........................................................................ 8
PIONEERS.............................................................................................................. 9
CIRCUIT OVERSEER ........................................................................................... 10
MEDICAL MATTERS ............................................................................................ 11
DETERMINING WHETHER A JUDICIAL COMMITTEE

SHOULD BE FORMED ..................................................................................... 12
PORNOGRAPHY.................................................................................................. 13
CHILD ABUSE ..................................................................................................... 14
PREPARING FOR JUDICIAL HEARINGS ........................................................... 15
TABLE OF CONTENTS “SHEPHERD THE FLOCK OF GOD”

Table of Contents
TOPIC CHAPTER
PROCEDURE FOR JUDICIAL HEARINGS ......................................................... 16
APPEAL HEARINGS ............................................................................................ 17
DISASSOCIATIONS............................................................................................. 18
REINSTATEMENTS .............................................................................................. 19
MEETINGS ........................................................................................................... 20
KINGDOM HALLS................................................................................................ 21
CORRESPONDENCE AND RECORDS ............................................................... 22
FIELD MINISTRY ................................................................................................. 23
FOREIGN-LANGUAGE FIELD ............................................................................. 24
SHEPHERDING .................................................................................................... 25
DISASTERS AND EMERGENCIES...................................................................... 26
WEDDINGS .......................................................................................................... 27
PRISONS ............................................................................................................. 28
LEGAL MATTERS ................................................................................................ 29
APPENDIX
A. WORK PERFORMED AT KINGDOM HALLS
INDEX
“SHEPHERD THE FLOCK OF GOD” TABLE OF CONTENTS

Introduction
1. As an appointed elder, you have the serious responsibility to “shep-

herd the flock of God under your care.” (1 Pet. 5:2, 3) Providing ac-
curate theocratic direction to our brothers and sisters is a weighty
responsibility. It is important that elders locate Scriptural and theo-
cratic direction in a timely manner in order to assist all to be “com-
pletely united...in the same line of thought.” (1 Cor. 1:10) To that
end, we are pleased to make this publication available to you.
2. Although this book covers most aspects of our work as elders, at
times you may need to consult other publications, such as Orga-
nized to Do Jehovah’s Will and letters from the branch office. Be
alert to adjustments so as to stay up-to-date on theocratic direc-
tion. Ensure that you are using the latest version of this publica-
tion. Supplemental direction that applies specifically in your branch
territory can be found in Addendum to “Shepherd the Flock of God”
—1 Peter 5:2. We encourage each elder to make appropriate notes
in his personal copy of this book directing attention to Shepherd
Addendum.
3. This publication is copyrighted and confidential. It is issued to each
appointed elder. If an elder is deleted for reasons other than mov-
ing to another congregation with a favorable recommendation, he
should turn over this publication to the Congregation Service Com-
mittee to be destroyed, and any electronic copies in his possession
should be deleted.
4. We pray that this publication will prove to be a valuable resource
in assisting you to imitate Jehovah God and Jesus Christ in the way
you treat the sheep. (John 10:11; Eph. 5:1; 1 Pet. 2:21, 25; 5:4) Rath-
er than making rigid rules for the congregation, rely on Scriptural
principles and direction from Jehovah’s organization.—2 Cor. 1:24.
INTRODUCTION “SHEPHERD THE FLOCK OF GOD”

CHAPTER ONE
How Elders Work

Together as a Body
Paragraphs
Responsibilities ................................................................................................................ 2
Elders’ Meetings ....................................................................................................... 3-11
When to Hold .............................................................................................................. 4
What to Discuss ................................................................................................... 5-6
Compiling and Distributing the Agenda ................................................ 7
During the Meeting .......................................................................................... 8-11
Pursue Peace ........................................................................................................... 12-13
1. Jehovah has appointed Jesus Christ as head of the Christian con-

gregation. (Eph. 1:22, 23; Rev. 1:20) Your accepting Jesus as head
of the congregation promotes cooperation and unity on the body.
You demonstrate submission to Christ’s headship when you do
the following:
(1) Seek to understand and apply Bible laws and principles.
—John 7:16-18; Eph. 5:17.
(2) Obey direction from “the faithful and discreet slave”
and from overseers appointed to take the lead, such as
those at the branch office and the circuit overseer.
—Matt. 24:45-47; Heb. 13:17.
(3) Listen carefully to the expressions of fellow elders.
—Rom. 12:10b; Jas. 1:19.
(4) Deal in a kind and loving manner with each individual
in the congregation, including fellow elders. Do not
“SHEPHERD THE FLOCK OF GOD” CHAPTER 1

HOW ELDERS WORK TOGETHER AS A BODY
impose personal viewpoints or arbitrary rules on

others.—Matt. 11:28-30; 1 Cor. 4:6; 1 Pet. 5:1-3, 5.
(5) Open and close all meetings of the body of elders with
prayer. Pray again if a discussion of the body of elders
seems to falter.—Jas. 1:5.
RESPONSIBILITIES
2. The responsibilities of the body of elders include the following:
(1) Making recommendations for the appointment and
deletion of elders and ministerial servants.—See
Chapter 8.
(2) Deciding the number of field service groups and who
will serve as group overseers and assistants.—See
Chapter 7.
(3) Deciding the subjects of local needs parts and who
should present them.—See 20:14-15.
(4) Deciding who should serve as the secretary, the service
overseer, the Watchtower Study conductor, and the Life
and Ministry Meeting overseer. Deciding who, if anyone,
should assist or substitute for these brothers or the
coordinator of the body of elders in their assignments.
—See Chapters 3-6 and Instructions for Our Christian
Life and Ministry Meeting (S-38).
(5) Deciding who should serve as the auxiliary counselor
and, if needed, the counselors for auxiliary classes.
—See Instructions for Our Christian Life and Ministry
Meeting.
(6) If the Kingdom Hall is used by only one congregation,
deciding who should serve as the maintenance
coordinator. If the Kingdom Hall is used by multiple
CHAPTER 1 “SHEPHERD THE FLOCK OF GOD”

congregations, selecting a brother or brothers to serve

on the Kingdom Hall Operating Committee.—See
21:14-20.
(7) Deciding who should serve as the accounts servant,
the literature servant, the territory servant, the
cleaning coordinator, the public talk coordinator, and
any brothers who assist them.
(8) Deciding who will receive additional privileges and
responsibilities, such as reading at the Watchtower
Study, reading at or conducting the Congregation Bible
Study, serving as chairman for the midweek meeting or
weekend meeting, handling nonstudent assignments at
the midweek meeting, serving as an attendant, passing
microphones, offering public prayer, conducting
meetings for field service, and so forth.
(9) Deciding who is approved to deliver public talks in

the local congregation and who is approved to give
public talks in other congregations. Deciding whether a
ministerial servant should deliver his first public talk by
means of a symposium.—See 20:1, 4.
(10) Assigning two elders to investigate accusations

of serious wrongdoing, determining whether serious
wrongdoing requires a judicial committee, and choosing
who will serve on the committee, including who will
serve as chairman. (See Chapters 12 and 15.) Choosing
who will serve on the committee that meets with one
who has decided to disassociate himself. (See Chapter
18.) Assigning two elders to meet with a publisher who
has deliberately viewed pornography.—See Chapter 13.
(11) Determining whether a warning talk should be given to
the congregation and deciding who should present the
talk.

(12) Deciding which elders will handle the annual meeting

with the regular pioneers, special pioneers, and field
missionaries in December/January.
(13) Selecting speakers for the special public talk and
Memorial, selecting those who will offer prayer over the
emblems at the Memorial, and selecting Memorial
meeting times.—See 20:6-8.
(14) Determining whether a publisher is Scripturally free to
remarry.—See 12:71-76.
(15) Reviewing the congregation’s resolved donation to
Kingdom Hall and Assembly Hall construction
worldwide.—See Instructions for Congregation
Accounting (S-27).
(16) If the Kingdom Hall is used by multiple congregations,
reviewing and approving the monthly amount to be
contributed to the Kingdom Hall Operating Committee
for the upcoming service year to care for Kingdom Hall
operating expenses.—See 21:20 and Instructions for
Kingdom Hall Operating Committee Accounting (S-42).
(17) Determining whether to host a foreign-language
pregroup or group and determining which meetings will
be held.—See Chapter 24.
(18) Determining how to extend hospitality to visiting
speakers.—See 20:5.
(19) Deciding who will temporarily serve as the coordinator
of the body of elders when an adjustment must be
made apart from the visit of the circuit overseer.
—See 3:1.
(20) Determining whether it is necessary for the
congregation as a whole to consider providing some
form of assistance to certain needy brothers and

sisters who have a long history of faithful service,

particularly if there are no family members or other
relatives to assist such ones and no adequate
assistance from government agencies is available.
—od pp. 119-120 pars. 12-15.
ELDERS’ MEETINGS
3. When the body of elders discusses a matter, Christ by means of
the holy spirit can influence any elder to make an expression
that contributes to a wise decision, one that may not have been
reached if the elders had been consulted individually. (Acts 15:
6-21) Meetings should normally not exceed two hours in length.
4. When to Hold: In addition to the elders’ meeting held during each

visit of the circuit overseer, an elders’ meeting should be held
about three months after each visit. Other meetings can be ar-
ranged any time that circumstances necessitate.
5. What to Discuss: The body of elders may discuss any matters

pertaining to the congregation. Generally, these would involve
matters that cannot be handled by individual elders or that are
not the responsibility of another entity, such as the Congregation
Service Committee or the Kingdom Hall Operating Committee.
—See 2:1; 3:3.4.
6. Following are some matters that periodically merit the attention

of the body of elders:
(1) At the meeting held about three months after the visit
of the circuit overseer, review the circuit overseer’s
report on his previous visit to the congregation. In
preparation for the next visit of the circuit overseer,
consider any recommendations for the appointment
or deletion of elders or ministerial servants.
—See Chapter 8.

(2) Consider whether and how the congregation can do

more to give a thorough witness in the congregation’s
assigned territory.—Acts 20:24; see Chapter 23.
(3) Consider the spiritual and physical needs of
widows, orphans, the blind, the homebound, those in
nursing homes, and other publishers with special
circumstances.—Jas. 1:27.
(4) Consider what further training is needed to help
brothers care properly for congregation assignments
and to help those with potential, including newly
baptized and younger brothers, to take on greater
responsibility.—2 Tim. 2:2; see 25:4-6.
(5) Review the congregation assignments of all exemplary,

baptized brothers. For example, is there a need to
balance out the workload of the appointed brothers or
to adjust the assignments so as to provide newer
brothers with the opportunity to gain additional
experience?—Ex. 18:17, 18; Prov. 11:2b; see 1:2.8.
(6) Review published information on disaster preparedness.

—See 26:1-6.
7. Compiling and Distributing the Agenda: For the meeting that
is held about three months after the visit of the circuit overseer,
the coordinator of the body of elders should ask the other elders
to submit matters that they would like to discuss. The elders
should be invited to suggest the names of brothers they would
like to consider for recommendation as elders or ministerial ser-
vants. (See Chapter 8.) The coordinator of the body of elders
should give a copy of the agenda to each elder a few days be-
fore the meeting to allow time for research and prayerful consid-
eration. (Prov. 21:5) For the meeting that is held during the vis-
it of the circuit overseer, the circuit overseer compiles the agenda
after checking whether the elders have additional points they wish

to discuss. If time permits, the circuit overseer may agree to in-

clude one or two significant items on the agenda. Otherwise, he
will direct the elders to consider those matters at another time.
8. During the Meeting: The coordinator of the body of elders should
set the pace of the discussion by sticking to the agenda as much
as possible and by keeping the main points to the fore. The sec-
retary or another designated elder should take notes of the de-
cisions, including the names of elders who will follow through and
the suggested date for completion. In some cases the coordina-
tor of the body of elders may ask the elder recommending an
item for the agenda to take the lead in presenting it for discussion.
9. Each elder should freely express himself if he believes he has
something meaningful to add. (Prov. 10:19) He should keep his
comments succinct and relevant. The coordinator of the body of
elders should avoid dominating the discussion, being careful as
to when and how he expresses himself. There should be no an-
ger or debates during elders’ meetings.—1 Tim. 2:8.
10. It should be possible for bodies of elders to be unanimous in most
of their decisions. (Acts 15:25) The body of elders should always
base their decisions on Bible principles and written direction from
“the faithful and discreet slave.” (Matt. 24:45) In cases that do
not involve specific Bible laws or where there is no direction from
the faithful slave, the body of elders must exercise their collec-
tive judgment and conscience. If a matter requires assistance
from the branch office, it is usually best to write. If the matter is
urgent, two elders together should call to explain the situation
and to make a note of the direction given.—See 14:6-30; 29:1.
11. No one should insist on his personal viewpoint. If a decision is
not unanimous, the minority should give willing support to the
final decision. If in the opinion of the minority a Bible-based de-
cision still has not been reached, the minority should continue to
cooperate with the rest of the body and should bring the matter
to the attention of the circuit overseer during his regular visit.

PURSUE PEACE
12. If the imperfections of those serving on the body are allowed to
cause strained relations, the flow of Jehovah’s spirit can be re-
stricted and the congregation may be adversely affected. Work
hard to pursue peace with your fellow elders. (Rom. 14:19) Cul-
tivate and maintain friendships with one another. At the same
time, you should not hold back from giving fellow elders loving
counsel when needed.—Ps. 141:5.
13. Take the lead in showing honor to your fellow elders. (Rom. 12:
10) One way you can do this is by keeping communication open
and free, especially if there are differences in background. Youn-
ger elders should be respectful of older, more experienced elders
on the body and demonstrate patience. (Lev. 19:32) Older elders
should not take offense when younger elders give suggestions or
respectfully offer counsel. (Eccl. 7:9) Humility will enable you to
accept counsel. (Prov. 12:15) Even if you feel the counsel was
not entirely justified, try to learn from it. Remember that the
peace and well-being of the congregation is more important than
personal interests.—1 Cor. 10:23, 24.

CHAPTER TWO
Congregation
Service Committee
1. The Congregation Service Committee works under the direction
of the body of elders and consists of the coordinator of the body
of elders, the secretary, and the service overseer. If a member of
the service committee is absent, another elder may substitute.
Certain responsibilities are delegated to the service committee
to handle. These elders seek to make decisions that are in line
with Scriptural and theocratic direction and that harmonize with
the thinking of the other elders. These brothers do not function
apart from the body, and their opinions do not carry more weight
than those of the other elders. The service committee uses good
judgment in determining when it would be wise to confer with
the other elders. For example, if unusual factors are involved or
if the service committee is unsure of the thinking of the body, the
entire body of elders should discuss the matter and make a de-
cision.—See 1:5; 9:4; 23:4; od pp. 41-43.
2. In congregations in which there are not enough elders to fulfill
the responsibilities of the service committee, qualified ministeri-
al servants may substitute as members of the service commit-
tee. For example, they may be authorized to sign applications or
letters of introduction as long as the documents do not contain
sensitive or confidential information. If sensitive or confidential
information needs to be conveyed in writing, the correspondence
should be prepared and signed only by the elders. If there are no
elders in the congregation, this could be cared for by an elder in
a neighboring congregation who is familiar with the situation or
by the circuit overseer.
3. The responsibilities of the service committee include the following:
(1) Determining the locations and meeting times for all
meetings for field service and assigning publishers,

CONGREGATION SERVICE COMMITTEE
including inactive ones, to field service groups after

consulting with the group overseers involved.
—See 1:2.8; 25:14.
(2) Assigning publishers to conduct Bible studies with
inactive publishers who temporarily need spiritual help.
—See 25:16.
(3) Determining whether it is advisable for another
publisher to conduct a Bible study with the child of a
Christian parent. When such approval is given, all
elders should be informed.
(4) Approving publishers to report field service in
15-minute increments.—See 22:14.
(5) Approving publishers who have special needs for
convention accommodations.
(6) Signing correspondence on behalf of the body of
elders.—See 22:1-8.
(7) Sending a letter of recommendation to the appropriate
branch office when a publisher plans to move and
wishes to obtain information regarding congregations
having a need for assistance.—od pp. 100-101 par. 9.
(8) Making the final decision on public witnessing
locations, determining what public witnessing
equipment will be used and where it will be stored, and
deciding which publishers are approved to participate
in public witnessing.—See 23:4-16.
(9) Approving publishers to participate in prison witnessing
as well as witnessing at schools, universities, nursing
homes, and retirement homes.—See 23:17-18; 28:1-20.
(10) Approving the appointment and deletion of regular
pioneers. Processing applications for service privileges

such as auxiliary pioneering. Reviewing the field service

activity of the pioneers who did not meet the yearly
hour requirement.—See 9:17-18.
(11) Approving use of the Kingdom Hall for weddings and

funerals.—See 27:6.
(12) Determining any additional jw.org roles assigned to

elders and ministerial servants.—See Instructions for
JW.ORG Local Domain Administrators (S-135).
(13) Determining how to handle material in the confidential

file when the brothers who handled the matter are
unavailable or no longer qualified.—See 22:26.
(14) Arranging for elders to visit or write a letter to

addresses of households that have asked that no
further visits be made.—See 23:21.
(15) Developing, along with the field service group

overseers, a plan to assist those with special needs in
times of disaster or emergency.—See Chapter 26.
(16) Developing a plan to protect congregation records in

the event of an impending disaster.—See Chapter 26.
4. At times, the service committee or the body of elders is called

upon to determine whether a publisher is “in good standing.” In
such cases, the elders must weigh the factors and circumstanc-
es that are unique to each situation. If an individual is not un-
der any judicial or branch-imposed restrictions, if he is not bring-
ing reproach on the congregation, and if his receiving a certain
privilege would not raise serious questions in the minds of oth-
ers or be a cause of stumbling, the elders may determine that
he is in good standing. By way of contrast, being “exemplary” in-
volves more than simply being in good standing. An individual
whose conduct and worship are considered worthy of imitation

is exemplary. His meeting attendance, share in the ministry, fam-

ily life, choices of entertainment, dress and grooming, and so
forth are good examples for others. An individual must be exem-
plary to represent the congregation in prayer, to serve as an aux-
iliary or regular pioneer, or to enjoy other special privileges.

CHAPTER THREE
Coordinator of the
Body of Elders
Paragraphs
Appointment ....................................................................................................................... 1
Qualifications .................................................................................................................... 2
APPOINTMENT
1. The circuit overseer is responsible for the appointment of the
coordinator of the body of elders, taking into consideration the
recommendation of the body of elders. If an adjustment is need-
ed, this appointment will be made during his regular visit to the
congregation. The body of elders may assign another elder to as-
sist the coordinator of the body of elders. If a temporary ad-
justment is made by the body of elders apart from the circuit
overseer’s visit, the Congregation Service Committee should im-
mediately notify the circuit overseer, explaining the reason for the
change. Whether the change in the coordinator of the body of
elders is permanent or temporary, a Coordinator of the Body of
Elders/Secretary Change of Address (S-29) form should be sub-
mitted to the Service Department. If the coordinator of the body
of elders will be away temporarily, the body of elders may select
another elder to substitute for him.
QUALIFICATIONS
2. The coordinator of the body of elders must be less than 80 years
of age. He should be known as one who is loyal to Jehovah and

COORDINATOR OF THE BODY OF ELDERS
to the organization. If possible, he should have served for years

as an elder. He should be approachable and respected for his
hard work in the ministry and as a shepherd. He should be a good
organizer and diligently care for his responsibilities. He is not the
coordinator of the congregation but is the coordinator of the body
of elders. He should maintain a modest view of his role in the
congregation and humbly appreciate his fellow elders and wel-
come their advice.—Prov. 15:22; Matt. 23:8.
RESPONSIBILITIES
3. The responsibilities of the coordinator of the body of elders in-
clude the following:
(1) Along with the secretary, ensuring that all elders have
access to correspondence directed to the body of
elders.—See Chapter 22.
(2) Approving the items placed on the congregation
information board.—See 21:34.
(3) Arranging for elders to review questions with baptismal

candidates. If there are very few elders, capable
ministerial servants may be used to review the
questions found in “Part 1—Elementary Bible Teachings”
and “Part 3—Jehovah’s Arrangement of Things” in the
appendix of the Organized book.—See od pp. 211-214.
(4) Arranging for meetings of the body of elders or
the Congregation Service Committee and serving as
chairman during such meetings. He compiles and
distributes agendas for scheduled elders’ meetings.
—See 1:3-11.
(5) Arranging for two elders (one being a member of
the service committee) to meet with each person
desiring to become an unbaptized publisher. (See

od pp. 69-71.) In congregations that have very few

elders, a capable ministerial servant who has
demonstrated good judgment and discernment may
accompany a member of the Congregation Service
Committee when meeting with Bible students desiring
to become unbaptized publishers.
(6) Arranging for two elders, one of them being
the individual’s group overseer, to meet with each
baptized publisher one year after baptism.—See 4:2.7;
od pp. 213-214.
(7) Arranging for two elders to ask the necessary
questions of a brother approved for appointment as an
elder or as a ministerial servant when the brother was
not present during the visit of the circuit overseer.
—See 8:17-18.
(8) Arranging for two elders to inform a brother of
his deletion as an elder or as a ministerial servant
between visits of the circuit overseer and informing the
circuit overseer if the brother appeals the deletion.
—See 8:35, 39.
(9) Contacting the circuit overseer when a committee
needs to handle wrongdoing involving child sexual
abuse.—See 14:19-21.
(10) Distinguishing between items that individual elders can
handle and those needing attention by the entire body
of elders, in accord with published direction.—See 2:1.
(11) Ensuring appropriate follow-through on direction

received from the branch office and on decisions made
by the body of elders.
(12) Ensuring that newly appointed elders and elders who

move into the congregation are made aware of the

Service Department’s direction regarding individuals

under branch-imposed restrictions.—See 14:22-24.
(13) Maintaining communication with the group overseers
and the circuit overseer when a disaster occurs.—See
Chapter 26.
(14) Reviewing and approving all announcements made to
the congregation.
(15) Serving as one of the jw.org local domain
administrators, if possible.—See Instructions for
JW.ORG Local Domain Administrators (S-135).
(16) Taking the lead in caring for details in preparation
for the circuit overseer’s visit.—See Chapter 10 and
Information Needed for Visit of Circuit Overseer (S-61).
(17) Making assignments of all midweek meeting parts other
than the student assignments. This includes making the
assignment of the meeting chairman for each week
from among those approved by the body of elders. In
cooperation with the Life and Ministry Meeting
overseer, the coordinator of the body of elders should
ensure that a copy of the assignment schedule for the
entire meeting is posted on the information board.
(18) Overseeing the attendants, the public talk coordinator,
and those working with the stage, sound, and video.
(19) Scheduling public talk chairmen and Watchtower
readers. Another elder or ministerial servant may be
used to assist.—See 6:9.
(20) Approving expenses and arranging for audits.—See
Instructions for Congregation Accounting (S-27).

CHAPTER FOUR
Secretary
Paragraphs
Qualifications .................................................................................................................... 1
QUALIFICATIONS
1. The body of elders selects the secretary. The secretary should
have good organizational ability and should not be a procrasti-
nator. (Rom. 12:11) He should have the ability to write in a way
that is clear and understandable. The body of elders may assign
another elder to assist him. If necessary, a qualified ministerial
servant may be assigned by the body of elders to assist with
tasks such as the compiling, posting, and submitting of the con-
gregation’s field service activity to the branch. The branch office
should be notified of a change of the brother serving as secre-
tary by means of the Coordinator of the Body of Elders/Secretary
Change of Address (S-29) form.
RESPONSIBILITIES
2. The responsibilities of the secretary include the following:
(1) Along with the coordinator of the body of elders,

ensuring that all elders have access to correspondence
directed to the body of elders.—See Chapter 22.
(2) Along with the service overseer, reviewing the activity

of regular pioneers near the midpoint of the service
year.—See 9:16.

SECRETARY
(3) Compiling, posting, and submitting the congregation’s

field service activity to the branch office. Before
submitting the report, informing group overseers of
publishers in their group who did not submit a report
for the month.—See 22:12-17.
(4) Ensuring that any legal and financial responsibilities the
congregation may have are handled in a timely manner.
—See Chapter 21.
(5) Maintaining an orderly congregation file. This
includes filing sealed confidential envelopes and
adhering to the retention policy outlined in Chapter 22,
paragraphs 8-27.
(6) Providing durable power of attorney (DPA) cards and
related materials to newly baptized publishers.
—See 11:1.
(7) Notifying the coordinator of the body of elders when
a publisher has been baptized one year.—See 3:3.6;
od pp. 213-214.
(8) Overseeing congregation accounts and convention
matters.—See 1:2.7 and Instructions for Congregation
Accounting (S-27).
(9) Maintaining a list of all publishers, including inactive
ones. The list should show to which field service group
the publisher is assigned. It should also contain the
contact information and emergency contact
information for each publisher.—See 25:14-15; 26:2.
(10) Preparing and sending correspondence on behalf of the
body of elders.—See 22:1-9.
(11) Updating regular pioneer information on jw.org.
—See 9:1-9.

CHAPTER FIVE
Service Overseer
Paragraphs
Qualifications .................................................................................................................... 1
QUALIFICATIONS
1. The body of elders selects the service overseer. He takes a keen
interest in the publishers’ share in the ministry and their effec-
tiveness. He is enthusiastic about the ministry and motivates oth-
ers to have a full share. He is skillful in various aspects of the
work, capable of training others, and alert to do so. The body of
elders may assign another elder to assist him.
RESPONSIBILITIES
2. The responsibilities of the service overseer include the following:
(1) Arranging for the congregation’s territory to be worked

thoroughly and overseeing the work of the territory
servant.—See 23:1-3.
(2) Arranging for brothers or sisters to conduct meetings

for service, as needed. (See 7:2.2.) He organizes
witnessing on holidays and during special campaigns.
(3) Determining what permits, if any, are required for

public witnessing, organizing schedules for public
witnessing, providing initial training for public
witnessing, and determining what literature should be
displayed at public witnessing locations.—See 23:4-16.

SERVICE OVERSEER
(4) Overseeing the work of the literature servant. This

includes ensuring that anyone in the congregation who
is deaf, blind, or has impaired vision is able to request
literature in his preferred format.—See 1:2.7 and
Literature Request and Inventory Guidelines (S-56).
(5) Visiting a different field service group each month. (In
congregations with few groups, he may arrange to visit
each one twice during the year.) During the visit, he
conducts the meeting for field service and works with
the group in the ministry, offering helpful suggestions
as needed. He reviews the Congregation’s Publisher
Records (S-21) with the group overseer and his
assistant and discusses the effectiveness of existing
field service arrangements.
(6) Ensuring that adequate supplies of forms are available
for congregation use.
(7) Along with the secretary, reviewing the activity of
regular pioneers near the midpoint of the service year.
—See 9:16.
(8) Annually, providing to the Congregation Service
Committee the addresses of households that have
asked that no further visits be made.—See 23:21.
(9) Training publishers for witnessing at schools,
universities, nursing homes, and retirement homes.
—See 23:17-18.

CHAPTER SIX
Watchtower Study Conductor
Paragraphs
Qualifications .................................................................................................................... 1
Conducting the Study .......................................................................................... 2-9
QUALIFICATIONS
1. The body of elders selects the Watchtower Study conductor. Since
The Watchtower is the principal means by which the faithful and
discreet slave dispenses spiritual food, the conductor should be
one of the best teachers on the body. (Jas. 3:1) He should also
be one who has “great freeness of speech.” (1 Tim. 3:13) The
body of elders may assign another elder to assist the Watchtower
Study conductor. This brother would conduct in the assigned con-
ductor’s absence.
CONDUCTING THE STUDY

2. The conductor presents brief, well-prepared opening remarks for
no more than 90 seconds. He highlights the theme and theme
text and in a warm and enthusiastic manner tries to stimulate in-
terest in the lesson. He does this by commenting on the preview
of the article, by calling attention to the subheadings, by men-
tioning the review questions, or by raising two or three rhetor-
ical questions answered by the lesson.
3. He does not comment excessively and avoids the tendency to

summarize or enhance comments from the audience. If the audi-
ence fails to comment on an important point, asking an auxiliary
question may stimulate the thinking of the audience and prompt

WATCHTOWER STUDY CONDUCTOR
an appropriate comment. However, asking additional questions

unnecessarily tends to stifle commenting.
4. He concentrates on the theme and main points, makes good use
of the artwork, and highlights the practical value of the article.
He avoids focusing on minor details and bringing into the discus-
sion extensive outside theocratic or secular material from per-
sonal research.
5. He emphasizes the Bible. He may choose to have “Read” Scrip-
ture texts read by the assigned paragraph reader or by someone
from the audience who reads well. The paragraph reading should
not be interrupted by the reading of such texts. When a “Read”
scripture is cited at the very beginning of a paragraph, the text
should be read before the paragraph is read. When a “Read” scrip-
ture is cited in the middle or at the end of a paragraph, the con-
ductor may determine when to have the text read after the read-
ing of the paragraph has concluded. He may decide to have the
text read before the question is asked, particularly if the answer
to the question is found in the scripture. At other times, he may
decide to have the text read during the general discussion of the
material.
6. Footnotes and endnotes are not read by the assigned paragraph
reader. The conductor decides to what extent the thought in a
footnote or an endnote should be included in the discussion. Af-
ter the paragraph has been read, the conductor might choose to
have someone in the audience read the footnote or endnote or
he might choose to ask for a comment on it. In some cases, he
may not refer to it at all. Material in parentheses or in brackets
within a paragraph is usually read aloud. A reference that simply
identifies source material, such as a scripture citation, is not read
aloud.
7. He encourages as many as possible to participate and tactfully
reminds the audience that the first answer should be a direct an-
swer to the printed question. After the direct answer is given,

the audience may comment on cited scriptures, supporting argu-

ments, practical application of the material, and so forth. He en-
courages individuals to comment in their own words, calls on only
one person at a time, and does not scold the audience if an-
swers are not forthcoming.
8. At the conclusion of the article, he asks the review questions. His
concluding remarks should be no more than 90 seconds. The
study should last no more than 60 minutes, excluding the songs
and closing prayer.
9. Only exemplary individuals who read very well should be approved
by the body of elders as paragraph readers. If no brothers meet
these qualifications, then qualified sisters may be used. Readers
should be assigned in advance. (See 3:3.19.) It is preferred that
the paragraphs be read live during congregation meetings. How-
ever, if no qualified readers are available, it is permissible to use
audio recordings found on jw.org.


CHAPTER SEVEN
Field Service Group

Overseer
Paragraphs
Qualifications .................................................................................................................... 1
QUALIFICATIONS
1. The body of elders should assign one overseer and one assistant
to each field service group. The group overseer is responsible to
assist all in his assigned group to make spiritual advancement.
(1 Tim. 4:15; Heb. 12:12) He should be an alert, caring shepherd.
(Isa. 32:2) His zealous lead in the field ministry will encourage
others to keep active in preaching the good news. (Heb. 13:15-
17) In view of the importance of this assignment, the body of el-
ders should select those elders most qualified to fulfill all the as-
pects of this assignment. If there are not enough elders in the
congregation who are able to serve as group overseers or group
assistants, ministerial servants may be assigned as group ser-
vants or group assistants. If there are not enough ministerial ser-
vants, a baptized brother who is a good example may serve as
the group assistant. The other elders and ministerial servants in
each group should be alert to support the group overseer and
his assistant in caring for these responsibilities.—Eph. 4:15, 16;
od pp. 39-41 pars. 29-34.
RESPONSIBILITIES
2. The responsibilities of field service group overseers include the
following:

FIELD SERVICE GROUP OVERSEER
(1) Taking an active interest in the physical and spiritual

needs of each one in the group by maintaining regular
contact with each family—weekly, if possible.—Jas. 1:27;
2:15, 16; see Chapter 25.
(2) Taking the lead when the group meets for field service,
especially on weekends. Periodically, he may assign his
assistant or another brother to conduct such meetings.
If he cannot be present, he makes sure that the group
will be cared for by his assistant or another brother.
—See 1:2.8.
(3) Arranging to work regularly in the ministry with each

one in the group to provide encouragement and
training in various aspects of the Kingdom-preaching
and teaching work.—Luke 8:1.
(4) Arranging to shepherd periodically all in the group.

—See Chapter 25.
(5) Developing, along with the Congregation Service

Committee, a plan to assist those with special needs in
times of emergency or disaster.—See Chapter 26.
(6) Reviewing periodically with his assistant the activity of

those in his group to determine their strengths and
weaknesses in the ministry.
(7) Meeting with publishers one year after baptism

to provide encouragement and helpful suggestions. He
will be accompanied by an elder assigned by the
coordinator of the body of elders.—See 4:2.7;
od pp. 213-214.
(8) Assisting and training exemplary, baptized brothers in

the group to reach out and qualify for congregation
responsibilities.

(9) Helping to collect the monthly field service reports.

When the secretary informs him of missing reports,
he immediately follows through. If someone did not
participate in field service for an entire month, he
offers help as needed, according to the circumstances
of the individual.


CHAPTER EIGHT
Appointment and
Deletion of Elders and
Ministerial Servants
Paragraphs
Considering Scriptural Qualifications ..................................................... 1-5
Cautions Before Recommending Certain Brothers .................. 6-11
Previously Reproved, Disfellowshipped, or Disassociated ....... 7
Guilty of Adultery in the Past ........................................................................ 8
Separated or Unscripturally Divorced ..................................................... 9
Served as an Elder or a Ministerial Servant in the Past ...... 10
Baptized for Many Years but Only Now
Being Recommended ...................................................................................... 11
When an Appointed Brother Moves Out
of the Congregation ................................................................................................. 12
When an Appointed Brother Moves
Into the Congregation ..................................................................................... 13-14
Recommendations for Appointment During the Circuit
Overseer’s Regular Visit to a Congregation ............................... 15-20
Recommendations for Appointment Between the Circuit
Overseer’s Regular Visits to a Congregation .................................... 21
Situations That Require a Review of an
Appointed Brother’s Qualifications .................................................... 22-28
Member of His Household Gets Involved
in Serious Wrongdoing ................................................................................. 22
Allows Disfellowshipped or Disassociated Family Member
to Move Into His Home ................................................................................ 23
Supports the Marriage of a Baptized Christian to an
Unbaptized Person ........................................................................................... 24

APPOINTMENT AND DELETION OF ELDERS AND MINISTERIAL SERVANTS
Committed a Disfellowshipping Offense Years in the

Past and the Matter Was Never Addressed ........................ 25-27
Viewed Pornography ........................................................................................... 28
Situations That May Require a Review of an Appointed
Brother’s Qualifications ................................................................................ 29-30
Files for Bankruptcy ............................................................................................ 29
He or a Member of His Household Pursues
Higher Education ............................................................................................... 30
Procedure for Reviewing an Appointed
Brother’s Qualifications ................................................................................. 31-33
Recommendations for Deletion During the
Circuit Overseer’s Regular Visit to a Congregation .................... 34
Recommendations for Deletion Between the
Circuit Overseer’s Regular Visits to a Congregation ................. 35
Resignations ................................................................................................................... 36
Deletions for Judicial Reasons or Death .............................................. 37
Announcements of Deletion ............................................................................. 38
Appealing Deletions ................................................................................................. 39
Congregation File ...................................................................................................... 40
CONSIDERING SCRIPTURAL QUALIFICATIONS

1. Before meeting to consider recommending brothers as ministeri-
al servants or elders, each elder should personally review the in-
spired qualifications found at 1 Timothy 3:1-13; Titus 1:5-9; James
3:17, 18; and 1 Peter 5:2, 3. Helpful comments on the Scriptural
qualifications can be found in chapters 5 and 6 of Organized to
Do Jehovah’s Will.
2. After the meeting is opened with prayer, the Scriptural require-

ments should be read aloud from the Bible. Although no one
could measure up perfectly to these requirements, the brother

being considered should measure up to a reasonable degree, not

significantly lacking in any one of the requirements. The circuit
overseer relies on your good judgment and spiritual discernment
in this matter.
3. Natural ability does not qualify a brother for appointment. He
must be a spiritual man, giving evidence that holy spirit is oper-
ating on him. Is he zealous for fine works? Is he a good exam-
ple in his attendance and participation at congregation meet-
ings? Is he zealous in the ministry, doing what he reasonably can
in view of his age, health, family obligations, and other theocrat-
ic responsibilities? (See 23:24-25.) Is he a student of the Bible?
Does he endeavor to help his family spiritually, regularly study-
ing with his wife and his children living at home? Does he man-
ifest the fruitage of the spirit in his daily life?—Gal. 5:22, 23.
4. Though it is the brother who must measure up to the Scriptural
qualifications, you should also consider the spirituality of those
in his household. If his wife is baptized, is she a good example?
If she is spiritually weak, is he doing what he reasonably can to
assist her? Is he making family worship a priority? Are his minor
children well-behaved and “believing,” either progressing toward
dedication to God or already baptized as Jehovah’s Witnesses?
Do his family members participate in congregation meetings to
a reasonable extent? What does the conduct of any adult chil-
dren living in the home reveal?—Titus 1:6; see 8:22.
5. The elders should help brothers in their late teens to reach out
and qualify to be ministerial servants. The following factors will
be helpful when considering the qualifications of such a brother.
Does the congregation respect him as a spiritual man? (1 Cor. 2:
15, 16) Does he display “the fruitage of the spirit”? Does he have
a meaningful share in the ministry? Does his use of his time give
evidence that he is putting Kingdom interests first? Do his con-
versation and comments give evidence of good personal study
habits? What are his spiritual goals?—Gal. 5:22, 23; Ps. 1:1, 2;
Matt. 6:33; Eph. 4:29.

CAUTIONS BEFORE RECOMMENDING

CERTAIN BROTHERS
6. Elders should make sure they have full and complete information
regarding the brothers they intend to recommend to the circuit
overseer, especially those in the following circumstances.
7. Previously Reproved, Disfellowshipped, or Disassociated: If he
was reproved within the past three years or reinstated within the
past five years, please provide the following information: What
was the offense? In a case of reproof, did the judicial committee
make an announcement? In a case of disfellowshipping or disas-
sociation, what is the date of reinstatement? When were the last
restrictions lifted? Are you aware of his having been reproved,
disfellowshipped, or disassociated on any other occasions? What
convinces you that he has lived down his past wrongdoing and
that others now view him as a good example? If the wrongdoing
took place in another congregation, how would that congrega-
tion view his appointment? Recommending him prematurely could
minimize the seriousness of wrongdoing in his own eyes and in
the eyes of others. It could also disturb those who still have his
wrongdoing fresh in their memories.
8. Guilty of Adultery in the Past: When did the adultery occur?
Was he reproved or disfellowshipped? If he was reproved, was an
announcement made? Did the innocent mate reject him? How do
you know this? If he divorced and remarried, did he marry the
individual with whom he committed adultery? Is there evidence
that he schemed to put away his former mate or that he pres-
sured her to accept a divorce? Did the adultery break up the
marriage of the other person? How were others affected by his
adultery? Is the innocent mate still alive? Did the innocent mate
remarry? What convinces you that he has lived down his past
wrongdoing and is now viewed with respect? If the wrongdoing
took place in another congregation, how would that congrega-
tion view his appointment?—See 12:10-12.

9. Separated or Unscripturally Divorced: Who is primarily to blame

for the marital problems? What were the circumstances surround-
ing the separation or divorce? Who was responsible for the sep-
aration, or who pursued the divorce? Did both sign the decree
or in some other way indicate their agreement? How long ago
did the separation or divorce occur? What is the brother doing
to try to reconcile? Is his mate unwilling to cooperate with his ef-
forts? If so, why? How is his situation viewed by the congrega-
tions involved? How do the elders of the mate’s congregation feel
about the brother? When separation and divorce are involved,
there may be deficiencies on the part of one or both mates that
make it necessary to limit special privileges because one or both
mates may not be viewed as exemplary.—w00 12/15 pp. 28-29;
lvs pp. 250-251.
10. Served as an Elder or a Ministerial Servant in the Past: With
what congregation did he previously serve, and when did he stop
serving? Why did he stop serving? What makes his circumstances
different now? What progress has he made since he stopped serv-
ing? If he stopped serving in another congregation, how would
that congregation view his reappointment? If he previously served
as an elder and was not guilty of gross wrongdoing, it may not
be necessary for him now to serve first as a ministerial servant,
depending on the length of time since he stopped serving as an
elder.—See 13:8.
11. Baptized for Many Years but Only Now Being Recommend-
ed: What prevented the brother from being recommended in the
past?
WHEN AN APPOINTED BROTHER MOVES OUT

OF THE CONGREGATION
12. Unless there are serious reservations about the qualifications of
an appointed brother who is moving, the Congregation Service
Committee should send a letter of introduction to the elders in

the new congregation plainly stating that the body of elders rec-
ommends that he continue to serve and in what assignments he
has experience. (See 22:5-8.) If there are serious reservations,
the body of elders should meet as soon as possible to deter-
mine whether they will recommend him for reappointment or not.
(See 8:31-33.) If they do not recommend him, two or more elders
should meet with him and explain the Scriptural reason for the
body’s decision. The letter of introduction should clearly explain
their concerns, the counsel they gave him, and whether he agrees
with the decision. (See 8:38.) At the next visit of the circuit over-
seer, the elders should inform the circuit overseer of the broth-
er’s move. This is true whether he received a favorable recom-
mendation or not.
WHEN AN APPOINTED BROTHER MOVES INTO

THE CONGREGATION
13. Elders and ministerial servants who move to a new congregation
with a favorable letter of recommendation and who have a favor-
able recommendation from the elders of the new congregation
but who have not yet been reappointed may be used to present
parts on the midweek meeting and to give public talks, accord-
ing to their abilities. (See 22:6.7.) They may attend a Kingdom
Ministry School. In addition, they can be present with the minis-
terial servants during the meeting the circuit overseer conducts
with the appointed servants in the congregation. If the circuit
overseer’s outline includes additional information for elders only,
recommended elders who have not yet been reappointed can re-
main as this information is discussed. However, they should not
be present when recommendations and local congregation needs
are considered. Neither should they serve on judicial committees
or attend other meetings of the body of elders.
14. If an elder or a ministerial servant regularly moves away to live at
a second residence, he should not be appointed in both congre-

gations. One congregation should hold the Congregation’s Pub-

lisher Records (S-21). Each time he leaves, the elders should write
a letter to the congregation he will be attending temporarily, ex-
plaining his circumstances and how he was being used. The el-
ders of the congregation he is visiting can use him to care for
duties and responsibilities in the congregation as outlined above.
Even if he will be away for more than three months, he should
send his field service reports to his home congregation.
RECOMMENDATIONS FOR APPOINTMENT

DURING THE CIRCUIT OVERSEER’S REGULAR
VISIT TO A CONGREGATION
15. At least one month before the circuit overseer’s visit, the Con-
gregation Service Committee should send to the circuit overseer
the full name, date of birth, and date of baptism of any brother
the body of elders will be recommending for appointment as an
elder or a ministerial servant. The Recommendations for Appoint-
ment of Elders and Ministerial Servants (S-62) form should be
used for this purpose. Any ministerial servants who substitute as
members of the service committee should not be aware of or be
involved in any discussions regarding the recommendation. Min-
isterial servants should have no access to any forms or corre-
spondence related to the appointment or deletion of elders and
ministerial servants.
16. No earlier than a day or two before the start of the visit, perhaps
when other congregation records are provided, the elders should
provide the circuit overseer with any background information that
has a bearing on the qualifications of the brother(s) being recom-
mended for appointment. Such information would include letters
of recommendation (or perhaps letters of introduction) from a
previous congregation. (See 8:6-11.) During the meeting with the
elders later in the week, the circuit overseer will discuss the Scrip-
tural qualifications of each brother recommended. (See 8:1-5.) If

the circuit overseer determines that the brother does not mea-
sure up to the Scriptural requirements to a reasonable degree,
he will advise the elders accordingly and inform them how they
can help the brother to qualify in the future.
17. When the circuit overseer decides to appoint a brother, the cir-
cuit overseer and another elder will meet with the brother to in-
form him of his appointment. If the brother is (1) being appointed
for the first time as a ministerial servant or (2) being reappoint-
ed as an elder or a ministerial servant for reasons other than his
move from one congregation to another, the circuit overseer will
ask the following questions: “(1) Is there anything from your past,
even before baptism, or in your personal or family life that dis-
qualifies you or that would prevent you from accepting this ap-
pointment? (2) Is there any reason why your appointment should
not be announced to the congregation? (3) Have you ever been
involved at any time in the past with child sexual abuse?” If the
brother answers no to the questions, the circuit overseer will pro-
vide the elders with a signed appointment letter that includes the
brother’s name in the list of those appointed during the visit. The
appointment should be announced to the congregation at the
next midweek meeting.
18. If the brother approved for appointment is not present at the con-
clusion of the visit and it is necessary to ask him the questions
mentioned in the preceding paragraph, the circuit overseer will
not include the brother’s name in the appointment letter, if any,
left with the elders at the end of the visit. Rather, when the broth-
er returns, the coordinator of the body of elders should assign
two elders to ask the brother the questions. The coordinator of
the body of elders will then inform the circuit overseer of the
brother’s answers. If the brother answers no to the questions, the
circuit overseer will provide the elders with a signed appointment
letter. At the midweek meeting following the receipt of the ap-
pointment letter, the brother’s appointment should be announced
to the congregation.

19. If the brother approved for appointment is not present at the con-
clusion of the visit but it is not necessary to ask him the ques-
tions mentioned in paragraph 17, the circuit overseer will include
the brother’s name in the appointment letter left with the elders
at the end of the visit. When the brother returns, the coordina-
tor of the body of elders should assign two elders to meet with
the brother to inform him of his appointment before it is an-
nounced to the congregation.
20. If the circuit overseer decides not to appoint a brother, two el-
ders may speak with the brother at an appropriate time and dis-
creetly explain what he needs to do to qualify. The elders should
not inform him that the body of elders recommended him. On
occasion the circuit overseer will not approve a recommendation
so as to allow time for the brother to develop maturity and ex-
perience or to live down past wrongdoing. In such cases, there
may be no need to discuss matters with the brother.
RECOMMENDATIONS FOR APPOINTMENT

BETWEEN THE CIRCUIT OVERSEER’S REGULAR
VISITS TO A CONGREGATION
21. When an elder or a ministerial servant moves into the congrega-
tion with a favorable letter of recommendation for reappointment
and the next visit of the circuit overseer is not in the near future,
the body of elders may recommend his immediate reappointment.
In such cases, the Congregation Service Committee should sub-
mit the Recommendations for Appointment of Elders and Minis-
terial Servants (S-62) form to the circuit overseer along with a
copy of the letter of recommendation from the service commit-
tee of his former congregation. If the recommendation is ap-
proved, an appointment letter will be sent to the body of elders.
A brother who has been reappointed as an elder or a ministeri-
al servant should be informed of his appointment before it is an-
nounced to the congregation.

SITUATIONS THAT REQUIRE A REVIEW OF AN

APPOINTED BROTHER’S QUALIFICATIONS
22. Member of His Household Gets Involved in Serious Wrongdo-
ing: If a brother’s wife or child, including an adult child living in
his home, is involved in serious wrongdoing, the body should seek
to determine whether the brother was negligent. Was he permis-
sive? Was he alert to provide needed direction, anticipating po-
tential problems? Was he regularly conducting family worship?
Was he giving his family needed time and attention? When he
became aware of serious wrongdoing, did he promptly inform the
body of elders so that they could properly investigate the mat-
ter? Did he shield his family from discipline or try to manipulate
the elders’ handling of the situation? Does he continue to have
the respect and confidence of the congregation as an exempla-
ry family head? If one of his children was guilty of serious wrong-
doing, are the other children doing well spiritually? If the broth-
er has done all that can reasonably be expected and especially
if he has had spiritual success with others in his household, re-
jection of his fine direction by one family member would not nec-
essarily disqualify him if he continues to have the respect of the
congregation.
23. Allows Disfellowshipped or Disassociated Family Member to

Move Into His Home: Is the disfellowshipped or disassociated in-
dividual unable to live on his own, or has he moved because it
is an easier life? Are there valid reasons for allowing him back in
the home, or is it primarily so that the Christian family mem-
bers can have a measure of association with him? Did the fam-
ily avoid unnecessary contact with him when he was living outside
the home? Is the arrangement short-term or long-term? What is
the disfellowshipped or disassociated individual’s conduct? What
spiritual effect is he having on others in the household, especial-
ly siblings? Is the congregation disturbed by the brother’s de-
cision? Have a number lost respect for him? Similar questions

should be considered when an adult child living at home is disfel-

lowshipped or disassociated and allowed to remain in the home.
24. Supports the Marriage of a Baptized Christian to an Unbap-
tized Person: An appointed man should be loyal to Jehovah’s
standards, including the Scriptural command to marry “only in
the Lord,” that is, to marry a dedicated, baptized Christian. (1 Cor.
7:39; 2 Cor. 6:14, 15; Titus 1:8; w04 7/1 p. 31; lvs pp. 134-136)
This command applies to all Christians, including those who are
inactive. Questions about an appointed brother’s qualifications
would result if he encouraged or gave unspoken approval to such
a marriage, for example, by supporting the courtship or by sup-
porting, attending, or participating in the wedding or wedding re-
ception. A brother’s qualifications should also be reviewed if he
did not get involved personally but allowed his wife or others in
his household to do so. If an elder or a ministerial servant dis-
plays poor judgment in these areas to a degree that it raises se-
rious questions in the minds of others, he may be Scripturally
disqualified from serving.
25. Committed a Disfellowshipping Offense Years in the Past and
the Matter Was Never Addressed: The body of elders may de-
termine he can continue to serve if the following is true: The im-
morality or other serious wrongdoing occurred more than a few
years ago, and he is genuinely repentant, recognizing that he
should have come forward immediately when he sinned. (Perhaps
he has even confessed to his sin, seeking help with his guilty con-
science.) He has been serving faithfully for many years, has ev-
idence of God’s blessing, and has the respect of the congregation.
26. If the sin occurred before he was appointed as an elder or a min-
isterial servant, the elders will need to take into consideration the
fact that he should have mentioned this possible obstacle to his
being qualified when elders met with him just prior to announc-
ing his appointment. Moreover, the nature of the sin may reflect
greatly on his qualifications to serve. For example, the sin may

involve past child sexual abuse, which means that he would not
qualify for many years, if ever.—See 14:22-24.
27. If the wrongdoing occurred within the past few years while he
was serving as an elder or a ministerial servant, he is disqualified
from serving as such, not being “free from accusation.” (1 Tim.
3:2, 10; Titus 1:6, 7) Depending on the circumstances, the situ-
ation may also need to be handled by a judicial committee.—See
12:57-59.
28. Viewed Pornography: See 13:5-6.
SITUATIONS THAT MAY REQUIRE A REVIEW OF

AN APPOINTED BROTHER’S QUALIFICATIONS
29. Files for Bankruptcy: Have members of the congregation or the
community become upset? Did the brother lack self-control in his
spending or fail to use reasonable foresight in his business deci-
sions? Does he have a reputation for being honest and respon-
sible? Is he viewed as one who conscientiously tries to pay his
debts? Does he feel a moral responsibility to repay canceled debts
if former creditors would accept payment? Does he still have the
respect of the congregation? Does he continue to have “a fine
testimony from outsiders”?—1 Tim. 3:7; w94 9/15 pp. 30-31.
30. He or a Member of His Household Pursues Higher Education:
If an appointed brother, his wife, or his children pursue higher
education, does his life pattern show that he puts Kingdom in-
terests first in his life? (w05 10/1 p. 27 par. 6) Does he teach his
family members to put Kingdom interests first? Does he respect
what has been published by the faithful slave on the dangers of
higher education? Do his speech and conduct reveal that he is a
spiritual person? How is he viewed by the congregation? Why is
he or his family pursuing higher learning? Do they have theocrat-
ic goals? Does the pursuit of higher education interfere with reg-
ular meeting attendance, meaningful participation in field ser-
vice, or other theocratic activities?

PROCEDURE FOR REVIEWING AN APPOINTED

BROTHER’S QUALIFICATIONS
31. When preparing to review the qualifications of a brother, elders
should first research current direction that applies to the issue
at hand. Avoid dogmatic viewpoints or quick decisions based
solely on personal preferences. (Phil. 4:5) Do not be quick to rec-
ommend deletion unless there is a solid basis for doing so. It may
be possible to assist the brother to make the needed adjustments
and continue to serve. Has the brother served faithfully for many
years? What has he done or failed to do that raises questions?
How did he react to counsel? Has he had such difficulties in the
past, and how did he then respond to efforts to help? Was his
wrongdoing really so serious that it requires restricting his priv-
ileges? Possibly he just made a mistake, using poor judgment.
The congregation in general may still have respect for him and
confidence in him as an elder or a ministerial servant. Perhaps
the matter is not widely known, if at all. If he realizes that his ac-
tion was unwise, has learned from his mistake, has a good atti-
tude, and wants to improve, it may be that he can continue to
serve.
32. If it is necessary to review an elder’s qualifications, the body of

elders should consider the matter, with the brother in question
present, using the following procedure:
(1) After seeking Jehovah’s guidance in prayer, make sure

all the facts are presented. Maintain a respectful,
orderly atmosphere that is conducive to such a
discussion.
(2) Allow the brother adequate time to express his

feelings and to answer any questions. Ask him for his
view of the matters being discussed regarding his
qualifications.

(3) Ask the brother to leave the room while the other
elders continue their discussion and decide what they
will recommend.
(4) Invite the brother back into the room. If the decision
is to recommend his deletion, inform him of this and
the Scriptural reasons.
(5) Give the brother the opportunity to comment on the
decision. It may be necessary for the brother to leave
the room again so that the elders can discuss the
matter further before making a final decision.
33. If the qualifications of a ministerial servant are being reviewed,
the same basic procedure is followed except that rather than hav-
ing the brother present during the meeting of the body of elders,
it would usually be sufficient for two elders to speak with him in
advance to hear him out. If the body of elders decides to recom-
mend his deletion, the two elders would meet with him again to
inform him of the recommendation and the Scriptural reasons
and to give him the opportunity to express himself. Based on his
comments, it may be necessary for the elders to discuss the mat-
ter further before making a final recommendation.
RECOMMENDATIONS FOR DELETION DURING

THE CIRCUIT OVERSEER’S REGULAR VISIT TO
A CONGREGATION
34. Recommendations for deletion because of poor judgment not of
a judicial nature are usually best submitted during the visit of the
circuit overseer rather than between visits. At the start of the cir-
cuit overseer’s visit, the elders should provide any background
information, including any conclusion that the body of elders may
have already reached, that will help the circuit overseer have a
complete view of the matter. (See 8:31-33.) During his meeting
with the elders later in the week, the circuit overseer will discuss

the Scriptural qualifications of the brother. If the circuit overseer

agrees with the recommendation, the brother will be informed of
his deletion. If the brother agrees with the decision, the circuit
overseer will generate a letter of deletion. The announcement of
deletion should be made at the next midweek meeting. (See 8:38.)
If the brother disagrees with the decision, he will be informed of
his right to appeal.—See 8:39.
RECOMMENDATIONS FOR DELETION BETWEEN

THE CIRCUIT OVERSEER’S REGULAR VISITS TO
A CONGREGATION
35. If serious questions arise concerning a brother’s qualifications
and the next visit of the circuit overseer is not in the near future,
the body of elders should follow the procedure outlined in Chap-
ter 8, paragraphs 31-33. If the body of elders decides to recom-
mend a brother’s deletion after reviewing his qualifications, the
Congregation Service Committee should send the recommenda-
tion to the circuit overseer immediately. The letter to the circuit
overseer should provide complete details and indicate whether
or not the brother agrees with the recommendation. Meanwhile,
the brother will continue to serve as an elder or a ministerial ser-
vant. The body of elders will determine what congregation re-
sponsibilities he will have in the interim, according to the circum-
stances. If the circuit overseer agrees with the recommendation
and believes it should be processed immediately, he will send a
letter of deletion to the body of elders. Upon receipt of the let-
ter, the coordinator of the body of elders should assign two el-
ders to inform the brother of the circuit overseer’s decision. If the
brother accepts the circuit overseer’s decision, the announcement
should be made at the next midweek meeting. (See 8:38.) If the
brother does not accept the decision, he should be informed of
his right to appeal, the announcement to the congregation should
be held in abeyance, and the coordinator of the body of elders
should inform the circuit overseer.—See 8:39.

RESIGNATIONS
36. If a brother expresses a desire to resign, two elders should first
discuss the matter with him. Why does he wish to resign? Is he
Scripturally disqualified? If his personal circumstances hinder him
from doing what he would like, can the elders be of any assistance
and encouragement? Until his circumstances change, perhaps
they can lighten his load for a period of time while he continues
to serve. If he still feels he wants to resign after this discussion,
the Congregation Service Committee should write the circuit over-
seer and provide full details as to why the brother chose to re-
linquish his privilege of service. The circuit overseer will send a
letter of deletion to the body of elders.—See 8:35.
DELETIONS FOR JUDICIAL REASONS

OR DEATH
37. The Congregation Service Committee should immediately inform
the circuit overseer of (1) the deletion of an elder or a ministeri-
al servant because of judicial reproof, disfellowshipping, or dis-
association or (2) the death of an elder or a ministerial servant.
For deletions resulting from judicial reproof, disfellowshipping, or
disassociation, the information sent to the circuit overseer should
include the specific judicial offense and the action taken by the
committee. In cases involving judicial reproof, the circuit overseer
will send a letter of deletion to the body of elders. No letter of
deletion will be sent in cases of disfellowshipping, disassociation,
or death.—See 8:38.
ANNOUNCEMENTS OF DELETION
38. Announcements of deletion, including those because of resigna-
tions, should read as follows: “Brother [name of person] is no
longer serving as an elder (a ministerial servant).” When an el-
der or a ministerial servant moves out of the congregation, an

announcement of deletion would not be made. When a brother

resigns, an announcement should be made without waiting for
the letter of deletion from the circuit overseer. After guilt is clear-
ly established in a judicial matter, an announcement of deletion
should be made to the congregation at the next midweek meet-
ing, even if the judicial hearing is not yet completed.
APPEALING DELETIONS
39. If an elder or a ministerial servant disagrees with his deletion by
the circuit overseer and wishes to appeal, he should immediate-
ly write a brief letter to the Service Department, with a copy to
the body of elders and a copy to the circuit overseer, explaining
why he disagrees with the deletion. It would be inappropriate to
pressure a brother who wishes to appeal not to do so by sug-
gesting, for example, that it would take longer for him to be reap-
pointed or that the branch office would view him negatively. The
announcement of deletion should be held in abeyance, and the
letter of deletion should be destroyed (if one had been generat-
ed). Thereafter, the Service Department will select an experienced
circuit overseer who, along with the original circuit overseer, will
rehear the entire matter. The two circuit overseers will listen care-
fully to the brother and the elders and will deal justly and kind-
ly with all involved. After the circuit overseers hearing the appeal
reach a joint decision, there is no further right to appeal. If it is
decided that the brother should be deleted, the circuit overseer
who serves the brother’s congregation will generate a letter of
deletion to the body of elders. Upon receipt of the letter of dele-
tion, the announcement of deletion should be made at the next
midweek meeting.
CONGREGATION FILE
40. Records related to the appointment and deletion of elders and
ministerial servants should be retained indefinitely.—See 22:19.


CHAPTER NINE
Pioneers
Paragraphs
Appointments ............................................................................................................... 1-3
Deletions .......................................................................................................................... 4-5
Congregation Changes ........................................................................................ 6-7
Changes to Pioneer Information ...................................................................... 8
S-202 Letters .................................................................................................................... 9
Field Service Reports (S-4) ............................................................................... 10
Hour Credit ................................................................................................................ 11-13
Special Consideration ...................................................................................... 14-15
Review of Pioneers’ Field Service Activity ................................... 16-18
Infirm Regular Pioneers ................................................................................ 19-20
APPOINTMENTS
1. When a publisher submits an Application for Regular Pioneer Ser-
vice (S-205), the Congregation Service Committee should obtain
comments from the appropriate group overseer and then meet
promptly to consider the applicant’s qualifications, keeping in
mind the following guidelines. The service committee should use
good judgment in determining when it would be wise to confer
with the other elders.—Prov. 15:22.
(1) The information provided by the applicant should be
complete and correct.
(2) The applicant must be baptized for at least a full six
months.
(3) The applicant must be an exemplary Christian. An
individual who is exemplary is someone whose conduct

PIONEERS
and worship are considered worthy of imitation. His

meeting attendance, share in the ministry, family life,
choices of entertainment, dress and grooming, and so
forth are good examples for others.
(4) The applicant must have organized his personal affairs

so that he can reach the annual requirement of
840 hours.
(5) Those who discontinue pioneer service must be off the

pioneer list a full six months before starting again.
(6) The applicant must not have been reproved or

reinstated within the past year, and all restrictions
must have been lifted.
(7) The applicant should indicate the date he wishes to

begin pioneering. No retroactive appointments should
be made unless there are significant extenuating
circumstances, such as in the rare instance that an
application was lost or unduly delayed by the elders.
2. Once the service committee has decided whether to appoint the

applicant or not, the body of elders should be updated on how
the matter was handled. This should be done before any an-
nouncement of appointment is made to the congregation. If it is
decided that the applicant is not qualified to serve as a regular
pioneer, two members of the service committee should kindly ex-
plain the reasons to him. If the service committee decides to ap-
point him as a regular pioneer, each member of the committee
should sign the application. The application should be kept in the
congregation file. Applications should not be sent to the branch
office unless specific instructions are given to do so.
3. The secretary should enter information from the approved appli-

cation into the appropriate section of jw.org. After the information
has been submitted, the new pioneer’s name will be listed under

PIONEERS
the section “Appointed Pioneers Not Yet Registered.” The secre-

tary should check the site every few days until the pioneer’s name
is listed under the section “Regular Pioneers.” Thereafter, the
regular pioneer welcome letter (S-236), found under the “Docu-
ments” tab in the “Forms” section, should be printed out and pro-
vided to the pioneer to inform him of the appointment. An an-
nouncement should be made to the congregation at the next
midweek meeting that the publisher has been appointed as a reg-
ular pioneer. Please do not announce to the congregation the
appointment of the regular pioneer until his name is listed under
the section “Regular Pioneers,” thus indicating that the appoint-
ment has been registered by the branch office.
DELETIONS
4. Before deleting an individual as a regular pioneer, the Congre-
gation Service Committee should obtain comments from the
appropriate group overseer. They should also consider whether
the pioneer may qualify for special consideration. (See 9:14-15.)
The service committee should use good judgment in determining
when it would be wise to confer with the other elders. (See 2:1.)
In all cases, before any announcement is made to the congrega-
tion, the body of elders should be updated on how the matter
was handled and two members of the service committee should
inform the individual of the decision. If a pioneer no longer qual-
ifies or must discontinue for personal reasons, an announcement
should be made to the congregation. The announcement of dele-
tion should read as follows: “Brother (Sister) [name of person]
is no longer serving as a regular pioneer.” Inform the branch of-
fice of the deletion using jw.org. If the discontinuation is be-
cause of health, family responsibilities, secular work, and so forth,
choose the option “Personal reasons.” If the discontinuation is
because of a poor example that did not involve judicial action,
choose the option “No longer qualifies.” For discontinuation be-
cause of other reasons, choose the appropriate option.

PIONEERS
5. If the pioneer was reproved by a judicial committee, he is auto-

matically disqualified and his deletion should be reported imme-
diately on jw.org.
CONGREGATION CHANGES
6. If a pioneer transfers to another congregation, the secretary of
his former congregation should indicate his deletion on jw.org
and should show the reason as transferring to another congre-
gation. Type the name of the new congregation or area in the
space provided. Include the country if the pioneer is transferring
to a congregation outside the branch territory.
7. Upon receipt of the letter of introduction from the previous con-
gregation, the Congregation Service Committee of the new con-
gregation should confirm that the individual desires to continue
pioneering. If so, and if there is no exceptional reason to do oth-
erwise, the service committee of the new congregation should
reappoint the pioneer. The secretary of the new congregation
should enter the appropriate information on jw.org as follows,
and the appointment should be announced at the next midweek
meeting.
(1) If transferring from a congregation in the same
branch territory: Click on the appropriate link and
enter the pioneer’s name and former congregation.
Then click “Search.”
(2) If transferring from a congregation in another branch
territory: Enter the pioneer’s information as if he were
a newly appointed pioneer. Be sure to complete the
section for full-time service history.
CHANGES TO PIONEER INFORMATION

8. Changes to a pioneer’s name, birth date, baptism date, marital
status, or spouse’s name may be made on jw.org. If any other

PIONEERS
information about the pioneer needs to change, please contact

the Service Department.
S-202 LETTERS
9. Congregations not able to use jw.org may send approved Appli-
cations for Regular Pioneer Service (S-205) to the Service De-
partment so that the appointments may be registered. In this
circumstance, please do not announce to the congregation the
appointment of the regular pioneer until you receive an S-202
letter indicating that the appointment has been registered. Con-
gregations not able to use jw.org may also use the S-202 letter
to inform the Service Department of a change in a pioneer’s per-
sonal information or to inform another congregation that a pio-
neer is transferring to their congregation.
FIELD SERVICE REPORTS (S-4)

10. Field Service Reports for regular pioneers should be handled in
the same way that publisher reports are handled. Late reports
should be added to the total activity for regular pioneers on the
following month’s report to the branch office.
HOUR CREDIT
11. Regular pioneers may be invited to share in certain theocratic
assignments as part of their sacred service. Those overseeing
such assignments may grant permission for the pioneers to re-
ceive hour credit to help them meet their monthly goal. The spir-
ituality, availability, and willing spirit of pioneers may allow them
to support Kingdom interests in a special way. Such approved
assignments include serving as commuter Bethelites, remote vol-
unteers, or Bethel consultants; assisting with Kingdom Hall con-
struction when such is done at the request of the branch office or
its representatives overseeing the project; assisting with pre- and

PIONEERS
post-assembly or convention work; and so forth. Assembly Hall

overseers may, in limited cases, grant hour credit to pioneers for
work performed at Assembly Halls.
12. When a pioneer’s assistance is authorized, he will keep a record of
all the hours spent working on the assignment during the month.
He will report this activity to the congregation in the “Comments”
section of his Field Service Report (S-4). It should be explained
clearly to the pioneer that when he submits his report he should
not combine the hours spent working on an approved assign-
ment with the hours spent in field service and that some time
should be spent in the ministry each month.
13. The hours spent working on an approved assignment should not
be included with the field service report submitted to the branch
office. The figure recorded in the “Hours” column of the Congre-
gation’s Publisher Record (S-21) should reflect only the actual
hours spent by the pioneer in field service. All the hours spent
working on an approved assignment should be noted in the “Re-
marks” column along with a notation of how much of that time
can be considered hour credit. Those properly authorized are giv-
en credit to the extent that the total number of hours actually
spent in field service plus time credit for approved assignments
does not exceed the monthly goal of 70 hours. No credit will be
carried over to any other month.
SPECIAL CONSIDERATION
14. In some situations, pioneers spend more hours in a month on
theocratic projects than they can receive hour credit for. Later in
the service year, they may need to take a vacation, spend time
in secular work, or care for some other pressing issue that pre-
cludes their reaching the 70-hour goal for one or more months.
They may thus fall short of the 840 hours for the service year. The
Congregation Service Committee should take into consideration
all that such pioneers are doing in behalf of Kingdom interests

PIONEERS
and grant special consideration to them. A pioneer would not

lose his privileges if he has worked extensively on theocratic pro-
jects. The elders, being aware of the pioneer’s work to support
Kingdom interests, will offer warm commendation. A notation can
be made on the Congregation’s Publisher Record (S-21) to indi-
cate that special consideration has been granted.
15. Special consideration should also be granted to pioneers who fall
short of the annual hour requirement if they serve in construc-
tion oversight, as Assembly Hall overseers, on Hospital Liaison
Committees, on Patient Visitation Groups, on Disaster Relief Com-
mittees, or on Convention Committees. All such assignments are
forms of sacred service.
REVIEW OF PIONEERS’ FIELD

SERVICE ACTIVITY
16. Each year around March 1, the secretary and the service over-
seer should review the field service activity and hour credit of
all regular pioneers. If a pioneer is consistently not meeting the
monthly hour goal, factoring in any hour credit, the service over-
seer and group overseer should meet with the pioneer to discuss
his circumstances and endeavor to offer assistance. Is it because
of health problems, increased family responsibilities, poor sched-
uling, or secular work? Are other activities consuming his time
and energy? Is the problem temporary or ongoing? Does he have
a realistic schedule that will allow him to reach the monthly hour
goal for the rest of the service year?
17. At the end of the service year, the Congregation Service Commit-
tee should meet to review the activity of any regular pioneers who
did not reach the annual hour requirement and determine if they
should be allowed to continue pioneering. (If a regular pioneer
reaches at least 800 hours for the year—hours spent in field
service in combination with any hour credit—he may continue
to serve as a pioneer.) In addition to the factors noted in the

PIONEERS
preceding paragraph, the following factors should be taken into

consideration before a decision is made. How long has the indi-
vidual been serving as a full-time minister? What is the age of
the pioneer? Might it be better for him to discontinue regular pio-
neer service until his circumstances change? Discontinuing pio-
neer service for a time may relieve him of the stress of trying to
meet the hour requirement while coping with difficult or adverse
circumstances. Be balanced and use good judgment when mak-
ing such decisions. Consider what course of action will be in the
best interests of the individual and, at the same time, will uphold
the high standards of regular pioneer service.
18. If the service committee delays in handling matters, further prob-
lems may develop. A pioneer may begin to minimize the need to
meet the hour requirement. Or he may feel stress, wondering
when the elders will recommend his removal. A pioneer may try
unrealistically to increase the hours he spends in field service in
an attempt to reach the hour requirement, thinking that is the
only course to be taken. These situations may cause the pioneer
to develop a poor attitude or even health problems. Therefore,
the long-term interests of the pioneer are best served when mat-
ters are handled promptly.—Gal. 6:10.
INFIRM REGULAR PIONEERS

19. In rare circumstances, a brother or sister may be approved to re-
main as a pioneer without having a minimum hour requirement.
This provision is only for exemplary, longtime pioneers who have
a heartfelt desire to serve always as regular pioneers and who
feel they would be taking a backward step if they had to discon-
tinue but who are unable to meet the hour requirement because
of infirmity. The elders may consider designating such a pioneer
as an infirm regular pioneer if he (1) is over 50 years old and
(2) has pioneered for at least 15 cumulative years. This decision
should be made by the elders only after consulting with the circuit

PIONEERS
overseer regarding the situation. This arrangement is not a pro-

vision to allow an individual to care for sick relatives, do added
secular work, and so forth. Those who first enter the pioneer ser-
vice when they are 60 or 70 years old do not come under this
arrangement simply because of their age. There is no need to give
consideration to allowing an older pioneer who develops health
problems to serve as an infirm regular pioneer if he is willing to
transfer to the publisher ranks.
20. When the body of elders decides that a pioneer may serve as an
infirm regular pioneer, a notation should be made on the Con-
gregation’s Publisher Record (S-21). It is not necessary to noti-
fy the branch office of this decision. Two members of the Con-
gregation Service Committee should meet with the pioneer to
inform him of this loving provision made in his behalf. Encourage
the pioneer to continue exerting himself in his ministry to the ex-
tent that his circumstances allow. (Luke 13:24; Col. 3:23, 24) As-
sure the infirm pioneer that he has the full support of the elders
in the congregation and that Jehovah is aware of the sacrifices
that he has made during his many years of service.—Heb. 6:10, 11.

PIONEERS

CHAPTER TEN
Circuit Overseer
Paragraphs
Accommodations and Meals .......................................................................... 1-4
Expenses During the Week of the Visit ................................................ 5-7
Proper Use of Congregation and Circuit Funds ................................ 8
ACCOMMODATIONS AND MEALS

1. It is a privilege for the congregation to show genuine hospitality
to the circuit overseer and his wife. This enables the circuit over-
seer to get the most accomplished and to cultivate a warm rela-
tionship with the brothers. (Rom. 12:13; 3 John 5, 6) Even if an
apartment is provided by the circuit, the circuit overseer may on
occasion need to stay locally instead of commuting to a distant
apartment. (See Instructions for Circuit Accounting [S-331] for
direction regarding circuit apartments.) It is the responsibility of
the coordinator of the body of elders or another elder designat-
ed by him to ensure by personal observation that clean and suit-
able accommodations are arranged for the circuit overseer and
his wife during the week of his visit. If there is a need to rent a
place for the week, the elders should contact the Service Depart-
ment.
2. Private accommodations should provide a clean place to store

clothes and belongings. A chair, a table, and good lighting are
important. Circuit overseers need adequate time to themselves
and sufficient rest. The coordinator of the body of elders or an-
other elder designated by him should ask the circuit overseer if
he or his wife have any allergies or health problems that might
affect the selection of accommodations. Additionally, it is best to

CIRCUIT OVERSEER
avoid homes where there are family problems or where a family

member has a serious illness requiring specialized attention.
3. Midday meals are fine occasions for upbuilding conversations, for
forming close friendships, and even for shepherding. Thus, when
visiting congregations, it is preferred that circuit overseers accept
the hospitality of the local brothers as arranged by the elders.
The elders should use good judgment when selecting those who
will serve as hosts for the midday meal. Circuit overseers deep-
ly appreciate the congregation’s hospitality. Wholesome, nourish-
ing food enables them to feel well physically and to keep up with
their schedule. The circuit overseer may decide whether he will
accept invitations for other meals.
4. It is beneficial when the coordinator of the body of elders asks
the circuit overseer at the end of his visit about the accommo-
dations. It is not necessary to have the circuit overseer stay in
a different home each time he visits the congregation.
EXPENSES DURING THE WEEK OF THE VISIT

5. Circuit overseers generally incur some expenses during the week
of the visit. Such expenses may include food expenses, routine
office expenses, transportation expenses that are not covered by
the branch office, and certain moderate personal expenses. (See
Instructions for Congregation Accounting [S-27] and Instruc-
tions for Circuit Accounting [S-331] for details on how circuit
overseers are reimbursed.) At no time should the circuit overseer
and his wife be a financial burden to any congregation.—2 Cor.
11:9.
6. The circuit overseer will be considerate and discerning in submit-
ting his expenses. Some personal expenses could be covered by
the monthly allowance from the branch office or from personal
contributions he may have received from individuals in the con-
gregation. Other personal expenses, such as clothing, cosmetics,

CIRCUIT OVERSEER
vitamins, over-the-counter drugs, insurance for personal proper-

ty, or life insurance would not be submitted for reimbursement.
Rather, they should be covered by the circuit overseer’s person-
al funds. A circuit overseer should not solicit funds from individ-
uals.
7. If Internet or mobile telephone service is used to communicate
with congregations and with the branch office, the expense in-
curred may be submitted for reimbursement. However, Internet
or mobile telephone service beyond what is needed to commu-
nicate with congregations and the branch office would be cov-
ered by the circuit overseer as a personal expense, as would ex-
penses related to Internet or mobile telephone service for the wife
of a circuit overseer.
PROPER USE OF CONGREGATION

AND CIRCUIT FUNDS
8. Congregation and circuit funds should not be used to make mon-
etary gifts to circuit overseers or visiting speakers beyond their
actual expenses. Likewise, it would be inappropriate for individ-
uals to solicit money from brothers and sisters and then provide
this as a gift to a circuit overseer. (2 Cor. 8:20) Nevertheless, if
someone desires to make a heartfelt contribution to a circuit over-
seer, that is his prerogative and is a private matter that need not
concern others.—2 Cor. 9:7.

CIRCUIT OVERSEER

CHAPTER ELEVEN
Medical Matters
Paragraphs
Newly Baptized Publishers ..................................................................................... 1
Parents and Pregnant Sisters ............................................................................ 2
Elderly ...................................................................................................................................... 3
Admission to the Hospital .................................................................................... 4
Communication With Medical Personnel .................................................. 5
Hospital Liaison Committee ............................................................................ 6-9
When Traveling to Care for Medical Needs ................................. 10-15
Baptism of an Individual
With a Communicable Disease ............................................................... 16-17
NEWLY BAPTIZED PUBLISHERS

1. The secretary should provide newly baptized publishers with the
following materials:
(1) Durable power of attorney (DPA) card. The publisher

should be informed of the importance of having a
properly completed DPA card and of providing a copy
of it to (1) his health-care agents, (2) his doctor or
hospital, and (3) the congregation secretary.
(2) “How Do I View Blood Fractions and Medical
Procedures Involving My Own Blood?” (kmi11/06)
—November 2006 Our Kingdom Ministry insert.
(3) “Are You Ready to Face a Faith-Challenging Medical
Situation?” (kmi11/90)—November 1990 Our Kingdom
Ministry insert.

MEDICAL MATTERS
PARENTS AND PREGNANT SISTERS

2. When the elders learn that a sister is pregnant, they should in-
quire whether she has located a cooperative doctor and medical
facility that have experience in bloodless medicine. Elders should
ensure that such sisters and any parents with minor children are
familiar with the points contained in the article “Healthy Moth-
ers, Healthy Babies,” in the November 2009 issue of Awake! pag-
es 26-29, and in the document How Parents Can Protect Their
Children From Misuse of Blood (S-55).
ELDERLY
3. If they do not have Witness family members with them in a hos-
pital, older brothers and sisters may be particularly vulnerable to
intimidation by medical personnel. Elders would do well to en-
courage such ones to have a duly-completed DPA card and re-
mind them to confirm periodically that their designated health-
care agents understand their decisions and will uphold them.
ADMISSION TO THE HOSPITAL

4. When the elders learn that a publisher is being admitted to the
hospital, the publisher should be reminded that if he wishes to
receive visits from congregation elders, including members of the
Patient Visitation Group, he should inform the hospital that he
would welcome a visit from a minister of Jehovah’s Witnesses. A
publisher needs to read hospital forms very carefully to ensure
that his health-care decisions are properly recorded. A patient
has the right to modify such documents as necessary, initialing
each adjustment he makes. A publisher will want to ensure that
a copy of his DPA card is included with his medical records.
To help ensure that his wishes are honored, a publisher may
choose to appoint two of Jehovah’s Witnesses as his health-care
agents instead of non-Witness family members. If this is done, it

MEDICAL MATTERS
is both prudent and a kindness for the publisher to advise his

non-Witness family members of this.
COMMUNICATION WITH MEDICAL PERSONNEL

5. Well in advance of a scheduled operation, a publisher should
speak with his doctor, the surgeon, and the anesthesiologist
about his health-care instructions. Surgery is a team effort, and
all members of the team need to understand the publisher’s po-
sition on blood, on any pharmaceuticals containing minor blood
fractions, and on medical procedures involving the use of his own
blood. It is unfair to the medical team when a publisher fails to
communicate his wishes well in advance of the surgery. With the
publisher’s permission, Hospital Liaison Committee members or
others may discuss the publisher’s case with medical personnel.
However, it is the responsibility of the patient or his health-care
agents to make health-care decisions.
HOSPITAL LIAISON COMMITTEE

6. Hospital Liaison Committees (HLC) play a vital role in helping
medical and legal communities understand our religious position
regarding blood transfusions. HLCs coordinate the activities of
Patient Visitation Groups (PVG) in key cities to provide spiritual
support for hospitalized Witness patients from outside the local
area. The HLC and PVG arrangements do not relieve the elders
or others in the congregation of their responsibility to support
publishers who are hospitalized.—Prov. 17:17; 1 John 3:18.
7. The activity of HLCs is completely separate from hospital pro-
grams, such as bloodless medicine and surgery programs. Nei-
ther the branch office nor the HLCs endorse health-care provid-
ers or any business organization.
8. Elders should ensure that they have ready access to the contact
information for their HLC. In most cases, elders should contact
the HLC directly and only in behalf of baptized and unbaptized

MEDICAL MATTERS
publishers (including inactive publishers) who request help to find

a cooperative doctor (either for themselves or for their children)
or whose medical condition has led to the threat of a blood trans-
fusion. At times, the elders may determine that it would be best
for the patient or a family member to contact the HLC directly,
especially in emergency situations. When calling the HLC, the call-
er should have the following information available:
(1) Name, age, congregation, and telephone number of
patient.
(2) Spiritual standing of patient and family, and whether
unbelieving family members are involved.
(3) Name of hospital, name of doctor, patient’s room
number and, if applicable, telephone number of
patient’s room.
(4) Whether a completed DPA card is available. (If not,
the patient should be encouraged to fill one out
immediately. Unbaptized publishers may adapt the
language of the DPA card and Identity Card [ic] to
write health-care instructions for themselves and their
children.)
(5) Reason for calling the HLC.
9. If a publisher has a doctor who says he will respect the publish-
er’s wishes, there may not be a need to contact the HLC before
treatment. However, the publisher will want to confirm that the
doctor is experienced in using nonblood medical alternatives and
strategies.
WHEN TRAVELING TO CARE FOR

MEDICAL NEEDS
10. At times, a publisher requires specialized medical care that is
unavailable locally. The Special Medical Needs Room Request

MEDICAL MATTERS
(hlc-20) form allows Witness patients and family to request as-

sistance with lodging during their stay. There is no obligation for
patients to use this provision, especially when financial circum-
stances allow the patient to cover his needs. If the patient sim-
ply wants information on what accommodation options are avail-
able locally, he should indicate that he is able to cover such
expenses and the Hospital Liaison Committee (HLC) can then
provide such information.
11. For patients needing assistance in nonemergency situations, the
elders should obtain the form from their local HLC and then as-
sist the publisher or his family to fill it out. The elders will prompt-
ly send the completed form to the HLC in the city where the pa-
tient will receive care. In emergency situations, the elders may
ask their local HLC to expedite such rooming requests.
12. Families should limit the size of the group traveling with the pa-
tient. The HLC in the city where the patient will receive care will
use the completed form to locate lodging for the group. Accom-
modations may be arranged in the following ways:
(1) Standing agreements that hospitals have negotiated
with nearby hotels or private residential facilities for
discounted rates. Such arrangements are usually
available to anyone, including non-Witnesses.
(2) Discounted rooms for Witnesses at hotels used in
connection with circuit assemblies and conventions, if
available.
(3) Private homes of Witness families living near the
medical facility. If accommodations are required for an
extended period of time, the homes of multiple families
may be used on a rotational basis so as not to impose
a burden on any one family.
13. If a non-Witness relative or a disfellowshipped family member is
accompanying the Witness patient, no special arrangements or

MEDICAL MATTERS
rates would be extended beyond accommodations for the patient

and immediate family members who are in good standing.
14. The patient and his family have the primary obligation to care for
the cost incurred for lodging, transportation, meals, and other re-
lated expenses. However, the patient’s congregation may also be
able to offer assistance in certain cases.—od pp. 119-120 pars. 12-
15; 153-154 pars. 9-11.
15. If a congregation is near a medical facility where Witness patients
from other areas often seek medical care, elders may communi-
cate to the local HLC chairman information about exemplary pub-
lishers who can provide suitable accommodations to visiting Wit-
nesses.
BAPTISM OF AN INDIVIDUAL WITH A

COMMUNICABLE DISEASE
16. Out of loving concern for others, a baptism candidate may in-
form the elders that he has a communicable disease, such as
HIV/AIDS, hepatitis, and so forth. (od pp. 186-187) If so, the coor-
dinator of the body of elders should inform the candidate of the
following options regarding immersion:
(1) He may attend the convention or assembly, listen to
the baptism talk, and then be taken to a stream, river,
lake, or sea to be baptized.
(2) He may attend the convention or assembly, listen to
the baptism talk, and then be baptized in his hotel
room or in a private home where there is a large tub
that can be used for this purpose.
(3) If he is sensitive to others becoming aware of the fact
that he has such a disease and does not want it to
become known to others, he may attend a convention
or assembly to which his congregation is not assigned,

MEDICAL MATTERS
listen to the baptism talk, and then be baptized in a

stream, river, lake, or sea.
(4) He may request that the local elders arrange for a
private baptism.
17. The brothers performing the baptism should be informed of the
health issue so as to decide whether this would be a risk that
they would be willing to take.

MEDICAL MATTERS

CHAPTER TWELVE
Determining Whether a
Judicial Committee Should
Be Formed
Paragraphs
Offenses Requiring Review by the Elders ....................................... 2-39
Sexual Immorality (Por·neia) .................................................................... 3-6
Strong Circumstantial Evidence of Sexual Immorality
(Por·neia) .............................................................................................................. 7-9
Adulterous Marriage .................................................................................... 10-12
Child Abuse ................................................................................................................. 13
Gross Uncleanness, Uncleanness With Greediness ........... 14-15
Momentary Touching of Intimate Body Parts or
Caressing of Breasts ............................................................................ 15.1
Immoral Conversations Over the Telephone
or the Internet .......................................................................................... 15.2
Viewing Abhorrent Forms of Pornography ............................ 15.3
Misuse of Tobacco or Marijuana and Abuse
of Medical, Illicit, or Addictive Drugs .................................... 15.4
Extreme Physical Uncleanness ........................................................ 15.5
Brazen Conduct ............................................................................................... 16-17
Unnecessary Association With Disfellowshipped or
Disassociated Individuals .................................................................. 17.1
Dating Though Not Scripturally Free to Remarry ............. 17.2
Drunkenness ...................................................................................................... 18-19
Gluttony ......................................................................................................................... 20
Stealing, Thievery ................................................................................................... 21
Deliberate, Malicious Lying; Bearing False Witness ........... 22-23
Fraud, Slander ................................................................................................. 24-28
“SHEPHERD THE FLOCK OF GOD” CHAPTER 1 2

DETERMINING WHETHER A JUDICIAL COMMITTEE SHOULD BE FORMED
Reviling ........................................................................................................................... 29
Obscene Speech .................................................................................................... 30
Greed, Gambling, Extortion ................................................................... 31-34
Refusal to Provide for Family ...................................................................... 35
Fits of Anger, Violence, Domestic Violence .............................. 36-37
Manslaughter ............................................................................................................ 38
Apostasy ....................................................................................................................... 39
Celebrating False Religious Holidays .......................................... 39.1
Participation in Interfaith Activities ............................................ 39.2
Deliberately Spreading Teachings Contrary
to Bible Truth ............................................................................................. 39.3
Causing Divisions, Promoting Sects ........................................... 39.4
Employment Promoting False Religion ..................................... 39.5
Spiritism ............................................................................................................. 39.6
Idolatry ................................................................................................................ 39.7
Evidence Establishing Wrongdoing ................................................... 40-42
Confession ....................................................................................................... 40.1
Eyewitnesses ...................................................................................................40.2
Those Having Certain Privileges of Service .........................................43
Those Who Have Not Associated for Many Years ............... 44-46
Unbaptized Publishers .....................................................................................47-56
Serious Wrongdoing That Occurred Years in the Past ....... 57-59
Validity of Wrongdoer’s Baptism ......................................................... 60-62
Determining Which Congregation Should
Handle the Matter .............................................................................................. 63-65
Wrongdoing Involving Individuals From
Different Congregations ...................................................................................... 66
Permitting Individuals to Commit Sexual
Immorality in the Home ................................................................................ 67-70
Scriptural Freedom to Remarry .............................................................. 71-76
Marking Disorderly Ones .............................................................................. 77-80
Attempted Suicide ..................................................................................................... 81
CHAPTER 1 2 “SHEPHERD THE FLOCK OF GOD”

1. Elders should act promptly when they receive a report of serious

wrongdoing so as to safeguard the congregation and provide as-
sistance to the wrongdoer. (Jude 4) Neglecting to care for such
matters can hinder the flow of Jehovah’s holy spirit to the con-
gregation. Elders must first assess whether the wrongdoing, if
established, is serious enough to require a judicial committee.
—See 12:2-39; 15:1.
OFFENSES REQUIRING REVIEW BY

THE ELDERS
2. Listed below are offenses that may require review by a judicial
committee. Of course, this list is not comprehensive. There may
be other matters that would also merit the attention of a judicial
committee. The elders must use good judgment and reasonable-
ness when evaluating the seriousness of the alleged wrongdoing.
They should consider the extent and nature of the misconduct,
intent and motive, frequency or practice, and so forth. If there
is a question about whether certain wrongdoing merits judicial
action, the body of elders may write to the Service Department
requesting further direction concerning the case.
3. Sexual Immorality (Por·neia): (Lev. 20:10, 13, 15, 16; Rom. 1:
24, 26, 27, 32; 1 Cor. 6:9, 10) Por·neia involves immoral use of
the genitals, whether in a natural or in a perverted way, with lewd
intent. There must have been another party to the immorality—a
human of either sex or a beast. Willing participation incurs guilt
and requires judicial action. It is not a casual touching of the sex
organs but involves the manipulation of the genitals. It includes
oral sex, anal sex, and manipulation of the genitals between in-
dividuals not married to each other. (w06 7/15 pp. 29-30; w04
2/15 p. 13; w00 11/1 p. 8 par. 6; w83 6/1 pp. 23-26; lvs p. 120)
Por·neia does not require skin-to-skin contact, copulation (as in
penetration), or sexual climax.
(1) “Immoral use of” conveys the thought not just of
touching but of operating, manipulating, or employing

something. For example, it is one thing to touch a

musical instrument; it is something different to make
“use of” a musical instrument.
(2) “Lewd intent” identifies the motive. For example, a
doctor may need to manipulate the genitals in
examining a patient. A veterinarian, farmer, or rancher
may do something similar to an animal. However, the
intent is not sexual gratification.
(3) “Manipulation” conveys the idea of operating
something, whether by use of the hands or some other
means, and does not require skin-to-skin contact.
Momentary touching of another’s genitals, even if
intentional, would generally not be considered por·neia.
4. Masturbation of oneself is not por·neia.—lvs p. 250.
5. One who was raped would not be guilty of por·neia. Discernment
is needed in considering claims of rape, taking into consideration
such factors as the mental disposition of the person, the circum-
stances that led up to the incident, and any delay in reporting.
—w03 2/1 pp. 30-31; w83 3/15 p. 30, ftn.; it-1 pp. 862-864.
6. When determining if an individual is guilty of por·neia, it is im-
portant to establish the facts. This is especially true when Scrip-
tural freedom to remarry is involved. (Mal. 2:16a) In situations in
which the elders are uncertain or divided on their conclusions, it
is best to write the Service Department.—See 12:71-76.
7. Strong Circumstantial Evidence of Sexual Immorality (Por-
neia): If at least two eyewitnesses report that the accused stayed
all night in the same house with a person of the opposite sex (or
with a known homosexual) under improper circumstances, judi-
cial action may be warranted. (w18.07 p. 32) The elders cannot
apply one rule to every case; each situation has unique circum-
stances. After two elders have thoroughly investigated, the body
of elders must use good judgment in determining whether seri-
ous wrongdoing has occurred. If the elders are unsure how to

proceed, they should consult with the Service Department.—If

questions are raised regarding Scriptural freedom to remarry, see
Chapter 12, paragraphs 71-76.
(1) Have the couple been pursuing a romantic relationship?
Have they been previously counseled regarding their
conduct with each other? What circumstances led to
their spending the night together? Did they plan ahead
to do so? Did they have a choice in the matter, or
were there extenuating circumstances, perhaps an
unforeseen occurrence or genuine emergency that left
them with no choice but to spend the night together?
(Eccl. 9:11) What were the sleeping arrangements?
Since each situation is different, there may be other
relevant factors. If there are no extenuating
circumstances, a judicial committee would be formed
on the basis of strong circumstantial evidence of
sexual immorality.
(2) Depending upon the attitude of the accused, there
might even be evidence of brazen conduct.
8. Consider an example in which judicial action would be warrant-
ed: A married brother spends an inordinate amount of time with
his female secretary after work hours but insists there is no ro-
mantic interest. His concerned wife informs the elders, who give
him strong counsel. Later, when he claims to be leaving overnight
for a “business trip,” his suspicious wife and a relative follow him
to the secretary’s home. They observe the secretary invite him
inside at 10 p.m. and continue watching all night until he leaves
the home at 7 a.m. When the elders speak to him, he admits that
he spent the night with his secretary, but he denies that he com-
mitted adultery. In such a case, the elders have a basis to take
judicial action because there is strong circumstantial evidence of
por·neia and there may be elements of brazen conduct. The in-
nocent mate’s conscience may allow her to divorce him and re-
marry; she should not be criticized if that is her decision.

9. Below are examples in which judicial action would likely not be

warranted:
(1) An elderly Christian living alone has a member of the
opposite sex move into the home to help care for him.
There is no evidence of a romantic attachment or
reason to suspect sexual immorality.
(2) After attending a social gathering at a single sister’s

home, a brother walks to a train station to catch the
train home. After waiting for some time, the brother
learns that the last train for the day has already left the
station. He walks back to the sister’s home, but by the
time he arrives, everyone has left and it is quite late.
The sister allows him to sleep in the living room while
she sleeps in her bedroom.
(3) A single brother visits a married couple for several

days. One night after everyone goes to bed, the
husband is called to an emergency at his place of work
and does not return until morning. The wife and the
single brother are alone in the home all night sleeping
in separate bedrooms.
10. Adulterous Marriage: If a divorced person remarries and he was
not Scripturally free to do so—in other words, if adultery and re-
jection by the innocent mate had not occurred—he has entered
into an adulterous marriage. In Jehovah’s eyes, he has married
someone while still bound to another. Entering into such a mar-
riage would call for judicial action.—See 12:76.
11. The elders should be very cautious in extending any special priv-
ileges to such an individual, even after judicial restrictions have
been lifted. He could share in the cleaning and repair of the lo-
cal Kingdom Hall. He may eventually present student assignments
on the midweek meeting if his doing so would not disturb oth-
ers. However, he would not be assigned to help with literature,

accounts, attendants, sound, video, or similar privileges in the

congregation as long as the innocent former mate is alive, un-
married, and has not been guilty of por·neia.
12. Although a Christian’s remarriage may not be adulterous, if he
deliberately committed adultery in a scheming way so as to end
his previous marriage or he pressured his innocent mate to re-
ject him so that she eventually agreed to a divorce, he has dealt
treacherously with her. (Mal. 2:14-16) His conduct is similar to
entering into an adulterous marriage, and he would not qualify
for special privileges for many years.—See 22:26-27.
13. Child Abuse: Child abuse includes the sexual or physical abuse
of a minor. It would also include the extreme neglect of a minor
by her parent. Child sexual abuse is a perversion and generally
includes sexual intercourse with a minor; oral or anal sex with a
minor; fondling the genitals, breasts, or buttocks of a minor; voy-
eurism of a minor; indecent exposure to a minor; or soliciting a
minor for sexual conduct. Depending on the circumstances of the
case, it may include involvement with child pornography or “sext-
ing” with a minor. “Sexting” involves the sending of sexually ex-
plicit messages or images electronically.—See Chapter 14.
14. Gross Uncleanness, Uncleanness With Greediness: (2 Cor. 12:
21; Gal. 5:19; Eph. 4:19) Galatians 5:19-21 lists many vices that
are not classed as por·neia but that could lead to one’s being
disqualified from God’s Kingdom. Among them are uncleanness
(Greek, a·ka·thar·sia). When one practices uncleanness to a se-
rious degree, it can be grounds for disfellowshipping from the
Christian congregation. Elders should use good judgment in dis-
cerning whether the conduct is minor uncleanness that can be
handled by counsel or is gross uncleanness that requires the for-
mation of a judicial committee.—w06 7/15 pp. 29-31; w83 3/15
p. 31; lvs p. 249.
15. Though this is not an exhaustive list, gross uncleanness may be
involved in the following:

(1) Momentary Touching of Intimate Body Parts or

Caressing of Breasts: If such conduct occurred on a
few isolated occasions, especially between two persons
involved in a courtship with the intent to marry,
counsel from two elders may suffice to handle such
minor uncleanness. The elders should inform the
coordinator of the body of elders of the situation.
However, if the conduct occurred on numerous
occasions and the actions escalated in gravity and
frequency, it may constitute gross uncleanness with
greediness, requiring judicial action. Their wrongdoing
may constitute brazen conduct if they give evidence of
a disrespectful, insolent attitude toward God’s laws. For
example, the individuals may have no intentions of
pursuing marriage.
(2) Immoral Conversations Over the Telephone or the

Internet: A practice of engaging in immoral
conversations over the telephone or the Internet,
including “sexting,” can involve obscene speech or
gross uncleanness, either of which can be a basis for
judicial action. If such conduct occurred on a few
isolated occasions, judicial action may not be
necessary. Counsel from two elders may be sufficient
to handle such minor uncleanness. The elders should
inform the coordinator of the body of elders of the
situation. However, such conduct may escalate in
gravity and by frequent repetition become gross
uncleanness with greediness requiring judicial action,
especially if the individual had been previously
counseled. The elders must use good judgment in
determining whether the wrongdoing has escalated to
a point warranting judicial action.—w06 7/15 pp. 30-31.
(3) Viewing Abhorrent Forms of Pornography: See 13:2-4.

(4) Misuse of Tobacco or Marijuana and Abuse of

Medical, Illicit, or Addictive Drugs: Elders should use
good judgment in weighing the circumstances and
extent of the wrongdoing so as to determine whether a
judicial committee should be formed. For example, one
or two elders may handle matters by means of counsel
if a Christian abused an addictive drug or smoked
cigarettes on one or two occasions and the matter is
not widely known. The coordinator of the body of elders
should be informed. However, a judicial committee is
required for a practice of abusing addictive drugs,
including betel nut, marijuana, and tobacco. (2 Cor. 7:1;
w06 7/15 pp. 30-31; lvs pp. 110-117) If a medical
doctor authorizes and/or prescribes marijuana for a
medical problem, a Christian may choose to make use
of this form of treatment. Although no judicial action
would be taken, if an issue arises in the congregation,
the elders will need to determine whether the individual
can be viewed as exemplary. The proper use of
addictive drugs under medical supervision, such as for
pain management, would not require judicial review.
When questions arise, consult with the Service
Department.
(5) Extreme Physical Uncleanness: (Deut. 23:12-14; 2 Cor.

7:1; lvs pp. 108-110) Every effort should be made to
help the offender see the need to keep his body and
place of residence clean. Before judicial action would
be considered, the elders would need to be certain that
the uncleanness is pronounced and offensive, bringing
much reproach upon Jehovah’s good name and his
people in the community. Appropriate counsel should
be given. If this is not heeded, then a warning talk may
be necessary. (See 12:77-80.) If there is blatant, willful
disregard of the counsel given and extremely offensive

unclean conditions continue, judicial action would be

warranted.
16. Brazen Conduct: (2 Cor. 12:21; Gal. 5:19; Eph. 4:19; lvs p. 249)
The Greek word translated “brazen conduct” is a·selgei·a.
Strong’s Exhaustive Concordance of the Bible uses very forceful
terms to define it: “licentiousness . . . filth[iness], lasciviousness,
wantonness.” The New Thayer’s Greek-English Lexicon of the New
Testament adds to the list “unbridled lust, . . . outrageousness,
shamelessness, insolence.” Another lexicon defines a·selgei·a as
conduct that “violates all bounds of what is socially acceptable.”
Rather than relating to bad conduct of a somewhat petty or mi-
nor nature, “brazen conduct” describes acts that reflect an atti-
tude that betrays disrespect, disregard, or even contempt for di-
vine standards, laws, and authority. Therefore, two elements are
involved in brazen conduct: (1) The conduct itself is a serious vi-
olation of Jehovah’s laws, and (2) the attitude of the wrongdoer
toward God’s laws is disrespectful, insolent.—w06 7/15 p. 30.
17. Though this is not an exhaustive list, brazen conduct may be in-
volved in the following if the wrongdoer has an insolent, contemp-
tuous attitude made evident by a practice of these things:
(1) Unnecessary Association With Disfellowshipped
or Disassociated Individuals: Willful, continued,
unnecessary association with disfellowshipped or
disassociated nonrelatives despite repeated counsel
would warrant judicial action.—Matt. 18:17b; 1 Cor. 5:11,
13; 2 John 10, 11; lvs pp. 39-40.
If a member of the congregation is known to
have unnecessary association with disfellowshipped or
disassociated relatives who are not in the household,
elders should use the Scriptures to counsel and reason
with him. Review with him information from the Remain
in God’s Love book, page 241. If it is clear that a
Christian is violating the spirit of the disfellowshipping

decree in this regard and does not respond to counsel,

he would not qualify for congregation privileges, which
require one to be exemplary. He would not be dealt
with judicially unless there is persistent spiritual
association or he persists in openly criticizing the
disfellowshipping decision.
(2) Dating Though Not Scripturally Free to Remarry:
Continuing to date or to pursue a romantic relationship
with a person though one or both are not legally or
Scripturally free to remarry, doing so despite repeated
counsel and generally after a warning talk to the
congregation, would warrant judicial action.—Gal. 5:19;
2 Thess. 3:6, 14, 15.
18. Drunkenness: (1 Cor. 5:11; 6:9, 10; it-1 p. 656; lvs pp. 20-21, 83)
A judicial committee is required when there is a practice of drunk-
enness or a single incident of drunkenness that brings notoriety.
(w83 5/1 p. 8) A Scriptural description of drunkenness can be
found in the following references: Job 12:25; Psalm 107:27; Prov-
erbs 20:1; 23:29-35; Isaiah 24:20.
19. If an individual confesses to an elder that on one occasion he
overindulged in alcohol to the point of drunkenness in a private
setting, such as in his home, and there is no notoriety, it may
suffice for the elder to give strong counsel. In any case, the el-
der should inform the coordinator of the body of elders of the
matter.
20. Gluttony: (Prov. 23:20, 21; w04 11/1 pp. 30-31) A glutton rou-
tinely shows a lack of restraint, even gorging himself on food to
the point of feeling very uncomfortable or becoming sick. Glut-
tony is determined, not by someone’s size, but by his attitude to-
ward food.
21. Stealing, Thievery: (1 Cor. 6:9, 10; Eph. 4:28; w86 11/15 p. 14)
Though all stealing is wrong, the body of elders should use dis-
cernment in weighing the circumstances and the extent of the

involvement in wrongdoing to determine whether it is a judicial

matter.—w10 3/1 pp. 12-14; w94 4/15 pp. 19-21; jd pp. 105-106.
22. Deliberate, Malicious Lying; Bearing False Witness: (Prov. 6:
16, 19; Col. 3:9; Rev. 22:15; it-2 pp. 244-245) Though all lying is
bad, judicial action is taken only if there has been a practice of
deliberate, malicious lying. “Malicious” means deliberately harm-
ful, harboring ill will or enmity. Lying that requires judicial action
involves more than just exaggerations or petty, misleading state-
ments of relatively minor consequence or lying because of mo-
mentary pressure or fear of man.—Matt. 26:69-75.
23. Generally, elders should not consider administering discipline if a
Christian charges another Christian with making false statements
in a court dispute. For example, this may involve divorce, child
custody and support, and so forth. The Christian making the
charge can express his concerns to the court that has the re-
sponsibility to determine what is truthful when rendering a judg-
ment.
24. Fraud, Slander: (Lev. 19:16; Matt. 18:15-17; w97 3/15 pp. 17-22;
it-1 pp. 870, 989-991; od pp. 136-138 pars. 13-20; lvs p. 163)
Fraud is defined as the intentional use of deception, trickery, or
perversion of truth for the purpose of inducing another to part
with some valuable thing belonging to him or to give up a legal
right. Slander is defined as a false report meant to do harm to
the good name and reputation of another. Such talk is general-
ly malicious. Slander is not identical to negative gossip. Negative
gossip may be true; slander is always false. Negative gossip re-
quires counsel but not judicial action. (w89 10/15 p. 10; it-1 p. 990
par. 2) The congregation would not consider forming a judicial
committee unless the offended Christian had taken steps one and
two of Matthew 18:15, 16 and had initiated step three as de-
scribed in Matthew 18:17.—lvs pp. 253-254.
25. If asked, elders could participate in step two, but they do not rep-
resent the body of elders. If the matter proceeds to step three,

any elders who were witnesses in step two could serve only as
witnesses in step three. They would not be used to serve on the
judicial committee.
26. It is not the place of elders to become arbitrators of financial

agreements. They are not debt collectors. Nor should they be in-
volved in formulating contracts or written agreements, not even
signing as witnesses to such. The same holds true should the
matter reach step three.
27. The body of elders may first need to investigate before appoint-
ing a judicial committee. If so, the brothers involved in step two
would not be used to investigate; they would be interviewed as
witnesses.
28. One who reports an accusation to the police, the court, the el-
ders, or others who have authority to look into matters and ren-
der a judgment would not be viewed by the congregation as guilty
of committing slander. (it-1 p. 990) This is true even if the accu-
sation is not proved.—w97 8/15 p. 28 par. 1.
29. Reviling: (1 Cor. 6:10; it-2 pp. 801-802; lvs p. 164) Reviling in-
volves subjecting a person to insulting speech, heaping abuse
upon him. The body of elders should weigh the circumstances
and extent of wrongdoing so as to determine whether a judicial
committee should be formed. Elders should not be quick to take
judicial action; a judicial committee would be formed only if the
reviling is extreme, disrupts the peace of the congregation, and
persists despite repeated counsel.
30. Obscene Speech: (Eph. 5:3-5; Col. 3:8; lvs p. 162) Obviously,
certain words are more offensive than others. Profanity is any
kind of language that profanes. However, obscene speech in-
volves sexually explicit, filthy expressions. (g03 6/8 pp. 19-20)
Is the speech sexually explicit? Does it persist despite repeated
counsel? This would include obscenities used both in written and

in oral communication, such as Internet chat rooms, phone sex,

or e-mail.—See 12:15.2.
31. Greed, Gambling, Extortion: (1 Cor. 5:10, 11; 6:10; 1 Tim. 3:8;
it-1 pp. 789, 1005-1006) Elders do not generally involve them-
selves in what an individual does with regard to petty gambling
solely for entertainment. However, if such petty gambling affects
his spirituality or becomes a cause of stumbling for others, coun-
sel should be given. If he does not respond favorably to the coun-
sel and his conduct continues to have a negative effect on him
or others, he could not be viewed as exemplary in the congre-
gation. (Isa. 65:11; w11 3/1 pp. 12-14; w02 11/1 p. 31; g 3/15
pp. 14-15) If an individual’s gambling reveals a course of greedi-
ness, perhaps causing harm to himself or others, and he ignores
repeated counsel, judicial action would be appropriate.
32. An individual continuing in employment directly involved with
gambling or employment making him a clear accomplice or pro-
moter of gambling would be subject to judicial action, usually af-
ter being allowed six months to make the needed adjustments.
(lvs pp. 204-209) In questionable cases, consult the Service De-
partment.
33. If a business gives out prizes or prize money to winners of a con-
test or to potential customers for advertising, accepting the gift
is an individual’s decision to make. However, a person needs to
be careful that accepting such a prize does not stir up greed.
—Rom. 14:21; 1 Cor. 10:31-33; w73 p. 127; g75 7/8 p. 28.
34. A Christian who greedily and unrepentantly extorts a high bride-
price may be dealt with judicially.—1 Cor. 5:11, 13; 6:9, 10; Heb.
13:5; w98 9/15 pp. 24-25.
35. Refusal to Provide for Family: (1 Tim. 5:8; lvs p. 251) Adamant
refusal to provide materially for one’s own family, leaving wife and
children destitute when having the means to provide, may war-
rant judicial action. Some of the factors the body of elders should
consider before forming a judicial committee are the following:

(1) Does the husband adamantly refuse to provide for

his family or is the failure to provide for them because
of other factors, such as health or financial difficulties?
Is he doing what he reasonably can do to provide
necessities for the family?
(2) Has counsel been previously given, and has there been
an opportunity for him to respond?
(3) Does his wife have material resources affording a

secure life so that the family is not destitute?
(4) If the family is destitute, is it because they have

rejected the family head’s provisions by choosing to live
apart from him?
(5) When a separation is involved, to what extent is the

wife responsible?
36. Fits of Anger, Violence, Domestic Violence: (Mal. 2:16; Gal. 5:

20; Col. 3:19) A Christian who cannot control his anger cannot
be viewed as exemplary in the congregation. After his attitude,
the pattern of behavior, and the severity of damage to the lives
of others have been considered, a person who gives in to uncon-
trolled fits of anger may need to be dealt with judicially. (g97 6/8
p. 20) In questionable cases, consult the Service Department.
37. If a Christian took up professional boxing and refused to stop

despite repeated counsel, judicial action would be appropriate.
—w81 7/1 pp. 30-31.
38. Manslaughter: Aside from deliberate murder, bloodguilt may be

incurred if a person causes loss of life through carelessness or
because of violating a traffic law or other safety law of Caesar.
The elders should investigate and if warranted appoint a judicial
committee to hear the matter. The committee should base its de-
cision on clearly established facts, not simply on a decision that

may have been made by secular authorities.—Deut. 22:8; w06

9/15 p. 30.
39. Apostasy: Apostasy is a standing away from true worship, a fall-
ing away, defection, rebellion, abandonment. It includes the fol-
lowing:
(1) Celebrating False Religious Holidays: (Ex. 32:4-6; Jer.
7:16-19) Not all holidays directly involve false religion
and require judicial action.
(2) Participation in Interfaith Activities: (2 Cor. 6:14,
15, 17, 18) Apostate acts include bowing before altars
and images and sharing in false religious songs and
prayers.—Rev. 18:2, 4.
(3) Deliberately Spreading Teachings Contrary to Bible
Truth: (2 John 7, 9, 10; lvs p. 245; it-1 pp. 126-127) Any
with sincere doubts regarding the Bible truth taught by
Jehovah’s Witnesses should be helped. Loving
assistance should be provided. (2 Tim. 2:16-19, 23-26;
Jude 22, 23) If one obstinately is speaking about or
deliberately spreading false teachings, this may be or
may lead to apostasy. If there is no response after a
first and a second admonition, a judicial committee
should be formed.—Titus 3:10, 11; w86 4/1 pp. 30-31.
(4) Causing Divisions, Promoting Sects: (Rom. 16:17, 18;
Titus 3:10, 11) This would be deliberate action
disrupting the unity of the congregation or undermining
the confidence of the brothers in Jehovah’s
arrangement. It may involve or lead to apostasy.—it-2
p. 886.
(5) Employment Promoting False Religion: Continuing in
employment that makes one an accomplice to or a
promoter of false worship would subject one to
disfellowshipping after being allowed six months to

make the needed adjustments.—w99 4/15 pp. 28-30;

lvs pp. 204-206.
(6) Spiritism: (Deut. 18:9-13; 1 Cor. 10:21, 22; Gal. 5:20;
lvs pp. 216-217)
(7) Idolatry: (1 Cor. 6:9, 10; 10:14) Idolatry includes the
use of images, including pictures, in false religious
worship.
EVIDENCE ESTABLISHING WRONGDOING

40. Even though a Christian has been accused of wrongdoing seri-
ous enough to require judicial action, a judicial committee should
not be formed unless the wrongdoing has been established by
sufficient evidence. Please note the following regarding evidence:
(1) Confession: Admission of wrongdoing, either written
or oral, may be accepted as conclusive proof without
other corroborating evidence. (Josh. 7:19) There must
be two witnesses to a confession, and the confession
must be clear and unambiguous. For example, a
statement from a married Christian that his mate is
“Scripturally free” would not by itself be viewed as a
clear confession of adultery. A guilty plea entered in
court by a Christian as part of a plea bargain, perhaps
on the advice of an attorney so as to avoid the
possibility of a harsher sentence, would generally not in
itself be viewed by the congregation as an admission
of guilt.
(2) Eyewitnesses: There must be two or three
eyewitnesses, not just people repeating hearsay; no
action can be taken if there is only one witness. (Deut.
19:15-17; John 8:17; 1 Tim. 5:19, 24, 25) If there are
two or three witnesses to the same kind of wrongdoing
but each one is witness to a separate incident, the

elders can consider their testimony. While such

evidence is acceptable to establish guilt, it is preferable
to have two witnesses to the same occurrence of
wrongdoing. The testimony of youths may be
considered; it is up to the elders to determine whether
the testimony has the ring of truth. The testimony of
unbelievers and disfellowshipped or disassociated ones
may also be considered, but it must be weighed
carefully.
41. If wrongdoing has not been established but serious questions

have been raised, the body of elders should appoint two elders
to investigate the matter promptly. For example, there may be
just one witness. In some cases, it may be appropriate for the
witness to encourage the accused to approach the elders. (Jas.
5:14) The elders can then allow the accused a few days to ap-
proach them. In other cases, it may not be advisable for the wit-
ness to confront the accused. For example, the witness may be
extremely timid. A victim of rape or of child sexual abuse is never
required to confront the accused. (If the accusation involves child
sexual abuse, see Chapter 14.) Whether the witness approaches
the accused or not, the two elders appointed should speak with
the accused regarding the accusation.—w97 8/15 p. 27.
42. If the accused denies the accusation, the investigating elders

should try to arrange a meeting with him and the accuser to-
gether. (If the accusation involves child sexual abuse, see Chap-
ter 14.) If the accuser or the accused is unwilling to meet with
the elders or if the accused continues to deny the accusation of
a single witness and the wrongdoing is not established, the mat-
ter cannot be handled judicially. The investigating elders should
compose a record, sign it, put it in a sealed envelope, and give
it to the secretary to be placed in the congregation’s confiden-
tial file. (See 22:21-27.) Additional evidence may later come to
light to establish matters.

THOSE HAVING CERTAIN PRIVILEGES

OF SERVICE
43. If the elders learn of an accusation of serious wrongdoing against
a member of the congregation who serves as a Bethel family
member, a construction servant, a full-time or part-time commu-
ter to Bethel, a full-time or part-time construction commuter, a
remote servant or volunteer, a Bethel consultant, a field mission-
ary, a special pioneer, an Assembly Hall servant, or a Bible school
facility servant, two elders with knowledge of the circumstances
should immediately contact the Service Department for direction
on handling the matter.
THOSE WHO HAVE NOT ASSOCIATED

FOR MANY YEARS
44. In deciding whether or not to handle such a person judicially, the
body of elders should consider the following:
(1) Does he still profess to be a Witness?
(2) Is he generally recognized as a Witness in the
congregation or the community?
(3) To what degree have lives been affected or damaged
by the wrongdoing? For example, does the matter
involve child abuse or adultery?
(4) Does the person have a measure of contact or
association with the congregation so that a leavening,
or corrupting, influence exists?
(5) Is the person willing to meet with a committee, thus
admitting accountability to the Christian congregation?
45. Depending upon the length of inactivity and other factors noted
above, the elders may determine to hold the matter in abey-
ance. In such a case, they would make a record of the person’s

questionable conduct for the congregation file. (See 22:21-27.) If

the individual shows interest in returning to the congregation,
the elders can clarify matters at that time.—w08 11/15 pp. 14-15
pars. 12-13.
46. If the sinful conduct is known only to believing family members
and no congregation action has been taken, believing relatives
will likely determine to curtail family association severely, viewing
the relative as bad association.—1 Cor. 15:33; w85 7/15 p. 19
par. 14.
UNBAPTIZED PUBLISHERS
47. The elders should promptly handle a case of serious wrongdoing
by an unbaptized publisher. While a judicial committee would not
be formed, the body of elders should select two elders to meet
with him, perhaps the ones who approved him as an unbaptized
publisher. (If the unbaptized publisher is a minor, see Chapter 12,
paragraph 55.) They should try to readjust him and to determine
whether he continues to qualify. (od pp. 144-145 pars. 38-40)
The body of elders should be updated on the results, including
whether any restrictions will be imposed and whether any an-
nouncement will be made to the congregation.
48. If the individual is repentant, the assigned elders may decide to
place certain restrictions on the individual for a time, such as not
commenting at meetings, not presenting student assignments on
the midweek meeting, or not sharing in the field ministry.
49. If the individual is repentant but the assigned elders determine
that (1) the wrongdoing is widely known or might become wide-
ly known later or (2) the congregation needs to be on guard
concerning the individual, the coordinator of the body of elders
should arrange for an elder to make the following announcement
at the next midweek meeting: “A matter involving [name of per-
son] has been handled, and he [she] continues to serve as an
unbaptized publisher with the congregation.”

50. There may be reasons for the body of elders to determine that a
Scriptural talk about the sort of wrongdoing involved should be
given to the congregation a few weeks after the announcement.
51. If the individual is unrepentant, the two elders should inform him
that he no longer qualifies as an unbaptized publisher. Or if he
informs the elders that he no longer desires to be a publisher,
they will accept his decision. In either case, the coordinator of
the body of elders should arrange for an elder to make the fol-
lowing announcement at the next midweek meeting: “[Name of
person] is no longer recognized as an unbaptized publisher.” Be-
cause of his unrepentant wrongdoing, it would be best for a time
not to call on him if he raises his hand to comment at meetings.
52. If the elders see that such a person is a threat to the flock, they
can privately warn those endangered. For example, despite the
announcement, the wrongdoer might attempt to socialize with
youths in the congregation. In that situation, the elders would
speak privately to the parents of the endangered ones and per-
haps to those youths.
53. There is no specific arrangement for an appeal or a seven-day
waiting period before announcing the decision that one is no lon-
ger recognized as an unbaptized publisher. If he expresses dis-
satisfaction with the conclusion, the body of elders should choose
two different elders to review the case.
54. If someone who was previously removed as an unbaptized pub-
lisher begins to make progress and wishes once again to share
in the ministry, two elders (perhaps those who met with him ear-
lier) should meet with him to determine his qualifications. If he
qualifies, the coordinator of the body of elders should arrange
for an announcement to be made that he is an unbaptized pub-
lisher. There is no need to wait until he reports field service again
to make the announcement.
55. If the unbaptized publisher is a minor, the two elders should meet
with the Christian parents to discern what occurred, the child’s

attitude, and the corrective steps that the parents are taking. If
the parents have the situation in hand, the two elders may dis-
cern that it is not necessary to include the minor in the meet-
ing. The elders will check with the parents from time to time to
offer helpful counsel, specific suggestions, and loving encourage-
ment.—See Chapter 14, paragraphs 29-30, if the minor engaged
in sexual misconduct.
56. At the conclusion of the case, the two elders should prepare a
written record. The secretary files this record in the congrega-
tion’s confidential file.—See 22:21-27.
SERIOUS WRONGDOING THAT OCCURRED

YEARS IN THE PAST
57. Depending upon the circumstances, serious wrongdoing that oc-
curred years in the past may need to be handled by a judicial
committee. However, if wrongdoing occurred more than a few
years ago and the individual is genuinely repentant and recog-
nizes that he should have come forward immediately when he
sinned, counsel by two elders may be sufficient.
58. The body of elders should appoint two elders to gather the facts
so that the body can determine whether a judicial committee is
needed or not, taking into consideration answers to the follow-
ing questions:
(1) When did the wrongdoing take place?
(2) How widely known is the matter?
(3) Does the erring one show evidence of spiritual

progress as opposed to evidence that progress is being
hindered?
(4) Will counsel be sufficient to restore him, or will more be

required for him to have a clean conscience?

(5) Are there works befitting repentance?

(6) Did he voluntarily confess, or did the matter come to
light by other means?
(7) If the body of elders decides not to form a judicial
committee, will the elders continue to have the respect
of the congregation?
(8) If por·neia was involved, has a confession been made
to the innocent mate?—See 16:10.5.
(9) To what degree have lives been affected or damaged
by the wrongdoing? For example, does the matter
involve child abuse or adultery?
59. If the individual is serving in an appointed capacity, such as a
ministerial servant, elder, or pioneer, his qualifications should be
reviewed.—See 8:25-27; 9:4.
VALIDITY OF WRONGDOER’S BAPTISM

60. When dealing with a wrongdoer, the elders should not raise ques-
tions about the validity of the individual’s baptism. If the individ-
ual raises the issue, the elders may refer him to the February 15,
2010, Watchtower, page 22.
61. At times a wrongdoer will claim that his baptism is not valid and
that he feels he is not accountable to a judicial committee be-
cause he secretly engaged in wrongdoing shortly before he was
baptized. If the elders had been aware of his serious wrongdo-
ing committed just before baptism, likely they would not have ap-
proved him for baptism. However, this does not necessarily mean
that he did not make a valid dedication. Some individuals make
a dedication long before their baptism; others have made a ded-
ication shortly before. The elders are not in a position to read the
heart and know for a certainty how Jehovah viewed the person
at the time he was baptized. If the elders learn that a baptized

individual secretly engaged in serious wrongdoing while he was an

unbaptized publisher but the wrongdoing ceased before baptism,
they should give counsel and encouragement. A judicial commit-
tee should not be formed for prebaptism wrongdoing. (1 Cor. 6:
9-11) However, if the individual resumed serious wrongdoing af-
ter baptism, the elders would generally deal with him on the ba-
sis of what he has professed to be, a dedicated and baptized
Christian, and would meet with him judicially.
62. There are rare occasions when it is obvious that the baptism was
invalid because serious wrongdoing did not cease before bap-
tism, even for a brief period of time. For example, it may be that
at the time of baptism, the individual was living immorally with a
member of the opposite sex or the same sex, was a member of
a nonneutral organization, or something similar. If there are ques-
tions, the Service Department should be consulted.
DETERMINING WHICH CONGREGATION

SHOULD HANDLE THE MATTER
63. Bodies of elders should cooperate if there is a question regarding
which congregation should handle a case of wrongdoing. Which
congregation has the facts? Which congregation can handle the
case most effectively? Jurisdiction should not become an issue.
64. If a wrongdoer moves before a case has been concluded, it is
usually best for the elders of the original congregation to follow
through if possible and if distance permits. They are acquainted
with the person and his circumstances. If he has moved a great
distance away, the elders of the original congregation should not
insist on handling matters if the wrongdoer says he is unable to
return to the congregation for the meeting. In such a case, it
may be advisable to refer matters to the elders of the congrega-
tion where he now lives. There should be good communication
between the two bodies.

65. If the elders learn that a publisher who is visiting the area for a
short period of time is guilty of wrongdoing, they should prompt-
ly report the matter to the elders of his congregation.
WRONGDOING INVOLVING INDIVIDUALS FROM

DIFFERENT CONGREGATIONS
66. If an individual confesses to wrongdoing that involves a person
in another congregation, the elders should promptly pass along
what they know to the elders of the other congregation and al-
low them time to investigate. Does the other individual admit the
wrong? Do their accounts match, or are there significant differ-
ences? The elders handling the matter should communicate free-
ly and cooperate in obtaining the facts. There are many advan-
tages to interviewing individuals jointly to ascertain what actually
occurred and to clarify discrepancies. (Prov. 18:13, 17) If a joint
meeting is held, thereafter the elders handling the matter from
each congregation will withdraw and handle the case of the per-
son from their own congregation. The elders in one congregation
should generally not conclude their case before the elders of the
other congregation have fully investigated the situation.
PERMITTING INDIVIDUALS TO COMMIT SEXUAL

IMMORALITY IN THE HOME
67. If a publisher were to allow an individual to commit sexual im-
morality while living in the publisher’s home, he would be giving
tacit approval to immoral conduct. This would also be true of al-
lowing an individual to commit sexual immorality while visiting
the publisher’s home. Such a publisher would not be exemplary.
68. When congregation elders come to know of such a situation, they
should patiently provide Scriptural counsel. The publisher should
be helped to see that what he is allowing could stumble others.
He may then take action to change the situation so as “not to

put a stumbling block or an obstacle before a brother.”—Rom.

14:13.
69. Perhaps the publisher is genuinely concerned that what he has
been allowing may be a cause for stumbling. For certain reasons,
however, he may feel that he has no recourse at the present time.
For example, elderly Witness parents may need the assistance of
an unbelieving son or daughter. Under such circumstances, no
judicial action would be taken, but the qualifications of the pub-
lisher to serve in an exemplary position would be reviewed by the
body of elders.
70. Suppose the publisher, upon being approached by the elders,
manifests a brazen attitude, not really caring if others are stum-
bled. Even if he does not encourage others to do what he is do-
ing, the elders may decide to arrange for a talk to be given that
serves as a warning to the congregation. (2 Thess. 3:14, 15; see
12:77-80.) On the other hand, if a baptized publisher actively pro-
motes allowing individuals to commit sexual immorality in the
home, then the matter could be handled judicially on the grounds
of condoning sexual immorality, causing divisions, and, in effect,
speaking against “the teaching of the Christ.”—2 John 9-11; Gal.
5:19, 20; Rev. 2:20.
SCRIPTURAL FREEDOM TO REMARRY

71. It is the responsibility of the individual desiring to remarry to
produce convincing evidence to establish Scriptural freedom to
remarry. If an individual’s divorce occurred before baptism, the
elders should not assume the individual is Scripturally free, as
baptism does not dissolve previous marital ties. Elders should be
very careful when it comes to giving direction on whether an in-
dividual is Scripturally free and should consult with the Service
Department on any questions. This is especially true since the
decisions a person makes in such matters will affect not only his
relationship with his marriage mate but also his relationship with

Jehovah. Elders shoulder a heavy responsibility in such matters

and need to be cautious when offering counsel, especially when
the answer may not be readily apparent.—Luke 12:48; Jas. 3:1.
72. Scriptural freedom to remarry requires three conditions: (1) sex-
ual immorality (por·neia); (2) a rejection (refusal to reconcile) by
the innocent mate; and (3) a legal, final divorce. (Matt. 5:31, 32;
19:9; Heb. 13:4) For example, if an individual contemplating re-
marriage confesses that he has been guilty of sexual immorality
after his former mate legally divorced him or if his former mate
has admitted to committing sexual immorality since the legal di-
vorce, both are Scripturally free to remarry.
73. If a baptized Christian who accuses his believing mate of adul-
tery and wishes to establish freedom to divorce and remarry ap-
proaches an elder, the matter should be referred to the body of
elders. The accuser is not free unless the evidence establishing
wrongdoing is sufficient to warrant the formation of a judicial
committee on a charge of por·neia. (Deut. 19:15; John 8:17) If
the accused mate is associated with another congregation, the
evidence should be presented to the elders of that congregation
for review and a determination. The publisher should be advised
that he is not to view himself as Scripturally free until the elders
have investigated the matter and guilt of por·neia is established.
74. In some cases adultery is not established. However the accused
may confess or two eyewitnesses may report that the accused
stayed all night in the same house with a person of the opposite
sex (or a known homosexual) under improper circumstances. (See
12:7-9.) The elders should carefully consider the situation. (See
12:7.1.) Although the elders cannot tell the innocent mate that
he is free to remarry, if the innocent mate is convinced that adul-
tery did occur, the elders may allow him to take responsibility be-
fore Jehovah for obtaining a Scriptural divorce; if he remarries,
no judicial action will be taken.
75. Even if the accused mate is not one of Jehovah’s Witnesses (dis-
fellowshipped, disassociated, or never baptized), two witnesses

are also generally required to establish wrongdoing that would

provide a basis for Scriptural freedom. An exception may be
made, however, if the unbeliever privately makes an unambigu-
ous confession of adultery to the Christian mate. In such a case,
if the innocent Christian mate believes that the confession is true
and does not wish to reconcile, he can submit a letter to the el-
ders outlining his situation. The body of elders should then con-
sider the letter. Is there any known reason to conclude other than
that the unbelieving mate has been immoral? For example, was
the confession worded ambiguously? Did the unbeliever later deny
making the confession? If the unbeliever is willing to speak with
the elders and matters are unclear, the elders may choose to ask
the accused mate directly. If there is no known reason to con-
clude otherwise, the innocent mate can be allowed to take re-
sponsibility before Jehovah for obtaining a Scriptural divorce; if
he remarries, no judicial action will be taken.
76. The following constitutes rejection by the innocent mate:
(1) The innocent mate initiates a divorce either before or
after learning of the adultery.
(2) The innocent mate signs a divorce decree or in
some other way indicates he does not object to a
divorce initiated by the guilty mate, either before or
after learning of the adultery. In some lands it is
possible for the innocent mate to sign legal documents
that stipulate custody of the children and financial
support without indicating he agrees with the divorce;
his signing such papers in itself would not indicate a
rejection.—w00 12/15 pp. 28-29.
(3) Though verbally expressing forgiveness and not seeking
a divorce, the innocent mate refuses to resume sexual
relations for a very prolonged period of time, a year or
even years. Before indicating to the guilty mate that he
is free to pursue a Scriptural divorce, the elders should

consult with the Service Department. The innocent

mate is not required to make a quick decision to
forgive or not.
MARKING DISORDERLY ONES

77. At times it may be necessary to mark those who display a fla-
grant disregard for Jehovah’s standards though not practicing a
grave sin that merits judicial action. (2 Thess. 3:6, 14, 15; w99
7/15 pp. 29-31) This could include such things as being grossly
lazy or critical or being a profitless talker who is a constant ‘med-
dler with what does not concern him.’ (2 Thess. 3:11) It may in-
volve one who schemes to take material advantage of others,
indulges in entertainment that is clearly improper, dates an unbe-
liever, or dates when not legally or Scripturally free.—od pp. 134-
136 pars. 9-12.
78. If the disorderly conduct is generally unknown to others and pos-
es no threat to their spiritual well-being, usually it is best to han-
dle things through admonition and counsel. The body of elders
should not be hasty in deciding to give a warning talk. However,
if the individual does not see the error of his way but continues
to be an unwholesome influence, a warning talk may be given to
the congregation. Elders must use reasonableness and discern-
ment in determining whether a particular situation is sufficiently
serious and disturbing to require a warning talk.
79. For example, if a baptized Christian is dating an ‘unbeliever,’ the
elders should first counsel him and try to help him. (2 Cor. 6:14;
w04 7/1 pp. 30-31) If he persists in disregarding Bible principles
in spite of repeated admonition, the body of elders may decide
that a warning talk should be given to the congregation. If an in-
dividual is dating an unbaptized publisher, a warning talk may
not be needed. Much would depend on the circumstances, on the
attitude of the Christian, on the level of disturbance to the con-
gregation, and other factors. Nonetheless, if he is dating with a

view to marrying someone who is unbaptized, he is not obeying

the Bible’s counsel at 1 Corinthians 7:39 to marry “only in the
Lord,” and loving counsel should be given.
80. If the disorderly one is moved to change, the elders can individ-
ually decide to resume personally socializing with him. This will
indicate to the congregation that they consider that the individ-
ual is no longer marked.
ATTEMPTED SUICIDE
81. A suicide attempt may be the result of deep despair or major de-
pression. Elders should deal carefully and compassionately with
such a person. In most cases, a judicial hearing is not required.
—Ps. 88:3, 17, 18; Prov. 15:13; Eccl. 7:7; g 4/14 pp. 6-9.

CHAPTER THIRTEEN
Pornography
Paragraphs
Determining Whether a Judicial Hearing Is Required ............. 2-4
Reviewing Qualifications of Those Serving
in an Appointed Capacity ................................................................................. 5-6
Shepherding ....................................................................................................................... 7
Factors to Consider When Recommending Reappointment ... 8
1. Helping a Christian break free from the habit of viewing pornog-

raphy requires firm Scriptural counsel by loving shepherds. (Jas.
5:14, 15) Therefore, when an elder learns that a Christian has de-
liberately viewed pornography, the body of elders should assign
two elders to meet with him to establish the facts and determine
the extent of the problem. If he is married, he should be kindly
encouraged to reveal the matter to his mate. After the initial in-
vestigation, the assigned elders should provide an update to the
body of elders.—See 12:40-42.
DETERMINING WHETHER A JUDICIAL

HEARING IS REQUIRED
2. The deliberate viewing of pornography is a sin. (Matt. 5:28, 29)
It can result in an addiction to sex, perverted desires, and seri-
ous marital problems. (Prov. 6:27; lvs pp. 121-123 pars. 9-12) How-
ever, not all cases require handling by a judicial committee.—See
12:1-2; w12 3/15 pp. 30-31; w06 7/15 p. 31.
3. An entrenched practice of viewing, perhaps over a considerable
period of time, abhorrent forms of pornography would be consid-
ered gross uncleanness with greediness and needs to be handled

PORNOGRAPHY
judicially. (Eph. 4:19) Such abhorrent forms of pornography in-

clude homosexuality (sex between those of the same gender),
group sex, bestiality, sadistic torture, bondage, gang rape, the
brutalizing of women, or child pornography. It is equally wrong
for a man or woman to watch two women engaged in homosex-
ual activity as it is for a man or woman to watch two men en-
gaged in homosexual activity.—See 12:14-15.
4. If the body of elders learns that a Christian was promoting
the viewing of pornography (whether abhorrent or nonabhorrent
forms), such as by inviting others to view it, this could give ev-
idence of a disrespectful, insolent attitude, which would require
handling by a judicial committee on a charge of brazen conduct.
—See 12:16-17.
REVIEWING QUALIFICATIONS OF THOSE

SERVING IN AN APPOINTED CAPACITY
5. If the body of elders determines that a judicial hearing is not
needed but the matter involves an appointed person, such as a
pioneer, a ministerial servant, or an elder, his qualifications should
be reviewed. (See 8:31-33; 9:4.) The body of elders should con-
sider: What type of pornography was viewed? Did the viewing of
pornography consist of a few brief incidents, or was it a practice
spanning many months, or even years? Was the viewing of por-
nography accompanied by masturbation? (See 12:4.) When was
the last time the person viewed pornography? Was the person
counseled in the past about viewing pornography? Did he come
forward voluntarily? If married, has he informed his mate of the
problem? What effect has this had on the marriage? Who else
are aware of the problem? Does the person still have their re-
spect? Does the person demonstrate an earnest desire to desist
from viewing pornography? Does the person’s conscience allow
him to continue serving in an appointed position?
6. The body of elders may determine that the person still qualifies
to serve in an appointed position if (1) his involvement consist-

PORNOGRAPHY
ed of a few brief viewings of nonabhorrent forms of pornogra-

phy, (2) he displays a heartfelt desire to desist from looking at
pornography, (3) the elders are convinced that he will refrain from
viewing it, (4) he retains the respect of others who are aware of
what he did, and (5) his conscience allows him to do so. On the
other hand, a Christian who persists in viewing nonabhorrent
forms of pornography cannot be considered as exemplary and
thus does not qualify for special privileges in the congregation.
SHEPHERDING
7. Elders need to provide ongoing shepherding to a Christian who
is struggling to break free from viewing pornography. The fre-
quency and nature of shepherding visits may depend on the ex-
tent of the person’s involvement with pornography in the past.
Bible-based information from “the faithful and discreet slave” can
serve as the basis for such visits. (Matt. 24:45) Every effort should
be made to help the Christian establish a daily routine of prayer,
personal study, and wholesome meditation. (Phil. 4:8) When deal-
ing with a married person, the elders should provide spiritual as-
sistance and comfort to the believing mate as well.
FACTORS TO CONSIDER WHEN

RECOMMENDING REAPPOINTMENT
8. Before consideration is given to recommending a brother for reap-
pointment as a ministerial servant or an elder who was deleted
for viewing pornography, the brother (1) must have demonstrat-
ed over a sufficient period of time that he has overcome the prob-
lem and (2) must have the respect of the congregation, includ-
ing his family. (See 8:10.) If so, and the brother was previously
serving as an elder, it must be decided whether to recommend
that he first serve as a ministerial servant. If his viewing of por-
nography was for a prolonged period, it would be best to rec-
ommend him first as a ministerial servant. However, if he was

PORNOGRAPHY
involved in only a few brief viewings of nonabhorrent forms of

pornography and he took the initiative to confess to the elders,
he may be recommended to serve again as an elder.

CHAPTER FOURTEEN
Child Abuse
Paragraphs
Legal Considerations .......................................................................................... 6-10
Prison Inmates ........................................................................................................... 9
Child Pornography and Sexting ................................................................. 10
Congregation Considerations ........................................................................... 11
Providing Spiritual Assistance to Victims ..................................... 12-17
Investigating Allegations ..................................................................................... 18
Judicial Committee .................................................................................................... 19
Reinstatement Committee .......................................................................... 20-21
Restrictions .............................................................................................................. 22-24
Filing ....................................................................................................................................... 25
Moving to Another Congregation ........................................................ 26-27
Notification by Secular Authorities ........................................................... 28
Sexual Misconduct Involving Only Minors ................................... 29-30
1. Elders should adhere closely to the direction in this chapter when

a matter involving child abuse comes to their attention. Doing so
will uphold the sanctity of Jehovah’s name and contribute toward
the safety of minors.—Isa. 32:1, 2; 1 Pet. 2:12.
2. While the information in this chapter refers to an accused in the
masculine gender and to the victim in the feminine gender, it ap-
plies equally regardless of the gender of the accused or the gen-
der of the victim. References to parents and family heads apply
equally to legal guardians.
3. Child abuse includes the sexual or physical abuse of a minor. It
would also include the extreme neglect of a minor by her parent.

CHILD ABUSE
Child sexual abuse is a perversion and generally includes sexual

intercourse with a minor; oral or anal sex with a minor; fondling
the genitals, breasts, or buttocks of a minor; voyeurism of a mi-
nor; indecent exposure to a minor; or soliciting a minor for sex-
ual conduct. Depending on the circumstances of the case, it may
include involvement with child pornography or sexting with a mi-
nor. Sexting involves the sending of sexually explicit messages or
images electronically.
4. From the Bible’s standpoint, child sexual abuse is a gross sin.

(Deut. 23:17, 18; Gal. 5:19-21; w97 2/1 p. 29) Jehovah’s Witness-
es abhor child sexual abuse. (Rom. 12:9) Thus, the congregation
will not shield any perpetrator of such repugnant acts from the
consequences of his sin. The congregation’s handling of an accu-
sation of child sexual abuse is not intended to replace the secu-
lar authority’s handling of the matter. (Rom. 13:1-4) Therefore, the
victim, her parents, or anyone else who reports such an allega-
tion to the elders should be clearly informed that they have the
right to report the matter to the secular authorities. Elders do not
criticize anyone who chooses to make such a report.—Gal. 6:5.
5. The Scriptures place the responsibility on parents for teaching

and protecting their children. (Eph. 6:4) As spiritual shepherds,
elders can help parents to shoulder their Scriptural responsibili-
ty. Our publications and website contain much helpful informa-
tion to assist parents.—w10 11/1 p. 13; w08 10/1 p. 21; w96 12/1
pp. 13-14 pars. 18-19; g 10/07 pp. 3-11; g99 4/8 pp. 8-11; g97
4/8 p. 14; g93 10/8 pp. 5-13; g85 1/22 pp. 3-10; fy pp. 61-62
pars. 24-26; lr pp. 170-171.
LEGAL CONSIDERATIONS
6. Child abuse is a crime. In some jurisdictions, individuals who learn
of an allegation of child abuse may be obligated by law to report
the allegation to the secular authorities.—Rom. 13:1-4.

CHILD ABUSE
7. To ensure that elders comply with child-abuse reporting laws, two

elders should immediately call the Legal Department for legal ad-
vice when the elders learn of an accusation of child abuse. A call
should be made even when both persons involved are minors.
The elders should not ask an alleged victim, the accused person,
or anyone else to call the Legal Department on the elders’ be-
half. The elders should call the Legal Department even in the fol-
lowing situations:
(1) The alleged abuse occurred many years ago.
(2) The alleged abuse is based on the testimony of only
one witness.
(3) The alleged abuse is believed to be a repressed
memory.
(4) The alleged abuse involved perpetrators or victims who
are deceased.
(5) The alleged abuse is believed to have already been
reported to the secular authorities.
(6) The alleged perpetrator or victim is not a member of
your congregation.
(7) The alleged perpetrator is a non-Witness associating
with the congregation.
(8) The alleged abuse occurred before the alleged
perpetrator or victim was baptized.
(9) The alleged victim is now an adult.
(10) The alleged abuse occurred in the past, and it is
unclear whether your congregation elders ever called
the Legal Department for direction.
8. The Legal Department will provide legal advice based on the facts
and the applicable law. If the individual who is accused of the

CHILD ABUSE
child abuse is associated with your congregation, the two elders

calling should provide the Legal Department with the individual’s
full name, date of birth and, if applicable, date of baptism. After
speaking with the Legal Department, the caller will be transferred
to the Service Department.
9. Prison Inmates: Two elders should immediately call the Legal De-
partment regarding any prison inmate, baptized or unbaptized,
who has been accused of child abuse and who is now associat-
ing with a congregation. This would include his attending congre-
gation meetings held in the prison. In some cases, elders may
not be permitted to inquire about the offense that an inmate may
have committed. However, if the elders learn that the alleged of-
fense has to do with child abuse, they should immediately call
the Legal Department.
10. Child Pornography and Sexting: If the elders become aware of
an adult associated with a congregation who has been involved
with child pornography, two elders should immediately call the
Legal Department. Likewise, if the elders become aware of an
adult or a minor associated with a congregation who is sexting
with a minor, the Legal Department should be called immediate-
ly. The Legal Department does not need to be informed when the
elders receive reports of adults sexting one another.
CONGREGATION CONSIDERATIONS
11. When discussing child sexual abuse from a congregation stand-
point, we are not considering a situation in which a minor who
is a willing participant and who is approaching adulthood is in-
volved in sexual activity with an adult who is a few years older
than the minor. Nor, generally speaking, are we discussing situ-
ations in which only minors are involved. (See 14:29-30.) Rather,
we are referring to an adult guilty of sexually abusing a minor
who is a young child, or an adult guilty of sexual involvement
with a minor who is approaching adulthood but was not a will-
ing participant.

CHILD ABUSE
PROVIDING SPIRITUAL ASSISTANCE

TO VICTIMS
12. Elders should demonstrate empathy and compassion when any-
one approaches them about a matter involving child abuse. On-
going spiritual shepherding is especially important for victims of
child sexual abuse and their families.—Isa. 32:1, 2; Eph. 4:32;
1 Pet. 5:2.
13. Two elders should always be involved when shepherding an adult
sister who is a victim of child abuse. An elder should never be-
come the sole confidant of a sister to whom he is not closely re-
lated.—See 25:12.
14. When shepherding a child abuse victim who is still a minor, two
elders and the minor’s parents should be involved. (Deut. 6:6, 7;
Eph. 6:4) Of course, if one of the parents is the accused, the ac-
cused parent would not be involved. If neither parent can be pres-
ent, then another adult member of the congregation who is a
confidant of the victim should be included.
15. As spiritual shepherds, elders should be good listeners. (Prov. 21:
13; Jas. 1:19) While some victims may prefer not to talk about
past abuse, others have found it helpful to talk with empathetic
elders who can listen and then “speak consolingly” from God’s
Word. (1 Thess. 5:14; Prov. 12:25; Jas. 5:13-15) Though it may be
necessary for the elders to ask a few tactful questions to help
an afflicted one express herself, they should avoid probing unnec-
essarily or repeatedly into the details of the abuse. However, dis-
cussing Biblical examples of others who endured a difficult child-
hood and yet succeeded in becoming faithful servants of Jehovah
may provide needed comfort. In time, Jehovah God will heal “the
brokenhearted.”—Ps. 30:2; 94:19; 147:3; w11 10/15 pp. 23-27; w01
4/15 pp. 25-28; w83 10/1 pp. 27-31; g 7/09 pp. 6-9; g91 10/8
pp. 3-11.
16. The time that elders can spend shepherding a member of the con-
gregation who is a victim of child abuse is limited, so they must

CHILD ABUSE
balance this important responsibility with their other responsibil-

ities, which include caring for the spiritual, emotional, and ma-
terial needs of their own family. In some cases, a victim of child
abuse may seek more spiritual support from the elders than they
can reasonably give. In such cases, some elders have found it
beneficial to set limits on the time for such shepherding. It may
take several visits to assist a victim effectively. When circumstanc-
es limit the extent of the assistance the elders can provide on a
particular occasion, elders should still seek to share words of en-
couragement, assuring a victim of Jehovah’s love, reading an ap-
propriate scripture, and offering a prayer. This will confirm the el-
ders’ interest and willingness to help to the extent possible.
17. In addition to the spiritual shepherding provided by the elders,
the victim or her family may desire other assistance. For exam-
ple, an adult sister who suffered abuse as a child may choose to
approach an empathetic sister for emotional support and en-
couragement. (Prov. 17:17) Or the victim or her family may de-
cide to consult a mental-health professional. Whether a victim or
her family pursues treatment from psychiatrists, psychologists,
or therapists is a personal decision. (Gal. 6:5) If an elder is asked
for advice on this matter, he may direct attention to appropriate
Bible principles and material in our publications.—w15 9/15 pp. 9-
11; w08 11/15 pp. 23-27.
INVESTIGATING ALLEGATIONS
18. The elders may learn of an allegation of child sexual abuse di-
rectly from the victim, through her parents, or through a trusted
confidant of the victim. After receiving assistance from the branch
office and if the accused is a member of the congregation, the
body of elders will appoint two elders to investigate. These elders
should carefully follow Scriptural procedures and the Bible-based
direction in this chapter and in Chapter 12. During the investiga-
tion process and during the judicial committee process, a victim

CHILD ABUSE
of child sexual abuse is not required to make her allegation in

the presence of the alleged abuser. Generally, elders should be
able to obtain necessary information from the parents. In addi-
tion, sufficient evidence needed to establish wrongdoing on the
part of an alleged abuser may already be available to the elders.
(See 12:40-42.) In the exceptional event that the two elders be-
lieve it is necessary to speak with a minor who is a victim of child
sexual abuse, the elders should first contact the Service Depart-
ment.
JUDICIAL COMMITTEE
19. If the body of elders concludes that there is sufficient Scriptural
evidence to warrant the formation of a judicial committee on the
grounds of child sexual abuse, the coordinator of the body of el-
ders should first contact the circuit overseer. (See 12:40-42; 15:
1-2.) The circuit overseer will designate an experienced elder to
serve as chairman of the judicial committee. If an appeal com-
mittee is needed, the circuit overseer will select experienced el-
ders to serve on the committee and will designate the chairman.
(See 17:1.) If wrongdoing is established and the wrongdoer is not
repentant, he should be disfellowshipped. (See 16:26-31.) On the
other hand, if the wrongdoer is repentant and is reproved, the re-
proof should be announced to the congregation at the next mid-
week meeting. (See 16:20-25.) This announcement will serve as
a protection for the congregation. Victims of child sexual abuse
are not handled judicially. However, if the body of elders believes
that congregation action may be warranted in the case of a ma-
ture minor who was a willing participant in wrongdoing, two el-
ders should call the Service Department before proceeding.
REINSTATEMENT COMMITTEE
20. If a person who has been disfellowshipped for child sexual abuse
applies for reinstatement, the coordinator of the body of elders

CHILD ABUSE
should contact his circuit overseer and provide the names of

those who served on the original committee. The circuit overseer
will designate an experienced elder to serve as chairman of the
reinstatement committee. If the decision is to reinstate, two el-
ders serving on the committee should immediately call the Ser-
vice Department. This call must be made before the reinstate-
ment is announced to the congregation.—See 19:10-12.
21. If a person who has been disfellowshipped for child sexual abuse
has moved and applies for reinstatement in a different congre-
gation, the coordinator of the body of elders of the new congre-
gation should contact his circuit overseer. The circuit overseer of
the new congregation will designate an experienced elder to serve
as chairman of the reinstatement committee in the new congre-
gation. If that committee recommends that the person be rein-
stated, the committee should contact the coordinator of the body
of elders of the original congregation, who should then contact
his circuit overseer and provide the names of those who served
on the original judicial committee. That circuit overseer will des-
ignate an experienced elder to serve as chairman of the reinstate-
ment committee in the original congregation. If that committee
agrees to reinstate, two elders from each congregation’s com-
mittee should immediately call the Service Department. These
calls must be made before the reinstatement is announced in
both congregations.—See 19:10-12.
RESTRICTIONS
22. The elders should carefully adhere to all direction provided by the
Service Department. For example, the Service Department will
provide direction when (1) it is determined that a publisher (bap-
tized or unbaptized) who is guilty of child sexual abuse is repen-
tant and will remain in the congregation, (2) one disfellowshipped
for child sexual abuse is reinstated, (3) a publisher (baptized or
unbaptized) who denies an accusation of child sexual abuse is
convicted by the secular authorities, or (4) one viewed as a child

CHILD ABUSE
molester by the community or the congregation becomes a pub-

lisher or becomes a baptized member of the congregation.
23. In such cases, direction from the Service Department to the el-
ders will include restrictions imposed on the individual’s activities
within the congregation, on his participation in the field ministry,
and on his interaction with minors. The elders will be directed to
caution the individual never to be alone with a minor, not to cul-
tivate friendships with minors, not to display affection for minors,
and so forth. The Service Department will direct the elders to in-
form family heads of minors within the congregation of the need
to monitor their children’s interaction with the individual. The el-
ders would take this step only if directed to do so by the Ser-
vice Department. The coordinator of the body of elders should
ensure that newly appointed elders and elders who move into the
congregation are made aware of the Service Department’s direc-
tion regarding such individuals.
24. One who has engaged in child sexual abuse does not qualify to
receive any privileges in the congregation for many years, if ever;
this includes minor privileges. Paul’s counsel to Timothy has spe-
cial relevance in the case of baptized adults who have molested
children: “Never lay your hands hastily on any man; neither be-
come a sharer in the sins of others.” (1 Tim. 5:22; w97 1/1 pp. 26-
29) If the body of elders believes that one who has engaged
in child sexual abuse decades ago may now qualify for minor
privileges, such as carrying or adjusting microphones, operating
sound and video equipment, serving as an attendant, or assist-
ing with accounts, literature, or territories, they should assign
two elders to call the Service Department. The assigned elders
should call the Service Department before any congregation priv-
ileges are extended.
FILING
25. Information concerning individuals associated with the congre-
gation and accused of child sexual abuse (established or not),

CHILD ABUSE
including letters of introduction, should be placed in an envelope

labeled with the individual’s name and marked “Do Not Destroy.”
This envelope should be kept in the congregation’s confidential
file. This would include Notification of Disfellowshipping or Dis-
association (S-77) forms on individuals who have committed child
sexual abuse, even if later reinstated.
MOVING TO ANOTHER CONGREGATION

26. When an individual who has been accused of child sexual abuse
(established or not) moves to another congregation, two elders
from the congregation the individual moves from should imme-
diately call the Legal Department. The elders should be prepared
to provide the name of the new congregation, if known. This
should be done even if the individual is disfellowshipped or is in
prison and is transferred to another facility or is released. The
Congregation Service Committee should not send any informa-
tion to the new congregation until after receiving legal advice
from the Legal Department and direction from the Service De-
partment.
27. When the elders are informed that an individual who has been
accused of child sexual abuse (established or not) has moved
into the congregation, two elders should immediately call the Le-
gal Department. This should be done even if the individual is dis-
fellowshipped or is in prison and has transferred from another
facility or is released. If the individual is disfellowshipped and liv-
ing within the congregation’s territory, the elders should list that
address on the appropriate congregation territory card as a “Do
Not Call.”
NOTIFICATION BY SECULAR AUTHORITIES

28. From time to time, secular authorities may inform the elders that
a sex offender is living in the area. The notice may provide the

CHILD ABUSE
address of the individual and may state the nature of his crimi-
nal activity. In such a case, the elders should list that address on
the appropriate congregation territory card as a “Do Not Call.”
SEXUAL MISCONDUCT INVOLVING

ONLY MINORS
29. What steps should elders take when minors engage in sexual mis-
conduct with one another? As stated earlier, two elders should
immediately call the Legal Department even when both persons
are minors. Minors who engage in sexual misconduct with one
another are not generally considered by the congregation as hav-
ing engaged in child sexual abuse. However, regardless of the
ages of those involved, such misconduct is serious and may even
warrant congregation judicial action. The body of elders should
work with the parents to ensure that the minors receive spiritu-
al assistance. If elders have questions regarding a specific case,
they should call the Service Department.—See 15:15.
30. When baptized minors become involved in “sexting,” the elders
must use good judgment in determining whether the wrongdo-
ing has escalated to a point warranting congregation judicial ac-
tion. Helpful information can be found in “Questions From Read-
ers” in the July 15, 2006, issue of The Watchtower. Please review
this material carefully before concluding that a baptized minor is
guilty of gross uncleanness or brazen conduct. (See 12:14-17.) If
a baptized minor has been previously counseled on this matter
and persists in the wrong course, in most cases, judicial action
would be taken. However, each case must be evaluated on its
own merit. In all cases, the body of elders should work with the
parents to ensure that the minors receive spiritual assistance.
If elders have questions regarding a specific case, they should
call the Service Department.

CHILD ABUSE

CHAPTER FIFTEEN
Preparing for
Judicial Hearings
Paragraphs
Selecting the Judicial Committee and Chairman ......................... 1-3
Preparing the Mind and Heart to Judge ............................................. 4-6
Inviting the Accused to the Hearing ..................................................... 7-11
Meeting With Marriage Mates ................................................................... 12-14
Meeting With Baptized Minors and Young Adults ......................... 15
Meeting With Incarcerated Ones .................................................................. 16
If the Accused Threatens Suicide ................................................................ 17
If the Accused Threatens Legal Action .......................................... 18-20
SELECTING THE JUDICIAL COMMITTEE

AND CHAIRMAN
1. While extensive details of a case do not need to be conveyed to
the entire body of elders, enough information should be present-
ed for them to determine whether a disfellowshipping offense has
actually been committed and, if so, who are best qualified to han-
dle the type of case that has arisen. When the elders determine
that a judicial committee is needed, those who are present at the
meeting should choose the elders who will serve on the commit-
tee and designate which one will be chairman. (If the case in-
volves child sexual abuse, see Chapter 14, paragraph 19.) The el-
ders chosen should be men of discernment and good judgment.
It is usually best for newer elders to serve first with more expe-
rienced ones. They would never serve as observers on a judicial
case. The committee should be made up of three elders. However,

PREPARING FOR JUDICIAL HEARINGS
complex cases may warrant having four or even five experienced

elders on the committee.
2. If the elders know that the accused has strong feelings against
a particular elder, it would be better not to use him. An elder who
is a close relative, has been in business with the accused, or has
had a special friendship with him would not normally serve on
the committee. Ministerial servants should not be used to serve
on judicial committees. In the rare circumstance in which three
elders are not available to serve on a judicial committee, one or
two elders from a neighboring congregation or the circuit over-
seer may be used to complete a committee of three members.
3. In the rare circumstance in which three elders cannot be located

to serve on the judicial committee, two elders may care for the
matter. The two elders will function as an appointed judicial com-
mittee. (Matt. 18:19, 20) However, prior to their informing the per-
son of their decision, the chairman of the committee will submit a
confidential report to the Service Department. The report should
clearly outline the facts of the case and the conclusion reached
by the committee. This report is to be sent whether the decision
is to disfellowship the individual or not. The Service Department
will review the report and confirm receipt of it to the committee.
Thereafter, the two elders will inform the person of the commit-
tee’s decision. If the decision is to disfellowship, the committee
will then submit the Notification of Disfellowshipping or Disasso-
ciation (S-77) form to the Service Department in the usual way.
PREPARING THE
MIND AND HEART TO JUDGE
4. Serving on a judicial committee is a heavy responsibility. Elders
are judging for Jehovah and are accountable to him for the judg-
ment they render. (2 Chron. 19:6, 7) Their decision will likely have
long-lasting and far-reaching consequences for the individual in-

volved, his Christian family members, and others in the congre-

gation. Each time an elder serves on a judicial committee, he
should first review Chapters 12, 15, and 16 of this publication.
5. Allowing an unrepentant wrongdoer to remain in the congrega-
tion could result in a leavening influence. (Gal. 5:9) Failure to re-
move the individual may also minimize the wrong in the mind of
the wrongdoer and in the minds of others who may know of his
sin. (Eccl. 8:11) On the other hand, an individual unjustly dealt
with may have difficulty maintaining his spirituality.—Matt. 18:6.
6. Elders can render a good judgment with Jehovah’s help. (Matt.
18:18-20) They must pray for wisdom, discernment, and God’s
holy spirit. (1 Ki. 3:9; Phil. 1:9, 10; Jas. 1:5) They must do care-
ful, thorough research using Bible-based publications, not relying
solely on past experience in handling judicial matters. (Prov. 15:
28) They must endeavor to obtain a clear picture regarding what
occurred and what the individual’s true attitude is.—Prov. 18:
13, 17.
INVITING THE ACCUSED TO THE HEARING

7. It is best for two elders to invite him orally. Their invitation should
include the following information:
(1) Make clear that the meeting is a judicial hearing.
(2) Explain what his course of action is alleged to have
been.
(3) State the time and place of the hearing and how the
person can contact the chairman if he is unable to
meet at the scheduled time and location.
8. If circumstances permit, hold the hearing at the Kingdom Hall.
This theocratic setting will put all in a more respectful frame of
mind; it will also help to ensure greater confidentiality for the pro-
ceedings.

9. The assigned elders should make every effort to arrange for a ju-
dicial hearing right away. Leaving the matter unresolved can harm
the congregation and the accused. If the accused does not make
himself available to receive an oral invitation despite repeated ef-
forts by the judicial committee, then the judicial committee should
send a written invitation. (Do not leave confidential information
on an answering machine or voice mail or send by way of e-mail,
text message, or other forms of electronic messaging.) A written
invitation signed by the judicial committee should include the
same information as outlined above for an oral invitation. If pos-
sible, send the invitation in such a way that the elders can ver-
ify that the addressee received it. If they are unsuccessful in their
diligent efforts to invite him and they cannot confirm that he re-
ceived the invitation, they should hold the matter in abeyance.
10. If he accepts the judicial committee’s invitation yet fails to ap-
pear, the judicial committee should reschedule the hearing and
endeavor to invite the accused again. If he does not attend af-
ter it is confirmed that he received the second invitation and if
it is evident that he is unwilling to cooperate with the judicial
committee, the committee will proceed with the hearing but will
not make a decision until evidence and testimony by witnesses
are considered.
11. If the accused makes known to the elders his adamant refusal to
meet with a judicial committee, the judicial committee may pro-
ceed in his absence without extending further invitations.—See
16:28.
MEETING WITH MARRIAGE MATES

12. If the accused is a married sister, it is best to have her believing
husband present for the hearing. He is her head, and his efforts
to restore her and direct her can be very helpful. (1 Cor. 11:3) If
unusual circumstances are involved, for example, if the elders feel
it would be best not to invite the husband because of their con-

cerns for the wife’s safety, they should call the Service Depart-
ment.
13. If the accused is a married brother and he wants his believing

wife to be present for the hearing, she may attend.
14. If the husband committed adultery, he has an obligation to in-

form his wife of the facts. The judicial committee should prompt-
ly inquire of the Christian wife as to what her husband has told
her. If he refuses to inform her of his adultery, the elders should
inform her that because of her husband’s conduct, it is up to her
to decide whether to pursue a Scriptural divorce or not. Further-
more, they should inform the innocent mate that her resuming
sexual relations with the guilty mate would negate any claim to
Scriptural freedom. (See 12:71-76.) But they should not give her
further details. On the other hand, the elders may find that while
the husband did confess adultery to his wife, he did not tell her
the full extent of his wrong conduct and left out important infor-
mation that the wife should know. The elders should not provide
this confidential information to the wife, but they can suggest
that she speak with her husband again. Even if he does not tell
her anything more, this will alert her to the fact that he is with-
holding information from her, and this may help her to determine
whether to forgive or not.
MEETING WITH BAPTIZED MINORS AND

YOUNG ADULTS
15. It is best to meet with the youth and his Christian parents,
since they have the responsibility to raise and train him. If the
accused is living in the home of his believing parents but is no
longer a minor, the elders would not generally invite the parents
to the hearing. However, if the accused has recently become an
adult and is still living in his parents’ home, the parents may
ask to be present. If the accused has no objection, the judicial

committee may decide to allow them to attend the hearing.—See

14:29.
MEETING WITH INCARCERATED ONES

16. See 28:22.
IF THE ACCUSED THREATENS SUICIDE

17. In judicial cases in which the accused threatens suicide, it may
be best for the committee to suspend the hearing to focus on
helping him regain his balance. (See 12:81.) They should assure
him of the committee’s desire to help him and then should broach
the subject of depression and suicide, using the Scriptures and
Bible-based publications. (Prov. 3:11, 12; 4:13; Heb. 12:5, 6, 11-
13) Depending upon his emotional state, it may be best to do
this a day or two later. The elders can prepare by reviewing arti-
cles that will help them deal sensitively with the depressed indi-
vidual. (g 4/14 pp. 6-9) The judicial committee should avoid un-
necessarily prolonging the case, as this can cause undue stress
for the accused. They should take notes for the confidential file,
outlining the dates of their conversations and the scriptures and
articles that were considered. These notes should be signed and
included in the file for the case. (See 22:21-27.) The judicial com-
mittee should communicate with the Service Department if there
are questions about a certain case.
IF THE ACCUSED THREATENS LEGAL ACTION

18. If the accused threatens legal action against the elders, the el-
ders should suspend proceedings and promptly telephone the Le-
gal Department.
19. If a member of the media or an attorney representing the accused
contacts the elders, they should not give any information about

the case or verify that there is a judicial committee. Rather, they

should give the following explanation: “The spiritual and physical
welfare of Jehovah’s Witnesses is of paramount concern to the
elders, who willingly provide spiritual assistance to congregation
members. The elders extend this spiritual assistance confidential-
ly. This makes it easier for those who seek the elders’ help to do
so without worrying that what they say to the elders will be di-
vulged later. Consequently, we do not comment on whether el-
ders are currently or have formerly met to assist any member of
the congregation.” If there is a need to do so, the elders may ob-
tain the inquirer’s name and phone number and inform him that
their attorney will contact him. The elders should then prompt-
ly telephone the Legal Department.
20. If the authorities request confidential congregation records or ask
that elders give testimony regarding confidential congregation
matters, the elders should promptly telephone the Legal Depart-
ment.


CHAPTER SIXTEEN
Procedure for
Judicial Hearings
Paragraphs
Determining Genuine Repentance ........................................................... 6-12
If Repentance Is Unclear .............................................................................. 13-17
If the Decision Is to Reprove ................................................................... 18-25
If the Decision Is to Disfellowship ...................................................... 26-31
1. The judicial hearing is opened with prayer with the accused pres-
ent. Generally, observers are not allowed. (See 15:12-13, 15.) The
chairman then states the reason for the hearing and explains
that audio or video recordings of the hearing are not permitted.
He should then read a scripture, such as Proverbs 28:13 or James
5:14, 15. In imitation of Jehovah, the elders will convey their de-
sire to be helpful and will treat the accused with kindness. (Ezek.
34:11, 12) They should listen patiently and not draw conclusions
before they have heard all the evidence. Even if the accused is
belligerent, they should treat him kindly and respectfully, never
harshly.—w89 9/15 pp. 19-20.
2. The chairman invites the accused to make a personal statement.

If the accused claims that he is innocent, the witnesses to the
wrongdoing are presented one at a time. It is best that the wit-
nesses give their testimony in the presence of the accused, al-
though a victim of rape or of child sexual abuse is never required
to do so. If a witness lives a great distance away or for some
other reason is not able to be physically present, his testimony
may be presented by means of a phone call or videoconference

PROCEDURE FOR JUDICIAL HEARINGS
(if confidentiality can be maintained) or perhaps submitted in

writing and read to the accused.
3. After each witness has testified, the accused is given opportuni-
ty to respond. If he wishes to present witnesses to establish his
innocence, he may do so. Only witnesses who have relevant tes-
timony regarding the alleged wrongdoing are allowed to testify.
Witnesses should be informed of their responsibility to maintain
confidentiality. Additionally, they should not be present to hear
the testimony of other witnesses.
4. In the rare event that testimony presented during the hearing
causes the judicial committee to conclude that the matter should
not be handled judicially, the hearing should be suspended. In-
form the person that he will be contacted further regarding the
matter. The body of elders should then be consulted to deter-
mine whether the judicial committee ought to be disbanded.
5. The committee should first seek to establish the facts and ascer-
tain the attitude of the accused. This requires skillful and discreet
questions. The judicial committee should be thorough but not in-
quire about needless details, especially in regard to sexual mis-
conduct. However, when Scriptural freedom to divorce and re-
marry is an issue or when the nature of Scriptural wrongdoing
must be determined, details may need to be clarified. When the
elders on the judicial committee feel that they have a clear un-
derstanding, they should excuse the accused from the room and
discuss the case and the individual’s repentance or lack thereof.
The judicial committee ought to feel free to seek Jehovah’s wis-
dom through prayer at any time during their private deliberations.
—Jas. 1:5.
DETERMINING GENUINE REPENTANCE

6. In the Bible, two Greek verbs are used in connection with repen-
tance. The first stresses a changed viewpoint or disposition. The

second emphasizes a feeling of regret. Therefore, repentance in-

volves a deep regret over a damaged relationship with Jehovah,
remorse over the reproach brought upon God’s name and peo-
ple, and a sincere longing to come back into Jehovah’s favor. It
includes a heart-motivated rejection of the bad course as some-
thing repugnant, hated. (Rom. 12:9) Such an attitude should be
demonstrated by “fruits that befit repentance,” making evident
to an adequate degree a sinner’s claimed repentance.—Luke 3:8;
it-2 pp. 770-777.
7. Judging repentance is not simply a matter of determining wheth-
er the wrongdoer is weak or wicked. Weakness is not synonymous
with repentance. Neither should the judicial committee’s decision
be determined by the notoriety of the wrong. The judicial com-
mittee should look for clear works of repentance commensurate
with his wrongdoing. (2 Cor. 7:10, 11) The committee must be
convinced that the wrongdoer has a changed heart condition,
that he has a zeal to right the wrong, and that he is absolutely
determined to avoid it in the future. Even if this is the individu-
al’s first time before a judicial committee, he must give evidence
of genuine repentance if he is to remain in the congregation.
8. The extent to which the person deviates from righteousness may
be major or minor, and logically the degree of regret (repentance)
ought to be commensurate with the degree of deviation. Was the
individual caught off guard so that he momentarily succumbed
to temptation, or did he plan to do wrong? Was he unaware of
the gravity of his sin? Did he deliberately ignore counsel or warn-
ings? Was it a single offense, or was it a practice? The more an
individual repeats serious sin, the more that one reasonably gives
evidence of being like wicked people who are “practicing what is
hurtful.”—Ps. 28:3.
9. The judicial committee should be very concerned about keeping
the congregation clean and the need to exercise particular care
if the wrongdoer has secretly carried on gross sin over a long peri-
od. In such cases, an individual might not be able to demonstrate

sufficient repentance to the committee at the time of the hear-

ing. If so, he must be disfellowshipped, allowing time to pass for
him to prove his repentance. Or it may be that the individual has
been dealt with judicially a number of times in the past. Because
he appeared repentant, he was reproved each time. Now he has
sinned again. In these cases, the committee must consider wheth-
er the person’s life course gives evidence that he is producing
“fruit that befits repentance.”—Matt. 3:8.
10. Below are some indications of repentance. However, none of these
factors is the only consideration when determining whether the
sinner is repentant.
(1) Was his confession voluntary, or did he have to be
accused by others? Some offenders are so deeply
ashamed or have such difficulty expressing themselves
that they are reluctant to speak.
(2) Is the individual truthful? (Acts 5:1-10) When
questioned, are his answers forthright? Is he
cooperative with the judicial committee? The judicial
committee should be especially cautious if the
individual has shown himself to be guilty of hypocrisy,
lying, or deliberate efforts to deceive.
(3) Has he prayed to Jehovah and asked for his
forgiveness? Keep in mind that some wrongdoers,
though repentant, find it difficult to pray.—Jas. 5:14.
(4) What has he done to repair his relationship with
Jehovah and with others he has hurt by his actions?
Has he made amends, expressed willingness to do so,
or apologized to those damaged by his sinful course?
Has he asked for the forgiveness of those he has
wronged?
(5) If he has committed adultery, has he confessed to
the innocent mate and asked for forgiveness?—w73
pp. 351-352.

The option to forgive adultery rests with the innocent

mate. The guilty mate cannot be viewed as repentant if
he refuses to inform her and allow her the opportunity
to forgive. If the wrongdoer is unwilling to confess and
ask for forgiveness because of fear of violence by the
innocent mate or for some other reason, the elders
should contact the Service Department before
proceeding.
(6) Does he manifest a spirit of heartfelt regret over
having damaged his relationship with Jehovah?—Ps. 32:
3-5; 51:1-4.
(7) Does he demonstrate godly sadness or worldly

sadness? (2 Cor. 7:8-11) Is his sadness primarily
because of hurting Jehovah and bringing Him into
reproach or because of the disappointment he has
caused to family and friends and the shame he has
experienced? (Ezra 10:1; Luke 22:59-62) Individuals
vary in their emotional makeup and control. Tears do
not necessarily indicate sincere repentance; neither
does a lack of strong emotion show a lack of
repentance.—Gen. 25:29-34; 27:34.
(8) Does he accept responsibility for his error, or does

he rather minimize or justify his bad course?—1 Sam.
15:24; 2 Sam. 12:13.
(9) Does he recognize that lesser sins may have led up

to serious wrongdoing, and is he determined to avoid
these?
11. Each case is different. The judicial committee should consider any
factors unique to the case. For example, the wrongdoer may have
been a victim of abuse. Although that is not an excuse for wrong-
doing, understanding any extenuating circumstances will help the
judicial committee to understand the wrongdoer better.

12. The same is true regarding wrongdoers who suffer from mental
or emotional problems. (See 15:17.) If the wrongdoer is able to
carry out normal daily activities and is viewed by the communi-
ty as being accountable for his actions and decisions, the con-
gregation should not overlook his wrongdoing. However, the ju-
dicial committee should show consideration and patience in their
dealings with him and be especially aware of the need for dis-
cernment in evaluating his repentance. On the other hand, if the
judicial committee discerns that his mental condition is so severe
that others generally regard him as not being responsible for what
he does, they may recommend to the body of elders that no ju-
dicial action be taken, explaining the reasons for their recommen-
dation.
IF REPENTANCE IS UNCLEAR
13. If the extent of the wrongdoer’s repentance is unclear, the com-
mittee should invite him back into the room for further discus-
sion. They should use God’s Word to help him understand why
his conduct was wrong and how it has affected his relationship
with Jehovah and the congregation. It is possible that even as
late as the judicial hearing, he will demonstrate repentance to
the point that mercy may be warranted. In most cases, the indi-
vidual will show some repentance, but is it commensurate with
the degree of his wrongdoing? The judicial committee needs to
be modest and keep in mind that if the wrongdoer has demon-
strated few or no works of repentance before the judicial hear-
ing is held, it may not be possible during the hearing to move him
to demonstrate sufficient repentance to justify extending mercy.
Even if it is determined that he must be disfellowshipped, their
efforts to lead him to repentance may help him to begin making
straight paths for his feet and work toward reinstatement. (Heb.
12:13) After trying to help him and hearing his further expres-
sions, the judicial committee should excuse him from the room
and continue to deliberate.

14. In complex cases, if the judicial committee is not sure of the Bi-
ble’s direction or the organization’s counsel, the hearing may be
adjourned and reconvened a few days later. However, an addi-
tional meeting should not be scheduled just to give the accused
time to stop the wrongdoing or to demonstrate works of repen-
tance. If he has demonstrated little or no repentance during the
initial hearing, there would generally be no basis on which to pro-
long the case and schedule a second meeting.
15. At times, complicated judicial cases may necessitate consultation
with an experienced elder in another congregation or the circuit
overseer. In such a situation, inform the wrongdoer that the de-
cision is pending. Do not inform him that you will be consulting
with parties outside of the judicial committee, which may at times
include the branch office. While pertinent details may be dis-
cussed, names should not be used when discussing the case with
another elder outside the congregation. However, when the cir-
cuit overseer is consulted or when circumstances require that the
branch office be contacted, the judicial committee should reveal
the names.
16. Those serving on a judicial committee should endeavor to be
unanimous in their decision. Any difference of opinion can usu-
ally be resolved by discussing matters thoroughly as a judicial
committee, researching the Scriptures and Christian publications,
praying for wisdom and direction, and even consulting with an
experienced elder outside the congregation. However, if the com-
mittee is unable to reach a unanimous conclusion, the minority
should give support to the decision reached by the majority.
17. Anything submitted in writing to the committee by the alleged
wrongdoer or by witnesses should be kept in strict confidence.
If it is necessary to continue the matter later, the members of
the committee should turn over to the chairman any personal
notes they have taken. The chairman will keep these notes in a
secure place to prevent breaches of confidentiality. The notes

may be returned to the committee members for consultation be-

fore the hearing resumes.
IF THE DECISION IS TO REPROVE

18. If the elders on the judicial committee determine that the wrong-
doer is genuinely repentant, they should inform him of the deci-
sion, the judicial restrictions, and whether the reproof will be an-
nounced to the congregation. They should also give reproof from
the Scriptures, showing the seriousness of the wrongdoing and
the minor sins that may have led up to it. Reproof is defined as
“that which is designed to convince others of their having erred,
in order to move them to acknowledge their mistakes and cor-
rect these.” (it-2 p. 780) Hence, judicial reproof includes more
than just making a decision and announcing it to the congrega-
tion. It involves reinforcing the wrongdoer’s resolve to do what is
right. In the Bible, the original-language word for reproof comes
from a verb meaning ‘to show plainly, point out by facts, dem-
onstrate, show by evident or convincing reasons or arguments.’
Helpful suggestions should be given to help him make needed
adjustments. If witnesses testified during the hearing, they may
be invited to hear the Scriptural reproof. In this way the wrong-
doer is reproved “before all onlookers.” (1 Tim. 5:20) The judicial
committee should pray with the repentant wrongdoer before con-
cluding the hearing. As soon as possible after the hearing, a brief
summary of the case should be prepared and signed by the ju-
dicial committee. (See 22:21-27.) The body of elders should be
updated on the results of the hearing, including what restrictions
will be imposed and whether any announcement will be made to
the congregation.
19. In all cases of judicial reproof, the wrongdoer is disqualified from
special privileges, such as pioneering or offering congregation
prayer, until he has made further spiritual progress. This also in-
cludes other congregation assignments that might be given to

those who are exemplary. In addition, some judicial restrictions

should be imposed by the judicial committee in all cases of judi-
cial reproof. Judicial restrictions may include not commenting at
congregation meetings and not presenting student assignments
on the midweek meeting. Such restrictions are removed gradu-
ally. When the elders inform a repentant wrongdoer of restric-
tions, it would be helpful to tell him the date of the next meeting,
at which time his progress will be reviewed. It may be discour-
aging to the repentant wrongdoer if restrictions are imposed for
a prolonged period of time. In most cases, the elders will remove
some or even all of these restrictions before many months have
passed.
20. The judicial committee determines whether the reproof will be an-
nounced to the congregation. Reproof should be announced in
the following situations:
(1) The sin is widely known or will likely become known
in the congregation or community. In such cases, an
announcement will safeguard the reputation of the
congregation. For example, in a case of adultery, an
innocent mate may lean toward forgiveness but is not
ready to resume sexual relations at the time that the
judicial committee concludes the case. (w16.08 p. 12
par. 15) If the possibility of a Scriptural divorce still
exists, an announcement would protect the reputation
of the congregation and that of the innocent mate.
(2) The judicial committee has specific reasons to believe
that the congregation needs to be on guard concerning
the repentant wrongdoer. For example, in a case
involving child sexual abuse, announcing the reproof of
a repentant wrongdoer will serve as a protection for
the congregation.—See 14:19.
21. The coordinator of the body of elders should approve the an-
nouncement before an elder reads it to the congregation at the

next midweek meeting. It should read as follows: “[Name of per-

son] has been reproved.” The announcement should be made in
only one congregation. Restrictions are not announced.
22. The judicial committee should monitor the spiritual progress of
the repentant wrongdoer and be alert to remove judicial re-
strictions progressively as he recovers spiritually. The committee
should use good judgment in determining if there is a need to
consult with other elders on the body before removing any re-
strictions. (Prov. 15:22) In all cases, the body of elders should
be informed when any restrictions are removed. (See 22:21-27.)
When an elder serving on the original committee moves or is no
longer serving as an elder, the body of elders will select a re-
placement to monitor the wrongdoer’s progress. If the wrongdo-
er moves before the committee lifts all of his restrictions, the new
congregation should receive sufficient details so that the elders
can evaluate his true spiritual condition. The elders should pro-
vide the type of information and details they would appreciate
receiving if the individual was moving into their congregation. (If
the wrongdoing involved child sexual abuse, see Chapter 14, para-
graphs 26-27.) The elders of the new congregation should choose
two or three elders to continue to monitor the wrongdoer’s prog-
ress and lift the remaining judicial restrictions.
23. In some cases the body of elders may feel that it is necessary
to warn the congregation about the type of wrongdoing by means
of a Scriptural talk. A member of the judicial committee should
generally give the talk. He should explain the wrongness of the
conduct and how to avoid it but without saying anything that
would connect the wrongdoer with the type of sin under discus-
sion. In the case of an announced reproof, the elders should wait
a few weeks before giving such a talk; when the reproof is not
announced to the congregation, there is no need to wait.
24. Generally, once a case has been concluded, no further judicial
action would be taken. However, as an exception, the case might

be reopened if within a few days of the decision new information

comes to light that strongly indicates that the wrongdoer was not
genuinely repentant. Perhaps he gave misleading testimony or
purposely omitted important facts during the hearing. If so, two
elders from the committee should contact the Service Depart-
ment for direction. If the committee is directed to reopen the
case, the individual would be informed of any new evidence and
would be allowed to present his side of the matter.
25. If the person again engages in serious wrongdoing after the ju-
dicial committee renders a decision and completes the case, the
body of elders should meet and select a new judicial commit-
tee. There may be advantages to assigning the same elders who
served on the original committee, if they are available and still
qualify.
IF THE DECISION IS TO DISFELLOWSHIP

26. If the wrongdoer lacks genuine repentance, he should be disfel-
lowshipped. The committee should inform him of this decision
and express their hope that he will change his ways and in time
qualify to return to Jehovah’s organization. (2 Cor. 2:6, 7; od
pp. 140-141; rj pp. 10-14) In a kind and positive way, the com-
mittee may read an appropriate concluding scripture such as Isa-
iah 1:18; 2 Corinthians 7:10, 11; or Hebrews 12:5-7, 11. In addi-
tion, the following information should be conveyed orally to the
person:
(1) Explain the need for repentance as well as what steps

he can take toward being reinstated in due time.
(2) Inform him that he may send a letter of appeal to

the judicial committee within seven days if he feels a
serious error in judgment has occurred. The judicial
committee should neither encourage nor discourage
him from doing so.

(3) Inform him that he may obtain a personal copy of

the magazines and other literature, including
special-request items, at the Kingdom Hall.
27. Before dismissing the person, the elders should ask if he has any
questions. After dismissing him, the judicial committee should
conclude with prayer. As soon as possible after the hearing, a
brief summary of the case should be prepared and signed by the
judicial committee and the Notification of Disfellowshipping or
Disassociation (S-77) form should be filled out, with the date of
the announcement left blank. (See 22:21-27.) The body of elders
should be informed of the committee’s decision.
28. If the unrepentant wrongdoer did not attend the judicial hearing,
the judicial committee should make reasonable efforts to inform
him orally of their decision, his option to appeal, and so forth.
The elders should not leave such confidential information on an
answering machine or voice mail or send it by way of e-mail, text
message, or other forms of electronic messaging. If he does not
cooperate with the efforts to inform him, two elders from the
committee should contact the Service Department before mak-
ing an announcement.
29. The seven-day appeal period should be allowed to elapse even
if the person states he does not wish to appeal. The coordinator
of the body of elders should approve the announcement before
an elder reads it to the congregation at the midweek meeting. It
should read as follows: “[Name of person] is no longer one of Je-
hovah’s Witnesses.”
30. Disfellowshipping takes effect at the time of making the an-

nouncement to the congregation. In the interim before the pub-
lic announcement, the wrongdoer should not be called on to com-
ment or offer prayers at congregation meetings or care for any
special privileges of service. The announcement should be made
in only one congregation.

31. The judicial committee should promptly inform the Service De-
partment of the disfellowshipping using the Notification of Dis-
fellowshipping or Disassociation form.—See 22:21-27.


CHAPTER SEVENTEEN
Appeal Hearings
Paragraphs
If the Appeal Committee Agrees With the
Judicial Committee .............................................................................................. 9-10
If the Appeal Committee Disagrees With the
Judicial Committee ............................................................................................. 11-15
1. If the judicial committee receives a letter of appeal within seven

days from the date the wrongdoer was notified of the decision
to disfellowship, the chairman should promptly call the circuit
overseer, who will arrange for an appeal committee. (If a person
appeals after the seven days, immediately call the Service De-
partment for direction.) Arrangements are made for an appeal
hearing even if there seems to be no valid basis for an appeal.
The circuit overseer will select qualified elders to rehear the case.
If possible, he will select brothers from a different congregation
or congregations. Those selected should be impartial and should
not be close relatives of or have a special relationship with any
of the elders on the judicial committee or anyone else involved
in the case.
2. The chairman of the judicial committee will make the Notification
of Disfellowshipping or Disassociation (S-77) form and all other
related material on the case available to the appeal committee.
The committee should make every effort to conduct the appeal
hearing within one week after the letter of appeal was received.
—od pp. 140-141.
3. The appeal committee should avoid giving the impression that
they are critical of the judicial committee. They must remem-
ber that the provision for an appeal does not indicate a lack of

APPEAL HEARINGS
confidence in the judicial committee. Rather, it is a kindness to

the wrongdoer and ensures a fair hearing that takes into consid-
eration all of the pertinent facts. The appeal committee should
keep in mind that the judicial committee likely has more insight
and experience regarding the accused.
4. Generally, there is no arrangement to hold an appeal hearing out-
side the circuit where the judicial hearing took place. Thus, if the
accused has moved, he must be willing to travel back to the area
so that the judicial committee can be present for the appeal hear-
ing. Any exception must be approved by the Service Department.
If the accused deliberately fails to appear at the appeal hearing,
the disfellowshipping should be announced at a midweek meet-
ing after reasonable efforts have been made to contact him.—See
16:28-29.
5. The appeal committee first meets to read the written material on
the case. This meeting should be opened with prayer. Thereafter,
the appeal committee should meet with the judicial committee.
Sometime later, but preferably on the same day, the appeal com-
mittee should meet with the accused and the judicial committee
together. The judicial committee has already judged him unrepen-
tant, so the appeal committee will not pray in his presence.
6. The appeal hearing is conducted in a manner similar to the judi-
cial hearing. It may be necessary to rehear all the evidence rel-
evant to the case, including that which was presented originally
and any new evidence now available. For instance, if the accused
continues to assert that he is innocent, the witnesses should
again give their testimony in his presence, he should be given
opportunity to respond, and the appeal committee should hear
any additional witnesses he wishes to present to prove his inno-
cence. If the judicial committee or the accused believes that ear-
lier testimony or evidence is being changed, this can be stated
following the presentation of evidence that was allegedly altered.
—See 16:2-3.

APPEAL HEARINGS
7. After gathering the facts, the appeal committee should deliber-

ate in private. They should consider the answers to two questions:
(1) Was it established that the accused committed a
disfellowshipping offense?—See 12:2, 40-42.
(2) Did the accused demonstrate repentance
commensurate with the gravity of his wrongdoing at
the time of the hearing with the judicial committee?
8. The appeal committee may find that while the original basis for
disfellowshipping was invalid, other valid grounds for disfellow-
shipping exist. If so, the appeal committee should give the indi-
vidual sufficient time, even several days if needed, to present any
evidence or witnesses that he feels will disprove the new allega-
tions. If the new allegations are established and if the person
does not demonstrate genuine repentance, the appeal commit-
tee may decide to uphold the disfellowshipping on these new
grounds. If the members of the original committee agree with the
new grounds, they should adjust the Notification of Disfellow-
shipping or Disassociation form, allow seven days to pass before
arranging for the disfellowshipping to be announced at the next
midweek meeting, and then submit the form to the Service De-
partment. As soon as possible after the hearing, a brief summa-
ry of the case should be prepared and signed by the appeal com-
mittee.—See 22:21-27.
IF THE APPEAL COMMITTEE AGREES WITH THE

JUDICIAL COMMITTEE
9. If the members of the appeal committee agree with the judicial
committee, they should inform the wrongdoer of the final deci-
sion in the presence of the judicial committee. The judicial com-
mittee should allow seven days to pass before arranging for the
disfellowshipping to be announced at the next midweek meeting.
The judicial committee should submit the completed Notification

APPEAL HEARINGS
of Disfellowshipping or Disassociation (S-77) form to the Service

Department.—See 22:21-27.
10. The appeal committee should not initiate discussion of a further
appeal. However, if the individual persists in believing a serious
error in judgment has occurred, the appeal committee should in-
form him that he may express his concern in a letter within sev-
en days. If he indicates a desire to submit a letter of appeal, the
announcement of disfellowshipping should be delayed. The ap-
peal committee should submit to the Service Department a brief
summary of the case, the judicial committee’s summary, and the
individual’s letter. No announcement should be made until a re-
ply is received from the Service Department. The body of elders
should be updated on the results of the appeal hearing.—See
22:21-27.
IF THE APPEAL COMMITTEE DISAGREES WITH

THE JUDICIAL COMMITTEE
11. If the appeal committee feels that the decision to disfellowship
the individual was made in error, the appeal committee should
meet privately with the judicial committee to discuss matters and
explain the reason for disagreeing.
12. If the judicial committee agrees not to disfellowship the individu-
al, the appeal committee should inform him of the final decision
in the presence of the judicial committee. The body of elders
should be updated on the results of the appeal hearing.—See
22:21-27.
13. If the judicial committee does not agree with the conclusions of
the appeal committee and still believes that the individual should
be disfellowshipped, he should be invited back into the room, and
the appeal committee should inform him that further consider-
ation will be needed. He can be assured that the case will be con-
cluded as soon as possible. Neither the judicial committee nor

APPEAL HEARINGS
the appeal committee should give any indication of their differ-

ing decisions to the individual. After he is dismissed, the hearing
can be concluded with prayer.
14. The judicial committee should promptly compose a letter clearly
expressing its reasons for disagreement and give this to the ap-
peal committee. Likewise, the appeal committee should prompt-
ly compose a letter explaining the reasons for its decision. The
appeal committee should send both letters and the Notification
of Disfellowshipping or Disassociation (S-77) form to the Service
Department. The branch office will thereafter provide written di-
rection to assist both committees with bringing the case to a con-
clusion.
15. After the two committees have considered the observations of
the branch office and made a final decision, the original commit-
tee should inform the person involved. The body of elders should
be updated on the final decision. If the decision is to disfellow-
ship, an announcement should be made at the next midweek
meeting and the Service Department should be informed of the
date of the announcement.

APPEAL HEARINGS

CHAPTER EIGHTEEN
Disassociations
1. Whereas disfellowshipping is an action taken by a judicial com-
mittee against an unrepentant wrongdoer, disassociation is an
action taken by a baptized member of the congregation who no
longer desires to be one of Jehovah’s Witnesses. (1 John 2:19;
od pp. 142-143) In cases of disassociation, the body of elders
should appoint a committee (not judicial) of three elders to con-
sider the facts.
2. A judicial committee should discontinue its handling of a case as
a judicial offense if the accused person makes known his deci-
sion to disassociate himself. However, at no time should the el-
ders ask the accused if he desires to disassociate himself. If the
elders are handling a particularly difficult case and there is a
question about whether the person has disassociated himself, it
would be best for the committee to contact the Service Depart-
ment for further direction. If an individual is determined to dis-
associate himself, then the committee ought to prepare a sum-
mary of the alleged offense(s) and the evidence of such. This
would be kept along with information regarding the disassocia-
tion. If the person later requests reinstatement, these matters
would need to be considered with him at that time.—See 22:21-27.
3. Actions that may indicate disassociation include the following:
(1) Making Known a Firm Decision to Be Known No
Longer as One of Jehovah’s Witnesses: If the
individual agrees to meet, a committee (not judicial)
should first try to speak with him and provide spiritual
assistance. (Gal. 6:1) Does he really desire to resign
from being one of Jehovah’s Witnesses, or does he
simply no longer want to associate actively with the
congregation? Is the desire to disassociate prompted
by doubts or discouragement? If he is adamant in his

DISASSOCIATIONS
decision that he no longer be considered one of

Jehovah’s Witnesses, he should be asked to put this in
writing and sign it. If he does not, then the witnesses
to his oral statement should prepare a brief report for
the confidential files and sign it.
(2) Joining Another Religious Organization and Making
Known His Intention to Remain With It: If it is learned
that a person has taken up association with another
religion or religious organization and thus is identified
with it, a committee (not judicial) should be selected to
investigate the matter and endeavor to provide spiritual
assistance. If the individual has joined another religion
or religious organization and intends to remain with it,
he has disassociated himself.
(3) Willingly and Unrepentantly Accepting Blood: If
someone willingly accepts a blood transfusion, perhaps
because of being under extreme pressure, a committee
(not judicial) should obtain the facts and determine the
individual’s attitude. If he is repentant, the committee
would provide spiritual assistance in the spirit of
Galatians 6:1 and Jude 22, 23. Since he is spiritually
weak, he would not qualify for special privileges for a
period of time. In some cases, it may also be necessary
to remove other privileges, such as commenting at
congregation meetings and presenting student
assignments on the midweek meeting. Depending on
the circumstances, the committee may also need to
arrange for an announcement to the congregation at a
midweek meeting: “The elders have handled a matter
having to do with [name of person]. You will be glad to
know that spiritual shepherds are endeavoring to
render assistance.” On the other hand, if the elders on
the committee determine that he is unrepentant, they
should announce his disassociation.

DISASSOCIATIONS
(4) Taking a Course That Violates Christian Neutrality:

(Isa. 2:4; John 15:17-19; lvs pp. 60-63, 244) If he joins
a nonneutral organization, he has disassociated
himself. If his employment makes him a clear
accomplice in nonneutral activities, he should generally
be allowed six months to make an adjustment. If he
does not, he has disassociated himself.—See lvs
pp. 204-206.
4. As soon as possible after the hearing, a brief summary of the
case should be prepared and signed by the committee and the
Notification of Disfellowshipping or Disassociation (S-77) form
should be filled out and submitted to the Service Department.
(See 22:21-27.) The body of elders should be informed of the dis-
association.
nouncement before an elder reads it to the congregation. It
should read as follows: “[Name of person] is no longer one of Je-
hovah’s Witnesses.”
6. Since disassociation is an action taken by the publisher rather
than the committee, there is no arrangement for an appeal. There-
fore, the announcement of disassociation can be made at the
next midweek meeting without waiting seven days.

DISASSOCIATIONS

CHAPTER NINETEEN
Reinstatements
Paragraphs
Handling Requests for Reinstatement ................................................... 1-4
Procedure for Reinstatement Hearing ................................................... 5-8
If the Decision Is Not to Reinstate ................................................................ 9
If the Decision Is to Reinstate ................................................................ 10-12
Communication Between Committees .............................................. 13-16
HANDLING REQUESTS FOR REINSTATEMENT

1. A disfellowshipped person or one who has disassociated himself
from the congregation may be reinstated when he gives clear ev-
idence of repentance and over a reasonable period of time dem-
onstrates that he has abandoned his sinful course. (od pp. 143-
144) When the body of elders receives a letter requesting rein-
statement, the request should be handled promptly. Although the
following direction refers to pleas for reinstatement from a dis-
fellowshipped individual, it applies equally to one who has disas-
sociated himself.
2. The body of elders should meet to determine who will serve on
the reinstatement committee. If the elders who served on the
original committee are available and qualified, they usually serve
on the reinstatement committee. Otherwise, the elders should
choose replacements.—See 15:1-3.
3. If the person requesting reinstatement was disfellowshipped for
child sexual abuse, see Chapter 14, paragraphs 20-21.
4. Even if the committee feels that it is much too soon to con-
sider reinstatement, two members of the committee should

REINSTATEMENTS
acknowledge receipt of the request and briefly inform the person

that more time must pass.
PROCEDURE FOR REINSTATEMENT HEARING

5. After offering prayer without the person present, the committee
will invite the disfellowshipped or disassociated person into the
room. The committee should endeavor to put him at ease, com-
mending him for his progress and desire to be reinstated. In im-
itation of Jehovah, the elders will convey their desire to be help-
ful and will treat the person with tenderness. (Isa. 1:18; Acts 3:
19; rj pp. 10-11) They must listen patiently and not draw conclu-
sions before they have heard all the evidence. The chairman in-
vites the person to make a personal statement. The committee
should seek to determine what his conduct was during the time
that he was disfellowshipped or disassociated and should ascer-
tain his attitude. The person is then excused from the room while
the committee deliberates.
6. The committee should be careful to allow sufficient time, perhaps
many months, a year, or even longer, for a disfellowshipped or
disassociated person to demonstrate that he is genuinely repen-
tant. (See 16:6-17.) The committee should be especially cautious
in some cases. For instance, the wrongdoer may have been de-
ceptive, may have secretly practiced wrongdoing over a long pe-
riod of time, or may have been repeatedly dealt with judicially in
the past for the same or other wrongdoing. If such a person is
reinstated quickly, others may be emboldened to commit serious
sin, as they may feel that the discipline will be light. Where there
is evidence of conspiracy between individuals to put away their
mates and marry each other, considerable time should elapse for
them to demonstrate sufficient repentance before they qualify for
reinstatement.—w83 3/15 p. 29.
7. The reinstatement committee needs to be balanced. Genuine re-
pentance and a turning away from the wrong course—not the at-

REINSTATEMENTS
titude of others or merely the time elapsed—are the chief de-

termining factors in deciding when a person may be reinstated.
—1 Cor. 5:1, 11-13; 2 Cor. 2:6, 7; 7:10, 11.
8. The committee should guard against going to extremes by exact-

ing a point-by-point admission of sins that may not have been
clearly proved. Rather, the committee should consider the over-
all pattern of the wrongdoer’s life. Does it now show that he is
repentant?
IF THE DECISION IS NOT TO REINSTATE

9. If it is determined that the individual should not be reinstated,
the committee should explain to the individual its reasons and
what he needs to do in the future to qualify for reinstatement.
After he is dismissed, the committee will conclude with prayer.
The body of elders should be updated on the result of the meet-
ing.—See 22:21-27.
IF THE DECISION IS TO REINSTATE

10. If the decision is to reinstate, the person can be invited back into
the room and informed. At that time Scriptural encouragement
and counsel should be given to help him continue to make spir-
itual progress. Until the reinstatement is announced, he should
continue to conduct himself as a disfellowshipped person. The
committee will conclude with prayer with the individual present.
After the announcement is made, the chairman of the commit-
tee should write the date of the announcement of reinstatement
on the congregation’s copy of the Notification of Disfellowship-
ping or Disassociation (S-77) form. He should then send a mes-
sage to the Service Department including the person’s (1) full
name, (2) date of birth, and (3) date of baptism, along with
(4) the date of the announcement of reinstatement. (The same
information should be provided by a member of the committee

REINSTATEMENTS
if a disfellowshipped or disassociated person dies, except that the

date of death should be provided rather than the date of the
announcement of reinstatement.) If the reinstatement involves
someone who was accused of child sexual abuse, established or
not, see Chapter 14, paragraphs 20-21. The body of elders should
be updated on the result of the meeting.—See 22:21-27.
11. In all cases of reinstatement, judicial restrictions are imposed.

Thus, the wrongdoer may be helped to make “straight paths” for
his feet thereafter. (Heb. 12:13) The privilege of sharing in the
field ministry is restored when the individual is reinstated. Other
privileges, such as commenting at meetings and presenting stu-
dent assignments on the midweek meeting, are restored gradu-
ally when it is determined that the individual has progressed spir-
itually to the point that he is qualified and when it is judged by
the committee that the extending of such privileges will not be
offensive to the congregation. When a person is reinstated, he
will still need much spiritual assistance. The committee should
continue to monitor the person’s spiritual progress. It may be dis-
couraging to the repentant wrongdoer if restrictions are imposed
for a prolonged period of time. Therefore, when informing a re-
pentant wrongdoer of restrictions, it would be helpful for the com-
mittee to inform him of the date for the next meeting when his
progress will be reviewed. The committee may also arrange for a
Bible study to be conducted, if needed, which would be reported
as field service. In most cases, the elders will remove some or
even all of these restrictions before many months have passed.
nouncement before an elder reads it to the congregation at the
next midweek meeting. The announcement should read as fol-
lows: “[Name of person] is reinstated as one of Jehovah’s Wit-
nesses.” There may be spontaneous, dignified applause when the
announcement is made. (Luke 15:7) Judicial restrictions should
not be announced.

REINSTATEMENTS
COMMUNICATION BETWEEN COMMITTEES

13. The final decision to reinstate a disfellowshipped or disassociat-
ed person is always made by a reinstatement committee of the
congregation that originally handled the matter. Therefore, if the
person requesting reinstatement has moved, the body of elders
in the congregation where he now attends meetings will appoint
a local reinstatement committee to hear his request. If the mem-
bers of the local reinstatement committee believe he should be
reinstated, they will forward their recommendation to the body
of elders in the congregation that originally handled the matter.
The local reinstatement committee should not let the person know
what recommendation they will make to the original committee,
since the original committee may not agree. If the person be-
comes aware of a lack of unity between the committees, he may
lose respect for the original committee. Thus, the local reinstate-
ment committee should tell him that they must first correspond
with the elders in the congregation that originally handled the
matter and that he will be informed of the decision in due course.
14. The local reinstatement committee should not pressure the orig-
inal committee to reinstate the person. Those elders may be aware
of important factors not apparent to the local reinstatement com-
mittee, so it is usually best to respect their judgment. Likewise,
the original committee should carefully consider the recommen-
dation of the local reinstatement committee. Sufficient time may
have passed, and the individual may have made drastic chang-
es. The original committee should keep in mind that the elders
making the recommendation have met the individual and have
had opportunity to observe his conduct. If the original commit-
tee decides to reinstate, the announcement is made in both con-
gregations. (See 19:12.) The committee where he attends will su-
pervise the gradual removal of restrictions.
15. If the two congregations are reasonably close to each other, the
original committee should promptly arrange to meet with the

REINSTATEMENTS
individual after receiving a positive recommendation from the lo-

cal reinstatement committee.
16. If the elders on the original committee disagree with the recom-
mendation to reinstate, they should clearly explain their reasons
to the local reinstatement committee.

CHAPTER TWENTY
Meetings
Paragraphs
Public Speakers .......................................................................................................... 1-5
Assignments ............................................................................................................. 1-2
Reading Scriptures .................................................................................................. 3
Symposiums ................................................................................................................. 4
Hospitality and Travel Expenses ................................................................... 5
Memorial and Special Talk ............................................................................. 6-12
Selecting a Memorial Speaker ....................................................................... 6
Selecting Brothers to Offer Prayers at the Memorial ................. 7
Memorial Meeting Times ..................................................................................... 8
Congregation Meetings the Week of the Memorial ...................... 9
Recordings on JW Stream ............................................................................. 10
Inactive Ones ............................................................................................................. 11
Chairman and Announcements ................................................................. 12
Announcements ............................................................................................................ 13
Local Needs Parts ............................................................................................... 14-15
Assemblies ........................................................................................................................ 16
Conventions ..................................................................................................................... 17
Watchtower Study ...................................................................................................... 18
Congregation Bible Study ................................................................................... 19
Visual Aids ....................................................................................................................... 20
Songs and Videos ............................................................................................... 21-23
Meeting Conferencing Systems ...................................................................... 24
JW Stream ................................................................................................................ 25-27
Sign Language ...................................................................................................... 28-36
Seating Area ..................................................................................................... 28-29
Use of Natural Sign Language .......................................................... 30-31

MEETINGS
Interpreter Attire ............................................................................................ 32-34

Songs .............................................................................................................................. 35
Audio ............................................................................................................................... 36
Disruptive Individuals ...................................................................................... 37-38
Transportation for Disfellowshipped
or Disassociated Individuals ............................................................................ 39
PUBLIC SPEAKERS
1. Assignments: It is essential that only qualified elders and minis-
terial servants who are approved by the body of elders be as-
signed to give public talks. Visiting speakers should be well rec-
ommended by the body of elders in their own congregation. It is
preferable that visiting speakers be elders. However, well-qualified
ministerial servants may also be assigned. (See 1:2.9.) General-
ly, requests for speakers should be through the public talk coor-
dinator. (See 1:2.7; 3:3.18.) A list of approved speakers and the
talks they have prepared should be provided to other congrega-
tions. Speakers and talks should be chosen from this list. Since
the number of approved speakers varies from congregation to
congregation, it is not always necessary that an equal number
of speakers be exchanged.
2. At times, the body of elders may feel that a local speaker should
be assigned an outline on a particular subject in view of the needs
of the congregation. Otherwise, speakers may choose which out-
lines they wish to prepare. (See Public Talk Titles [S-99] and
Public Talk Titles-Listed by Subject [S-99a].) It is preferred that
speakers not be assigned to be away from their own congrega-
tion more than once a month.
3. Reading Scriptures: Scriptures should be read by the speaker
rather than requesting a volunteer from the audience. The New
World Translation should be used, if available. There may be oc-

MEETINGS
casions when the speaker may choose to read from the New
World Translation and thereafter briefly mention the way that an-
other translation renders a phrase or verse.
4. Symposiums: The body of elders determines whether it would be
beneficial for an inexperienced public speaker to be assigned the
first 15 minutes of a talk and for a more experienced speaker to
be assigned the remaining 15 minutes.
5. Hospitality and Travel Expenses: The body of elders should take
the lead in extending hospitality to visiting speakers by asking to
cover their travel expenses and by offering them a meal. (Rom.
12:13) Since circumstances vary widely, it is up to the body of el-
ders to decide how this should be handled locally. Congregation
funds may be used to cover travel expenses for visiting speak-
ers. (See Instructions for Congregation Accounting [S-27].) How-
ever, congregation funds should not be used to cover expenses
for other forms of hospitality, such as entertaining or providing
meals.
MEMORIAL AND SPECIAL TALK

6. Selecting a Memorial Speaker: The body of elders should care-
fully select a speaker who can present the information in a way
that will be clear and understandable to all in attendance, includ-
ing those who may be present for the first time. The elders should
not simply take turns giving this talk each year. A capable anoint-
ed elder should be considered if he is not limited by age, health,
or other factors. However, it is not necessary for him to be cho-
sen every year. In this way, the audience can benefit from the
good teaching of other capable brothers. The primary concern of
the elders when selecting a speaker should be the quality of the
talk.
7. Selecting Brothers to Offer Prayers at the Memorial: The
body of elders should select qualified brothers to offer brief but
meaningful prayers over the emblems. Those who represent the

MEETINGS
congregation in prayer should be mature baptized Christians who

are known as good examples and who have the respect of the
congregation. A capable, qualified, anointed brother should be
considered for this privilege if he is not limited by age, health, or
other factors. However, the body of elders may have reason to
select other qualified brothers to offer the prayers. If an anoint-
ed brother gives the talk, it is not necessary for him to offer the
prayers over the bread and wine, but he may be asked to offer
the final prayer.
8. Memorial Meeting Times: The body of elders decides when the

Memorial talk should begin. If more than one congregation will
be using a facility, the bodies of elders should cooperate in de-
termining the start time. Although the Memorial talk may begin
before sundown, the emblems should not be passed until after
sundown. If more than one observance will be held at the same
facility, at least 40 minutes between the programs, where possi-
ble, should be allotted for those attending to enter and leave.
Keep in mind that the overall program is about an hour, includ-
ing the songs, the prayers, the passing of the emblems, and the
chairman’s comments.
9. Congregation Meetings the Week of the Memorial: When the
Memorial falls on a weekday, no midweek meeting will be sched-
uled. When the Memorial falls on a weekend, no weekend meet-
ing will be scheduled.
10. Recordings on JW Stream: About one month before the Memo-
rial, a prerecorded Memorial talk will be made available on JW
Stream for the benefit of those congregations, groups, and pre-
groups that have very few qualified speakers. The section of the
outline entitled “Observing the Memorial of Christ’s Death To-
night” will be omitted from the recording. The local chairman or
another brother should handle this section of the talk, during
which 1 Corinthians 11:23-25 will be read, the prayers will be of-
fered, and the emblems will be passed. Thereafter, the audience

MEETINGS
should watch the concluding section of the recording. About one

month prior to the special talk, a prerecorded special talk will
also be made available on JW Stream. If possible, backup speak-
ers should be assigned in case of technical problems with the re-
cordings of the Memorial and the special talk.
11. Inactive Ones: For direction regarding assisting inactive ones
during the Memorial season, see Chapter 25, paragraph 15.
12. Chairman and Announcements: In connection with the Memori-
al observance, the chairman should start the meeting in the usu-
al way and then introduce the speaker. After the talk, the chair-
man should read the announcement provided and then announce
the concluding song. In most cases, he will call on the speaker
to offer the closing prayer. Following the delivery of the special
talk, the chairman should read the announcement provided.
ANNOUNCEMENTS
13. The coordinator of the body of elders reviews and approves all
announcements made to the congregation.—See Instructions for
Our Christian Life and Ministry Meeting (S-38).
LOCAL NEEDS PARTS

14. The body of elders decides the subjects of local needs parts, the
elders who will present them, and when they will be presented.
The subjects considered may include areas in which the congre-
gation as a whole needs encouragement, commendation, or coun-
sel. (Prov. 27:23) The part should provide sound and loving Scrip-
tural instruction.—See 20:16-17.
15. The body of elders should not invite Hospital Liaison Committee
members or medical professionals to present or to share in a lo-
cal needs part, such as regarding filling out the durable power
of attorney (DPA) card or some related matter. Likewise, they

MEETINGS
should not arrange for such individuals to present special talks

or programs at Kingdom Halls or other locations for this purpose.
ASSEMBLIES
16. Two to three months prior to each assembly, the elders should
begin reminding the congregation of the upcoming assembly. The
week before the assembly, the Life and Ministry Meeting chair-
man should briefly highlight the theme of the assembly and key
talks while displaying the program on the video monitors. All in
the congregation should be encouraged to download the pro-
gram from jw.org and to bring the appropriate copy of The Watch-
tower to the assembly. Additionally, all should be encouraged to
arrive on time and to be in their seats when the musical prelude
begins. The elders may decide whether to use a local needs part
a month or two following the assembly to review the program by
means of an audience discussion, highlighting points that relate
to the ministry.
CONVENTIONS
17. Two to three months prior to the convention, the elders should
begin reminding the congregation of the upcoming convention.
During a local needs part prior to the start of the congregation’s
convention invitation campaign, the Convention Reminders vid-
eo should be played. Thereafter, local arrangements for the cam-
paign, which starts three weeks before the convention, should be
outlined. The theme of the convention and key talks should be
highlighted while the program is displayed on the video monitors.
All in the congregation should be encouraged to download the
program from jw.org and to bring the appropriate copy of The
Watchtower to the convention. During a local needs part a month
or two following the convention, the convention excerpts vid-
eo, which will be available to elders on jw.org, should be played.

MEETINGS
By means of an audience discussion, highlights of the program

should be reviewed, particularly those that relate to the ministry.
WATCHTOWER STUDY
18. See Chapter 6.
CONGREGATION BIBLE STUDY

19. The guidelines in Chapter 6 regarding conducting the Watchtower
Study also apply to conducting the Congregation Bible Study.
—See also Instructions for Our Christian Life and Ministry Meet-
ing (S-38).
VISUAL AIDS
20. At congregation meetings, speakers should not project any mov-
ing video footage on screens or monitors unless directed to do so
by the organization. (As an exception, speakers at sign-language
meetings may make judicious use of video footage as a visual
teaching aid for the special needs of deaf audiences.) However,
speakers may display still pictures, graphics, or artwork. Speakers
should not contact the branch office to request pictures, graph-
ics, or artwork for use in their presentations. Speakers may show
the text of selected scriptures on the monitors if this is done
sparingly. However, it would not be appropriate to display the text
of each scripture used.
SONGS AND VIDEOS

21. It is recommended that video files be downloaded to JW Library
for playback rather than being streamed from jw.org. (See Me-
dia Playback Using JW Library [S-144].) The body of elders should
assign a brother the responsibility of downloading any videos that
are to be viewed during the meeting each week.

MEETINGS
22. Kingdom songs should be played before and after congregation

meetings. Such music should not be allowed to drown out or
overshadow the interchange of encouragement that comes from
Christian association and theocratic conversation. When songs
are played for singing, they should not be played so softly that
it is difficult to sing in a heartfelt manner or so loudly that they
overpower the voices of those singing.
23. For direction regarding songs used by foreign-language groups,
see Chapter 24, paragraph 21.
MEETING CONFERENCING SYSTEMS

24. Congregations may use conferencing systems or recordings of lo-
cal meetings for the benefit of isolated or homebound publish-
ers and those who otherwise are unable to attend in person. The
body of elders decides what technology the congregation will
use in this regard, such as telephone (audio) conferencing, vid-
eo streaming, audio recordings, or video recordings. If the tech-
nology will be shared by multiple congregations in the same fa-
cility, the decision will be made by the combined bodies of elders.
The arrangements should be in accord with the following guide-
lines:
(1) Congregation meetings should not be made available
to a wide audience on the Internet. Neither should
recordings of congregation meetings be distributed
indiscriminately. However, it is not necessary to
monitor who has access to congregation meetings.
(2) A conferencing system should not distract from or
interfere with the quality of the meeting. Some systems
allow for two-way conversation, making it possible for
those on the tie-line to offer comments. Those
commenting from a remote location should ensure that
private conversations or sounds of other activities are
not heard by other listeners.

MEETINGS
(3) Attendants should record as meeting attenders the

number of those tied in to the live meeting. Those
benefiting from delayed streaming or recordings would
not be counted.
JW STREAM
25. Congregations having very few brothers qualified to handle meet-
ing parts may request approval from the circuit overseer to view
recorded meetings or portions of meetings, preferably using JW
Stream. (See Access to Programs on JW Stream by Elders and
Ministerial Servants [S-142].) The direction in Chapter 24, para-
graphs 17-18, may be applied in these instances.
26. If a congregation does not have arrangements to record congre-
gation meetings or to tie individuals in to congregation meetings
using a conferencing system, the elders may provide publishers
with access to recordings on JW Stream. (See Access to Pro-
grams on JW Stream by E-mail Invitation [S-143].) This provision
is for the benefit of the elderly, the infirm, and those who are
otherwise unable to attend in person. Additionally, a publisher
may not understand the language spoken in the local congrega-
tion. He could be allowed to make use of the recordings of meet-
ings conducted in his mother tongue while continuing to asso-
ciate with the local congregation.
27. Many of our brothers and sisters have circumstances that limit
their ability to attend an assembly or convention. In other in-
stances, a publisher may desire to attend an assembly or con-
vention that is held in his mother tongue but does not have the
means to do so. For such ones, video recordings of the current
circuit assembly and convention program in many languages are
made available on JW Stream. A publisher who is invited to ac-
cess an assembly or convention program on JW Stream should
be instructed not to share the program with anyone else. Ad-
ditionally, the publisher should not view the program until his

MEETINGS
congregation attends the event.—See Chapter 24, paragraph 27,

for direction on the use of JW Stream by foreign-language con-
gregations, groups, and pregroups.
SIGN LANGUAGE
28. Seating Area: If sign-language interpretation is required for con-
gregation meetings, all deaf attendees should be seated in an
area where they will be able to see the interpreter and the main
stage in the same line of sight without visual distractions. This
is usually at the front of the Kingdom Hall, perhaps on one side.
(w09 11/15 pp. 30-32) The seating area should give priority to
those dependent on sign language along with their families.
29. Tactile interpreting may be arranged for deaf-blind attendees.
Their interpreters need to be located where they can clearly see
the main signer without obstruction. Deaf brothers and sisters
often do well at tactile interpreting.
30. Use of Natural Sign Language: In many countries, sign language
is used in two major ways. One form uses signs as a word-for-
word transliteration of the spoken language. The other form is
generally known as natural sign language. It is the form most
commonly used by the deaf in their daily conversations. It func-
tions separately from the spoken language and has a different
grammar. It tends to put more emphasis on the use of space, fa-
cial expressions, and the inflecting of signing motions in order to
achieve various shades of meaning. Even though preference for
either of these two forms of sign language will vary depending
on the deaf individual, the majority of deaf people converse in
natural sign language and, therefore, understand it best. Thus,
where possible, the most proficient signers in the natural sign lan-
guage should be used for interpreting.
31. Interpreters need to understand the interpreting process. This
does not mean merely matching a sign to a word while following

MEETINGS
the word order of the spoken language. Interpreting requires com-

prehension of thoughts. Thus, interpreters should concentrate on
what is being said from the platform and endeavor to convey
such thoughts clearly, accurately, and completely while keeping
up with the speaker. Usually a word-for-word translation fails to
convey the speaker’s thoughts faithfully. Therefore, having many
years of experience is not the only qualifying factor; one must
have learned the interpreting process.
32. Interpreter Attire: The interpreter’s appearance should be exem-

plary, measuring up to the standards set for program participants
on the main stage. No distracting jewelry, watches, or clothing
should be worn, and long and brightly painted fingernails should
be avoided. Solid-colored clothing that contrasts with the inter-
preter’s skin tone should be worn. This will help eliminate distrac-
tions caused by busy patterns in the clothing. Also, clothing that
clings to the body should be avoided.
33. A sister’s use of a head covering in some circumstances is not

necessary, since all in attendance should be able to appreciate
that she is not actually conducting the meeting. This would be
the case, for example, when she interprets comments from the
audience, student assignments presented by sisters, or demon-
strations. However, if a well-qualified sister must be used to in-
terpret talks given by brothers, prayers, or songs, she should wear
a modest and appropriate head covering as a sign of submis-
sion to the theocratic arrangement in the Christian congregation.
—1 Tim. 2:11, 12; w09 11/15 pp. 12-13.
34. An exception to this direction can be made for a sister doing tac-
tile interpreting for one who is both deaf and blind. Such a sis-
ter would be seated in the audience, signing into the palm of just
one individual. Since she would not be situated prominently as
would an interpreter for those who are deaf only, she would not
need to use a head covering in this instance.

MEETINGS
35. Songs: When the program calls for a song that is not available
in a particular sign language, an alternate song that shares a
similar theme or sentiment should be carefully chosen. Attention
should be given to the timing of the alternate song so that it
does not unduly delay the program. If no songs in the appropri-
ate sign language are available, the group should sign the sched-
uled song through an interpreter, preferably a brother.
36. Audio: The audio track of sign-language videos should be made
audible at the meetings held by sign-language pregroups, groups,
and congregations and at sign-language assemblies and conven-
tions. Such a provision allows hearing members of a deaf pub-
lisher’s family in attendance to benefit spiritually from the video.
DISRUPTIVE INDIVIDUALS
37. It is best to ignore trivial or minor disturbances created by indi-
viduals. However, if someone persists in this course of action and
is distracting others, he should be asked to leave. If the disrup-
tive individual refuses to leave, he should be informed that if he
does not leave and continues to distract others, the police will
be contacted. If the individual does not cooperate, the police
should be called. When the police arrive, inform them that the in-
dividual is causing a disturbance and that his implied invitation
to attend the meeting has been revoked. The police may also be
informed that we are willing to file trespassing charges if it seems
prudent and necessary under the circumstances.
38. Generally, the elders should not try forcibly to remove a disrup-
tive individual from the Kingdom Hall. If the individual is violent
from the outset, the police can be called immediately; there is no
need to warn the individual. In the event that a Christian is phys-
ically attacked, he has the right to defend himself from harm and
the elders should do what they reasonably can to help protect
him. Of course, he may be able to flee from the assailant, and
that would be preferable. However, if it is not possible to flee, the

MEETINGS
Christian may try to ward off such attacks and even strike out
in defense if necessary. Of course, any such defensive action
would solely be to protect himself or others from the attacker un-
til the police arrive.—g 6/08 p. 11; g87 11/22 p. 28.
TRANSPORTATION FOR DISFELLOWSHIPPED

OR DISASSOCIATED INDIVIDUALS
39. Disfellowshipped and disassociated ones are generally expected
to make their own arrangements for transportation to and from
congregation meetings. However, in some instances a disfellow-
shipped or disassociated individual who is making a determined
effort to regain a right standing with Jehovah may be in a situ-
ation that prevents him from obtaining transportation. It may be
that he has no car and that family members or others are not
able to help him. Perhaps he cannot afford public transportation
or it is not available in his area. It may be that the distance in-
volved, personal safety, or severe weather make it inadvisable to
walk. In cases of real need, the elders can determine wheth-
er some assistance may be provided. Such assistance would be
viewed as similar to public transportation in that there should be
no conversing with the disfellowshipped or disassociated person.
(2 John 10, 11) The elders should monitor the situation to make
sure that any arrangements made are not abused.

MEETINGS

CHAPTER TWENTY-ONE
Kingdom Halls
Paragraphs
Ownership ....................................................................................................................... 2-3
Rented Facilities ............................................................................................................. 4
Cleaning ............................................................................................................................ 5-7
Cleaning Coordinator ............................................................................................ 7
Maintenance and Repair .................................................................................. 8-14
Maintenance Coordinator ............................................................................... 14
Kingdom Hall Operating Committee .................................................. 15-20
Expenses ............................................................................................................................. 21
Upgrades and Minor Renovation .................................................................. 22
Major Renovation and New Construction ..................................... 23-24
Inspections ....................................................................................................................... 25
Security ............................................................................................................................... 26
Safety ............................................................................................................................ 27-29
Incidents ..................................................................................................................... 30-32
Meeting Times ................................................................................................................ 33
Information Board ..................................................................................................... 34
Phone Answering System .................................................................................... 35
Internet Service ............................................................................................................ 36
Video Equipment ................................................................................................. 37-38
Library ......................................................................................................................... 39-40
JW Broadcasting Monthly Programs ......................................................... 41
Use of Congregation Property ....................................................................... 42
Kingdom Hall Dedications .................................................................................. 43

KINGDOM HALLS
1. The branch office is responsible for approving and overseeing the

construction of new Kingdom Halls and for ensuring that exist-
ing Kingdom Halls are being maintained properly and fully uti-
lized. Direction regarding these matters is provided to congrega-
tions through the Local Design/Construction Department (LDC).
Representatives of the LDC may be used to inspect and gather
information on existing and potential meeting places. The local
elders set a fine example for all in the congregation when they
take the lead in coordinating and being personally involved in the
cleaning, maintenance, and security of the Kingdom Hall.
OWNERSHIP
2. A Kingdom Hall is dedicated to the worship of Jehovah. Wheth-
er the property title, or deed, is held in the name of a local cor-
poration or by means of a trustee arrangement or it is held in
the name of a legal entity managed by the branch office, no con-
gregation should conclude that it “owns” the Kingdom Hall. How-
ever, it is the responsibility of the congregations using the prop-
erty to care for it and see that it is used in harmony with Kingdom
interests.
3. As many as three or four congregations may be assigned by the
branch office to use the same Kingdom Hall auditorium in order
to make full use of the facility and to keep expenses to a mini-
mum. The branch office will generally correspond with only one
of the congregations using the facility regarding legal, property,
and related matters. Usually, this contact congregation holds the
documents related to the Kingdom Hall and the property on which
it is located. This is for practical reasons only and does not pro-
vide a basis for the contact congregation to make unilateral de-
cisions related to the use and upkeep of the Kingdom Hall.
RENTED FACILITIES
4. If a congregation needs to rent a facility for long-term use as
a Kingdom Hall, the elders should contact the Local Design/

KINGDOM HALLS
Construction Department. If a congregation needs to rent a fa-

cility for one-time use, such as for the Memorial, the elders should
follow the instructions provided in Renting Facilities for Theocrat-
ic Events (TO-19).
CLEANING
5. The Kingdom Hall should be cleaned according to a regular sched-
ule, depending on its use and needs. This usually involves a
light cleaning after each meeting, a more thorough cleaning each
week, and a major cleaning at least once a year. This should be
carried out by volunteers from within the congregations meeting
in the Kingdom Hall. All may have a share, including children who
are properly supervised.
6. A schedule for Kingdom Hall cleaning should be posted on the in-
formation board. Some congregations choose to rotate the week-
ly cleaning arrangements according to field service groups. The
thorough and major cleanings should include both the interior
and exterior of the buildings, as well as any storage, parking, and
landscaped areas. If snow removal or other seasonal mainte-
nance or cleaning is required, this should be well-coordinated.
Care should be taken to ensure the safety of all involved in this
work.—See 21:27-29.
7. Cleaning Coordinator: Each body of elders should assign an el-
der or ministerial servant to serve as the cleaning coordinator
for the congregation. He is not responsible for performing all of
the cleaning work himself, nor does he have the authority to make
decisions that should be made by the body of elders. He should
prepare cleaning schedules and ensure that adequate cleaning
supplies and simple written instructions are kept on hand. He
should ensure that appropriate safety equipment is on hand and
is being used and that publishers have been trained to clean
safely. He should monitor the cleanliness of the Kingdom Hall and
provide kind reminders as needed.

KINGDOM HALLS
MAINTENANCE AND REPAIR

8. A preventive maintenance program can lengthen the life of the
Kingdom Hall and equipment. Regular maintenance also shows
respect for the sanctity of life, since a lack of maintenance can re-
sult in unsafe conditions that put those who use the Kingdom Hall
at risk. (See 21:27-29.) A meeting place that is well-maintained
reflects favorably on Jehovah God. Therefore, each congrega-
tion should take seriously the responsibility to care for preven-
tive maintenance and repairs.
9. It is expected that the majority of the maintenance and repair
work will be done by local volunteers in the congregations using
the Kingdom Hall and that the costs for such work will be cov-
ered by the congregations. If local volunteers are not available
to coordinate or safely carry out the work, the elders should seek
the direction of the Local Design/Construction Department (LDC)
before any work is started. Any work that will cost more than the
average Kingdom Hall operating expenses for three months re-
quires the approval of the LDC.—See Appendix A.
10. When it is necessary to hire a contractor to perform a service
and the cost is such that the approval of the LDC is not needed,
the elders should obtain written estimates and signed written
agreements. The details of the estimates or bids should not be
shared with others wishing to perform the work. The elders should
verify that the contractor has the skill necessary to complete the
work and that he has the insurance and other legal protection
needed. This should be done whether or not the contractor is a
Witness. The congregation should consider requesting a copy of
the contractor’s certificate of insurance to verify this coverage
before the work commences and, if possible, should request to
be named as an additional insured on the contractor’s insurance
policy. If questions arise regarding the contract wording or spe-
cific local requirements, the Branch Risk Management Desk in the
Accounting Department should be contacted for assistance. In

KINGDOM HALLS
most cases, it is advisable for a dependable local brother to be

on hand to monitor the work of contractors.
11. The body of elders should be enthusiastic about and supportive
of the maintenance training and the preventive maintenance pro-
gram provided by the LDC so that all in the congregation are en-
couraged to take an interest in caring for the Kingdom Hall.
12. Immediate action should be taken if moisture-related problems
are found. Left unchecked, moisture from water leaks, conden-
sation, infiltration, or flooding can cause extensive damage. All
leaks (affecting pipes, roofs, and so forth) must be repaired im-
mediately by someone qualified in this field. If the affected area
is not cleaned and dried within 48 hours, further problems may
result. In high humidity areas, the HVAC system may have to be
set to run for a period each day, even when the hall is unoccu-
pied. This will aid in drying the air and preventing dampness and
mold. If a serious moisture problem exists and it is beyond the
ability of the elders to repair properly, the LDC should be con-
tacted immediately for assistance.
13. If a congregation needs to rent a facility (or parking lot) for a
one-time use, the elders should determine the level of repairs
necessary to have a safe and suitable place to meet. (See Chap-
ter 21, paragraph 4, for direction on rental of facilities for long-
term use.) It is best to have the owner of the property care for
such work. However, where this is not a viable option, the elders
should seek an equitable arrangement with the owner. The terms
of that arrangement should be put in writing prior to the work
commencing. Any wording in a contract that indicates that the
congregation is responsible for all liability should be avoided. If
there are concerns with the wording in these agreements, the
Branch Risk Management Desk should be contacted for assis-
tance.
14. Maintenance Coordinator: If the Kingdom Hall is used by only
one congregation, the body of elders should assign an elder or

KINGDOM HALLS
ministerial servant to serve as the maintenance coordinator. (De-

pending on the circumstances, this may be the same brother who
serves as the cleaning coordinator.) He should ensure that the
preventive maintenance program provided by the LDC is being
followed. This involves verifying that maintenance tasks are be-
ing completed on schedule and according to the guidelines pro-
vided. In addition to coordinating maintenance activities, he is
also responsible to coordinate any necessary repair work. He is
not responsible for performing all of the work himself, nor does
he have the authority to make decisions that should be made by
the body of elders. It is imperative that the brother selected be
well-organized and diligent yet submissive to the body of elders.
He should also be good at delegating work and training others.
The body of elders should allow the brother to show initiative in
caring for regular maintenance and repairs. He should ensure
that an adequate amount of tools are available and should keep
a record of completed maintenance tasks. He should also ensure
that adequate safety equipment is on hand and that publishers
have been trained to perform tasks safely.—See 21:27-29.
KINGDOM HALL OPERATING COMMITTEE

15. If the Kingdom Hall auditorium is used by more than one congre-
gation or if there are multiple auditoriums on the same property,
a Kingdom Hall Operating Committee should be appointed for or-
ganizing the cleaning and maintenance of all facilities on the
property. These would include all auditoriums, storage buildings,
and residences. Additionally, this may include caring for a resi-
dence of a special full-time servant located in the same neigh-
borhood. (See Instructions for Circuit Accounting [S-331] for di-
rection regarding circuit apartments.) Each body of elders should
select one or two elders or qualified ministerial servants to serve
on the operating committee. However, the operating committee
should consist of no more than five brothers. If there are more
than five congregations using the property, then the combined

KINGDOM HALLS
bodies of elders should select the five brothers who will serve on
the operating committee.
16. The combined bodies of elders should select the operating com-
mittee member who will serve as the operating committee coor-
dinator. He should be an experienced elder who has good organi-
zational ability and the availability for this assignment. He should
humbly work in harmony with the other members of the commit-
tee and seek direction from the bodies of elders when needed.
It is likely that he will often be able to communicate with the
other members of the operating committee without organizing
meetings. However, the operating committee coordinator should
(1) set up periodic meetings for the committee as deemed nec-
essary to carry out their assignment, (2) make sure there is ap-
propriate follow-through on decisions made, and (3) maintain
good communication with the bodies of elders. If the bodies of
elders agree that a joint meeting of all the bodies of elders is
needed to resolve a matter, one of the coordinators of the bod-
ies of elders would normally serve as the chairman of the meeting.
17. The operating committee should ensure that adequate safety
equipment is on hand and that publishers have been trained to
perform tasks safely. During cleaning or maintenance projects
shared in by more than one congregation, the operating commit-
tee should assign one of their number to serve as the safety
coordinator for the project.—See 21:27-29.
18. The operating committee should care for regular maintenance
and repairs of the Kingdom Hall. They should be willing to show
appropriate initiative but should not run ahead of the direction
provided by the bodies of elders or the branch office.
19. It is not the responsibility of the operating committee to deter-
mine when meetings are to be held, whether the building is to be
used for weddings or funerals, and so forth.—See 21:33; 27:6.2.
20. The bodies of elders of the congregations sharing the Kingdom
Hall should record the decisions that have been made regarding

KINGDOM HALLS
Kingdom Hall matters. Among other things, the agreement should

include a description of how the building will be cared for and
used, when meetings will be held, any schedule for rotating meet-
ing times, what the financial responsibility of each congrega-
tion will be in caring for the operating expenses, the amount of
funds to be kept on hand in the operating account, and what the
spending limits will be in connection with out-of-the-ordinary ex-
penses. (See Instructions for Kingdom Hall Operating Committee
Accounting [S-42].) A copy of the agreement signed by the Con-
gregation Service Committees should be retained in each congre-
gation’s file. The written agreement should be updated as need-
ed in order to reflect the current decisions of the bodies of elders.
EXPENSES
21. See Instructions for Congregation Accounting (S-27) and In-
structions for Kingdom Hall Operating Committee Accounting
(S-42).
UPGRADES AND MINOR RENOVATION

22. Minor renovation projects are typically scheduled by the Lo-
cal Design/Construction Department (LDC), based on the facili-
ty evaluation that is performed every two years. Congregations
should not install new elements or upgrade existing elements
(whether these items are purchased or donated) or perform mi-
nor renovations (work that is beyond routine maintenance and
repair) without approval from the LDC. The elders should explain
to the LDC the need for the new element, upgrade, or minor ren-
ovation and then wait for approval and direction on how to pro-
ceed. If a project request is approved, it will then be determined
whether the congregation has the means to cover the expense
or if funding will be provided by the branch office. Any use of
congregation funds to cover such expenses must be approved

KINGDOM HALLS
by a resolution, even if approval from the LDC has been obtained

for the project. The LDC will decide who will coordinate the pro-
ject based on the scope of the work.—See Appendix A; for direc-
tion regarding the funding of the installation of a video system,
see Chapter 21, paragraph 37.
MAJOR RENOVATION AND NEW

CONSTRUCTION
23. The branch office prepares and maintains a master plan that in-
dicates where Kingdom Halls are needed. This includes new King-
dom Halls needed based on congregation density and growth,
existing Kingdom Halls needing major renovations, and Kingdom
Halls needing to be replaced. The master plan may show that ex-
isting Kingdom Halls can be better utilized by merging congrega-
tions or assigning additional congregations to use a Kingdom
Hall. The benefits of merging or consolidation may include im-
proved meeting attendance, higher quality meetings, better dis-
tribution of experienced brothers, and a reduction in the number
of Kingdom Halls needing to be constructed.
24. New construction and major renovation projects are prioritized
and scheduled by the Local Design/Construction Department
(LDC). Inquiries regarding when a Kingdom Hall is scheduled for
a major renovation or about a construction project should be re-
ferred to the LDC. No congregation should purchase property,
accept property as a donation, or undertake major or minor ren-
ovation work on an existing Kingdom Hall without the full involve-
ment of the LDC. Design standards and specifications are pro-
vided by the branch office, and construction work is overseen by
Construction Groups appointed by the branch office. Funding will
be provided through the branch office, although the involved con-
gregations will be directed to set up a contribution box for the
project. The branch office will handle the sale of Kingdom Hall
property whenever this is deemed necessary.

KINGDOM HALLS
INSPECTIONS
25. The Local Design/Construction Department will arrange for an in-
spection and evaluation of each Kingdom Hall every two years.
While it is not necessary for each elder to be present during the
inspection, it is important that the Kingdom Hall Operating Com-
mittee or the maintenance coordinator be present. Further in-
structions regarding the participation of publishers will be pro-
vided when the inspection is scheduled. The inspection will help
to ensure that the preventive maintenance program is being fol-
lowed. Each inspection will include a review of any Kingdom Hall
ownership and property documents and any regulatory permits
related to building systems to ensure that these are in order and
to arrange for further assistance if needed. After the inspection,
a report will be given to each body of elders. It is expected that
the elders will follow through on the recommendations in the re-
port and will promptly address any safety or maintenance issues
found.
SECURITY
26. All doors and windows should be secured before leaving the build-
ing. Depending on the circumstances, it may be advisable to store
expensive equipment in locked cabinets or in the homes of local
brothers. Some Kingdom Halls in higher-risk areas may install
electronic security systems. If installed, these systems should be
kept in good working order. Prior to installing a system, the body
of elders should contact the Local Design/Construction Depart-
ment to determine if it is warranted for their Kingdom Hall.—See
21:22.
SAFETY
27. Each elder should be alert to any hazardous conditions that may
exist in the Kingdom Hall or on its grounds and promptly ensure

KINGDOM HALLS
that they are addressed. Walkways, parking lots, lighting around

stairs and areas having changes of level or uneven surfaces, and
the condition of mats or carpets at building entrances should re-
ceive particular attention. Fire hazards, such as overloaded elec-
trical outlets or the accumulation of combustible material should
not be allowed. Storage of hazardous materials on the property
should be avoided when possible. Any necessary chemicals used
for cleaning or maintenance should be clearly labeled and stored
in a secure location inaccessible to young children.
28. All elders should be thoroughly familiar with Working Together
Safely—Standards for Theocratic Construction and Maintenance
(DC-82). A printed or an electronic copy of Working Together
Safely should be provided to each member of the congregation
who volunteers to assist with a maintenance or construction pro-
ject or with other tasks that involve a measure of risk, such as
working with power tools, using ladders, accessing roofs, or per-
forming electrical work.
29. A key aspect of working safely is identifying potential dangers and
planning how to avoid them. Those overseeing Kingdom Hall pro-
jects are to review each activity planned, determine the potential
hazards related to each task, and identify the appropriate safety
measures that can be implemented. Ensure that qualified individ-
uals with the health and skill needed to complete the work safe-
ly are chosen. The Congregation Job Hazard Analysis (DC-85) and
Congregation Job Hazard Analysis Instructions (DC-85i) forms
should be used. These forms are not intended to be used in con-
nection with minor maintenance work and regular cleaning.
INCIDENTS
30. An Incident Report (TO-5) should be completed for any incident
that occurred at a Kingdom Hall or at a facility rented for a theo-
cratic event if it involved or nearly involved (1) property damage
that may result in a request for financial assistance, (2) illness

KINGDOM HALLS
requiring hospitalization, or (3) personal injury requiring medical

treatment beyond minor first aid. Incident Report Instructions
(TO-5i) should be consulted for every incident or near miss. The
completed report should be submitted to the Branch Risk Man-
agement Desk in the Accounting Department within 72 hours of
the incident. If the incident is catastrophic or there is a threat of
legal action, immediately call the Legal Department for assis-
tance.
31. When property damage occurs, quick action can go far in pre-
venting further damage. Break-ins, thefts, arson, or other inci-
dents of vandalism should be promptly reported to the local au-
thorities. The Local Design/Construction Department (LDC) may
be contacted for direction. For damage that can be easily re-
paired without assistance from the LDC, please send copies of
the written estimate of repair costs (or repair bills, if it was an
emergency) along with the Incident Report to the Branch Risk
Management Desk.
32. The Global Assistance Arrangement cares for property damage
to Kingdom Halls, such as losses resulting from natural disasters,
fire, moisture damage, and vandalism, as well as for expenses
related to incidents involving personal injury at Kingdom Halls.
MEETING TIMES
33. Unless there are extreme extenuating circumstances, the Life and
Ministry Meeting is to be held during the week and should not be
combined with the public talk and Watchtower Study, which are
to be held on the weekend. When only one congregation meets
in a Kingdom Hall, the elders should consider what meeting times
will be most convenient for the majority and should present their
recommendations to the congregation for discussion, possible
adjustment, and final decision (by majority vote of the baptized
publishers). When more than one congregation meets in the hall,
the combined bodies of elders should discuss meeting-time pref-

KINGDOM HALLS
erences before submitting their recommendations to their respec-

tive congregations. (1 Cor. 10:24) Some congregations find that
rotating the times and/or the days of the meetings each year is
desirable. When a rotation is made, it should take place during
the first week of January. The Service Department should be no-
tified of changes to congregation meeting times using jw.org or,
if that is not possible, by submitting the Kingdom Hall Informa-
tion (S-5) form. Good communication and cooperation contrib-
ute to mutual understanding and contentment, preventing the
feeling that one congregation has certain advantages all the time.
Good cooperation is also needed in connection with adjusting
meeting schedules during a circuit overseer’s visit to a congre-
gation. A sign with up-to-date meeting times should be displayed
in accordance with local codes.
INFORMATION BOARD
34. The coordinator of the body of elders is responsible for approv-
ing all items posted on the information board. The information
board should be used exclusively to provide information about
congregation activities and should be kept neat. No wedding an-
nouncements or announcements about social gatherings should
be placed on the information board. When more than one con-
gregation shares the auditorium, each congregation should have
its own information board or portion thereof.
PHONE ANSWERING SYSTEM

35. An answering machine or voice messaging system should be uti-
lized, if feasible. A recorded announcement, approved by the Con-
gregation Service Committees using the Kingdom Hall, should
provide the Kingdom Hall address, brief directions to the King-
dom Hall (if necessary), and meeting times. During the Memorial
season, the day, time, and location of the Memorial observance(s)

KINGDOM HALLS
should also be given. Callers should be directed to jw.org for ad-

ditional information. The announcement should be provided in
the languages of all congregations and groups using the King-
dom Hall.
INTERNET SERVICE
36. If the bodies of elders using the Kingdom Hall determine that hav-
ing an Internet connection at the Kingdom Hall would benefit the
congregations and that the congregations can afford it, the el-
ders should present the publishers with a resolution to obtain
such service. Please note the following direction in this regard:
(1) Access to the Internet should be password-protected.
(2) Only publishers in good standing should be permitted

access.
(3) The password should not be announced publicly.

Instead, it should be given to the approved publishers
individually.
(4) If a publisher were to use the Kingdom Hall connection

to access inappropriate websites, his connectivity
privilege would be revoked.
(5) It is wise to change the password periodically.
(6) If the Kingdom Hall is equipped with a computer that

is connected to the Internet, appropriate Internet
security practices should be implemented, such as
those listed on page 28 of the August 2009 Awake!
Additionally, Internet browsers provide various built-in
security features, such as automatic pop-up blocking,
privacy settings, flexibility in specifying websites that
should be blocked, and website certificate validation.
Also, most Internet service providers offer some

KINGDOM HALLS
advanced protection that may, for example, block

fraudulent websites, prevent phishing attacks, and put
in place parental controls. Although there is usually an
additional monthly charge for these advanced security
features, their benefits generally outweigh such costs.
VIDEO EQUIPMENT
37. With the exception of new construction, major renovations, or
sign-language congregations, the installation of video equipment
in Kingdom Halls is the financial responsibility of the publishers
who attend meetings at that hall. If the bodies of elders recom-
mend the installation of video equipment and determine that the
congregations can afford the equipment, they should first con-
tact the Local Design Construction Department for approval and
direction.
38. Please keep the following guidelines in mind if a video system is
installed:
(1) The system should be configured so that minimal time

will be lost when starting a video. For example, it is
preferred, but not mandatory, that the primary video
display(s) be positioned on one or both sides of the
stage, not in the center. Regardless of the
configuration, the speaker should be able to remain at
the lectern while the video is played.
(2) The digital yeartext should be displayed before the
opening song, after the concluding prayer, and during
the meeting when nothing else is being shown on the
screens. This may eliminate the need to purchase
signage to display the yeartext. For Kingdom Halls that
have a video display in the center of the stage, it may
be more practical to continue to display the yeartext
with a physical sign. No additional artwork should be

KINGDOM HALLS
combined with the yeartext, not even artwork from our

publications.
(3) If the Kingdom Hall has Internet service, it is preferred,

but not mandatory, that a wired connection to the
provider be used and that the computer or media
playback device in the Kingdom Hall be connected with
a wired connection.—See 20:21.
(4) Video playback equipment should be installed near

the sound equipment. The brother running the system
should start the video when directed to do so by the
brother on the stage. Generally, the video equipment
should not be operated from the stage.
LIBRARY
39. Each Kingdom Hall auditorium should have space for a library.
(od p. 61 par. 19) The library should contain publications for each
language group using the auditorium. The bodies of elders should
determine whether the library will provide publications in printed
form, electronic form, or both. Since some publishers and inter-
ested persons do not use computers or electronic devices, the
elders should give careful consideration to the needs of such in-
dividuals when making decisions as to the Kingdom Hall library,
especially before deciding to eliminate printed publications. If the
publications will be provided in electronic form, such as on a de-
vice or on a computer, a printer should be made available. At
least one responsible brother should be assigned to keep the li-
brary up-to-date and in good order.
40. In the event that the bodies of elders decide to eliminate printed
publications from the library, care should be taken not to discard
items that have historical significance. The branch office may wish
to add such items to its library or to its archive of historical ma-
terials.

KINGDOM HALLS
JW BROADCASTING MONTHLY PROGRAMS

41. To assist publishers who do not have access to the Internet, the
bodies of elders in Kingdom Halls already having video equipment
could set a time each month for the monthly broadcast to be
shown at the Kingdom Hall. If more than one congregation is us-
ing the Kingdom Hall, it might be practical to have individuals in
those congregations view the program together at a time when
the Kingdom Hall is not normally in use. Because such showings
are not considered to be congregation meetings, there is no need
for opening or closing prayers. Disfellowshipped or disassociat-
ed individuals may attend such programs if held at the Kingdom
Hall. Those attending should dress as they would for congrega-
tion meetings.
USE OF CONGREGATION PROPERTY

42. It is preferred that congregations not own or control property
other than what is necessary for congregation meetings. Excep-
tions may be made for modest dwellings for circuit overseers, spe-
cial pioneers, or others in special full-time service at the discre-
tion of the branch office. (See Instructions for Circuit Accounting
[S-331] for direction on circuit apartments.) If questions arise in
connection with congregation property, such as regarding hous-
ing, use of land by other parties, and gifts of property, the elders
should contact the Local Design/Construction Department for di-
rection.
KINGDOM HALL DEDICATIONS

43. See Kingdom Hall Dedication Guidelines (S-78).

KINGDOM HALLS

CHAPTER TWENTY-TWO
Correspondence
and Records
Paragraphs
JW.ORG E-mail ............................................................................................................ 1-4
Letters of Introduction ....................................................................................... 5-8
Disfellowshipped or Disassociated
Individuals Who Move ............................................................................................... 9
Congregation File ............................................................................................... 10-27
Confidentiality and Security ......................................................................... 10
Categories .................................................................................................................... 11
Field Service Records .................................................................................. 12-17
Meeting Attendance Records ....................................................................... 18
Appointment and Deletion of
Elders and Ministerial Servants ............................................................. 19
Report on Circuit Overseer’s Visit
With Congregation (S-303) ...................................................................... 20
Judicial Files and Other Confidential Reports ....................... 21-27
Use of Online Storage Services .................................................................... 28
JW.ORG E-MAIL
1. It is recommended that elders check their jw.org e-mail inbox at
least once each week. Confidential information should not be sent
using outside e-mail providers. Use of jw.org e-mail is governed
by the “Terms of Use” policy available on jw.org.
2. When the elders in one congregation need to write to the body

of elders of another congregation, it is usually best that they send

CORRESPONDENCE AND RECORDS
the correspondence to the congregation’s jw.org e-mail address

rather than to the address of a specific elder. When correspon-
dence is received, the coordinator of the body of elders and sec-
retary should work together to ensure appropriate follow-through.
They should also ensure that all elders have access to correspon-
dence directed to the body of elders.
3. When electronic communication is possible, correspondence and

forms should be sent to the branch office using jw.org rather than
postal mail. Correspondence to the branch office on behalf of
the body of elders is usually sent by the secretary. Confidential
reports, such as the Notification of Disfellowshipping or Disas-
sociation (S-77) form, would usually be sent to the branch office
by one of the elders handling the matter.
4. Unless instructed otherwise, there is no need to sign correspon-

dence or forms sent using jw.org e-mail. However, the names of
the brothers who read and approved the correspondence should
appear. Correspondence sent to the branch office as an attach-
ment should be in a commonly used format, such as Microsoft
Word or PDF. For a routine matter, such as an inquiry on the sta-
tus of a literature request, the message may be typed directly
into the body of the e-mail rather than attaching a separate doc-
ument.
LETTERS OF INTRODUCTION
5. When a publisher (active or inactive) moves to another congre-
gation, a letter of introduction and the Congregation’s Publisher
Records (S-21) should promptly be sent to the new congrega-
tion. The Congregation Service Committee may take the initiative
and send these items without waiting for a formal request from
the new congregation. If a person who has been accused of child
sexual abuse (established or not) moves to another congrega-
tion, see Chapter 14, paragraph 26.

6. A letter of introduction should contain the following information:

(1) The date of the letter.
(2) The sending congregation’s full name.
(3) The sending congregation’s postal address or jw.org
e-mail address.
(4) The receiving congregation’s full name.
(5) The receiving congregation’s postal address or jw.org
e-mail address.
(6) The names of the three elders (usually the service
committee) who approved the letter.
(7) The publisher’s full name, the names of any
immediate family members, and any privileges the
publisher or his family members moving with him have
enjoyed (such as presenting student assignments on
the midweek meeting or serving as an elder or
ministerial servant, an auxiliary or regular pioneer, a
local design/construction volunteer, or a remote Bethel
volunteer or Bethel consultant), and whether the elders
recommend that they retain such privileges.—See 8:12.
7. Additionally, elders should ask themselves: ‘What information
would we want to receive if this person moved into our congre-
gation?’ (Matt. 7:12) If a person is under judicial restrictions, the
elders in the new congregation should be informed of these. If a
person was reproved or reinstated in the distant past but is not
presently under restrictions, there may be no need to mention
past judicial action unless the offense involved entering into an
adulterous marriage or some other notorious wrongdoing.—See
12:10-11.
8. The publisher’s new congregation should retain the letter for no
longer than five years unless there is a need to keep it longer.

For example, if an individual entered into an adulterous marriage,

the letter should be retained for as long as the innocent former
mate is alive, is unmarried, and has not been guilty of sexual im-
morality (por·neia).—See 12:10-11.
DISFELLOWSHIPPED OR DISASSOCIATED
INDIVIDUALS WHO MOVE
9. If the elders learn that a disfellowshipped or disassociated per-
son has moved, they should not send the Congregation’s Pub-
lisher Records (S-21) or the confidential file to the congregation
in whose territory he lives or where he attends meetings. The con-
gregation that took the disfellowshipping action or acknowledged
the disassociation should retain the records. However, a brief let-
ter should be sent to the body of elders in whose territory he
lives to inform them that a disfellowshipped or disassociated per-
son lives in their territory. If possible, they should provide his ad-
dress. Generally, there would be no need for the letter to include
specific information on the details of the case. However, if there
is reason for the elders in the new congregation to be especial-
ly on guard, this can be explained in the letter.—See Chapter 14,
paragraph 26, for direction on when an individual accused of child
sexual abuse moves; see Chapter 19, paragraphs 13-16, for di-
rection on communication between committees when an individ-
ual requests reinstatement.
CONGREGATION FILE
10. Confidentiality and Security: The congregation file should be
kept locked in a place that is safe and secure, preferably at the
Kingdom Hall. Any ministerial servants substituting as members
of the Congregation Service Committee should not have access
to confidential records, such as correspondence regarding the
appointment and deletion of elders and ministerial servants and
judicial records. (See 2:2.) Each elder desiring to have a key to

the file should be provided one. However, if the Kingdom Hall is

particularly vulnerable, then such records may be kept in a locked
cabinet in the home of an elder to prevent unauthorized entry.
The service committee should plan how to protect and preserve
congregation records and confidential files in the event of a di-
saster.—See 26:4.
11. Categories: For items that need to be retained in the congrega-
tion file, the following categories should be used. (Additional cat-
egories may be used as needed.)
˘ Accounts
˘ Applications
˘ Circuit Overseer’s Report on Visit
˘ Confidential Records (sealed envelopes)
˘ DPA Cards
˘ Elders and Ministerial Servants
˘ Kingdom Hall
˘ Letters of Introduction
˘ Territory
12. Field Service Records: The Congregation’s Publisher Records
(S-21) belong to the local congregation. Each branch office pro-
vides direction to bodies of elders on whether to retain the re-
cords electronically or in printed form. If the records are retained
electronically, the body of elders decides whether to use the form
provided by the branch office or some other method that dis-
plays the same information in the same format. The congrega-
tion’s field service records should contain at least 13 months of
activity but no more than 36 months. (od pp. 77-78) The file is
divided into two sections—“Active” and “Inactive.” The section
for active publishers should be arranged alphabetically, with the

records subdivided into sections for (1) regular and special pio-
neers and field missionaries and (2) all other publishers. The sec-
tion for all other publishers should be arranged by field service
group. Additionally, three separate Congregation’s Publisher Re-
cords should be filled out to reflect the combined monthly totals
for (1) all regular and special pioneers and field missionaries,
(2) all auxiliary pioneers, and (3) all other publishers.
13. The congregation’s report should be submitted to the Service De-
partment no later than the 20th day of the month. If a publish-
er turns in his report late, it should be added to the congrega-
tion’s report for the following month and the “Number Reporting”
figure should be adjusted accordingly. Individual reports should
be posted on the Congregation’s Publisher Records for the month
shown on the report slip, regardless of when the report is re-
ceived or when it is included in the congregation’s report submit-
ted to the Service Department. A publisher is not considered ir-
regular because of a late report.
14. If the Congregation Service Committee has granted a publisher
with very limiting circumstances permission to report field ser-
vice in 15-minute increments, the secretary should keep track of
these fractions of hours and carry them over to the following
month if they total less than an hour. (od p. 77 par. 29) When-
ever the sum of these fractions adds up to a full hour, the sec-
retary should include that hour with the congregation’s report.
Publishers who have questions about what to report should be
encouraged to review pages 75-77, paragraphs 23-29, of the Or-
ganized book.
15. Regular pioneer reports are handled in the same way as other
publisher reports. Hour credits for pioneers should be written in
the “Comments” section of their Field Service Report (S-4) slips
and should not be included with the congregation’s report sub-
mitted to the branch office. (See Chapter 9, paragraphs 11-13,
for direction on hour credits for pioneers.) Since special pioneers,
field missionaries, and other special full-time servants in the field

report their field service activity to the branch office directly, their
reports are not included with the congregation’s report. However,
their activity should be posted on the Congregation’s Publisher
Record.
16. Field Service Report slips should be destroyed after being tabu-
lated and posted on the Congregation’s Publisher Records. A rec-
ord of the last 12 months of field service activity of an inactive
publisher should be retained. A record of the last 12 months of
field service activity of a disfellowshipped or disassociated per-
son should be retained in the sealed envelope.
17. While the Congregation’s Publisher Records may be kept by the
secretary, they are to be made available to the other elders as
needed.—See 7:2.6.
18. Meeting Attendance Records: The body of elders decides wheth-
er to retain Congregation Meeting Attendance Records (S-88)
electronically or in printed form. If the records are retained elec-
tronically, the body of elders decides whether to use the form
provided by the branch office or some other method that dis-
plays the same information in the same format. After the infor-
mation contained in the Report of Meeting Attendance (S-3) slip
has been transferred to the Congregation Meeting Attendance
Record, the slip should be destroyed. The congregation’s meet-
ing attendance records should contain at least 13 months of at-
tendance but no more than 36 months.
19. Appointment and Deletion of Elders and Ministerial Servants:
Records related to the appointment and deletion of elders and
ministerial servants should be retained indefinitely. This would in-
clude past S-2 forms and S-52 acknowledgment letters from the
branch office and letters of appointment and deletion from cir-
cuit overseers. In connection with any deletion, a brief explana-
tion of the reason for the brother’s deletion should also be kept.
Such background material will be helpful in supplying the circuit
overseer with complete details in the event a brother is recom-
mended for reappointment in the future.

20. Report on Circuit Overseer’s Visit With Congregation (S-303):

Only the most recent report is retained.
21. Judicial Files and Other Confidential Reports: After a judicial

committee, an appeal committee, a committee handling a request
for disassociation, a reinstatement committee, or one or two el-
ders handling a matter of wrongdoing have met with an individ-
ual, a brief summary of the proceedings is prepared and signed
by the elders involved. The summary should be prepared regard-
less of the outcome of the meeting, for example, if the case was
dismissed because of lack of evidence. (See 12:41-42.) The sum-
mary should include only pertinent facts and the final determi-
nation of the person’s standing in the congregation; it should
not contain personal opinions. Any personal notes should be de-
stroyed. No judicial information should be posted on Congrega-
tion’s Publisher Records (S-21).
22. If the matter involves a disfellowshipping, disassociation, or rein-

statement, the elders handling the case should ensure that only
the following documents are placed in a sealed envelope:
(1) Brief summary of the proceedings.
(2) Notification of Disfellowshipping or Disassociation

(S-77) form.
(3) Congregation’s Publisher Records if not reinstated.
(4) Any correspondence to or from the branch office

regarding the wrongdoer.
(5) Any letters requesting reinstatement.
(6) Any letter of disassociation.
23. If the matter involves judicial reproof or another matter involv-

ing wrongdoing handled by one or two elders, the elders involved
should ensure that the sealed envelope contains only the brief

summary and any correspondence to or from the branch office

regarding the wrongdoer.
24. The following information should be written on the front of the
sealed envelope:
(1) Name of the individual.
(2) Action taken by the congregation, if any, and the date

of such.
(3) Any judicial restrictions imposed and the date the

restrictions are removed.
(4) Names of the elders who handled the matter.
(5) The words “Do Not Destroy” for matters involving

accusations of child sexual abuse (established or not).
25. The sealed envelope should be placed in the congregation file by
the secretary. If there is a need to open these files in the future,
such as in connection with a plea for reinstatement, this should
be done only by the elders who are assigned by the body to han-
dle the matter.
26. The sealed envelopes containing records on individuals who have
not been reinstated should be kept indefinitely. If the person has
been reinstated a full five years or has died, usually the file should
be destroyed unless the case involved an accusation of child sex-
ual abuse or an adulterous marriage or the committee believes
there is some other reason to retain it. The same retention pol-
icy applies to records involving judicial reproof and wrongdoing
handled by one or two elders. If it is determined that a sealed
envelope should be retained after an individual has died, the date
of death should be written on the outside of the envelope. If one
or more of the elders who handled a specific case are no longer
available, the Congregation Service Committee will assign other
elders to determine if the file should be retained.

27. If a person entered into an adulterous marriage, the file should

be kept for five years after the judicial action and thereafter as
long as the innocent former mate is alive, unmarried, and has
not been guilty of sexual immorality (por·neia).—See 12:10-12.
USE OF ONLINE STORAGE SERVICES

28. There is no objection to using online storage services for non-
confidential documents, such as those containing information
that would be posted on the information board. However, infor-
mation of a sensitive or confidential nature, including judicial mat-
ters, should never be stored online.—See 21:34.

CHAPTER TWENTY-THREE
Field Ministry
Paragraphs
Congregation Territory Assignment .......................................................... 1-3
Witnessing in Public Places ......................................................................... 4-16
Selecting Suitable Locations ..................................................................... 4-5
Site Permission and Insurance Coverage ........................................ 6-7
Public Witnessing Equipment .................................................................... 8-9
Determining Who May Participate .................................................... 10-11
Providing Practical Training ................................................................... 12-13
Displaying Literature ........................................................................................... 14
Use of Electronic Devices ............................................................................... 15
Special Metropolitan Public Witnessing .............................................. 16
Schools and Universities ...................................................................................... 17
Nursing Homes and Retirement Homes ................................................. 18
Harbor Witnessing ..................................................................................................... 19
Prison Witnessing ...................................................................................................... 20
Witnessing Difficulties ................................................................................... 21-23
Showing Consideration for Those Involved in Additional
Theocratic Assignments .............................................................................. 24-25
CONGREGATION TERRITORY ASSIGNMENT

1. The body of elders takes a keen interest in the progress of the
preaching and teaching work in the congregation’s assigned ter-
ritory. (Acts 10:42; od pp. 81-97). The service overseer will be
helped to care for his assignment effectively if he has the sup-
port of his fellow elders.—See Chapter 5.

FIELD MINISTRY
2. The branch office provides a Congregation Territory Assignment

(S-54) to each congregation. Local circumstances should be con-
sidered when determining the size of individual territories used for
house-to-house work. For example, individual territories of 200
to 300 homes may be practical if the territories can be worked
thoroughly within four months. Congregations having very limit-
ed territory might reduce the size of individual territories to 50
to 75 homes.—od pp. 90-92.
3. The circuit overseer may provide helpful suggestions to assist the
congregation to give a thorough witness to everyone in its as-
signed territory. However, if reasonable efforts have been made
and it is not possible for the congregation to cover its territory
and sections of it have not been worked for at least two years,
the circuit overseer may recommend to the branch office that
some portions of the territory be assigned to nearby congrega-
tions or listed as unassigned territory.
WITNESSING IN PUBLIC PLACES

4. Selecting Suitable Locations: After consulting with the other el-
ders, the Congregation Service Committee will make the final de-
cision as to specific locations for public witnessing. Primary con-
sideration should be given to areas of high pedestrian traffic that
are most visible, taking local regulations into consideration. Pos-
sible locations include transportation hubs, public squares, parks,
busy streets, shopping malls, university campuses, airports, and
locations of annual events. (km 7/13 pp. 4-6) If the elders be-
come aware of an opportunity to set up a literature display at a
large event, such as a national or international book fair, they
should contact the Service Department for further direction.
5. Locations selected for public witnessing must be within the con-
gregation’s territory boundaries. Where the territories of different-
language congregations overlap, the service overseers should
communicate with one another so as to accomplish the most

FIELD MINISTRY
good while not overwhelming pedestrians or impeding access to

businesses.
6. Site Permission and Insurance Coverage: In some public loca-
tions, permission may be needed from a manager or secular au-
thority before setting up a literature display. The service overseer
or someone else designated by the body of elders should deter-
mine what may be legally required, if anything, in the way of per-
missions, permits, and insurance coverage. Any application to
use a mobile cart or to set up a table or kiosk to display litera-
ture must be filled out in the name of an individual publisher, not
in the name of the congregation, any corporation used by the or-
ganization, or “Jehovah’s Witnesses.” If a small administrative fee
is needed in order to acquire space in a public area, it is to be
paid by the individual publisher, not the congregation. Publishers
should carefully review any such applications to see what respon-
sibility they are taking upon themselves with respect to liability.
Publishers who apply to distribute literature at these areas are
doing so on their own initiative as part of their personal ministry.
7. At times, administrators or managers have waived insurance re-
quirements when the voluntary and non-commercial nature of
our Bible educational work was explained to them. Any meeting
that is held with a location’s manager should be informal, such
as one between neighbors in a community, and not a discussion
of legal rights. If this meeting is unsuccessful or an excessive fee
is required, the service committee should identify other public
areas within their congregation’s territory where public witness-
ing could be effective.
8. Public Witnessing Equipment: The Congregation Service Com-

mittee will determine what equipment (including posters) will be
used and where it will be stored. Only artwork approved by the
branch office should be displayed. Poster artwork may be rotat-
ed periodically so that a variety of topics are featured through-
out the month.

FIELD MINISTRY
9. Public witnessing equipment can be requested in the same way

that publications are requested. The Public Witnessing Supplies
(S-80) form contains sample pictures and descriptions for the
standard carts, stands, magnetic boards, posters, and so forth.
The equipment will remain the property of the congregation. Care
should be taken to request only equipment that will be put to
good use by publishers who have been trained in its use and that
can be financially supported by the congregation. The congrega-
tion may be informed that the cost of the public witnessing equip-
ment will be covered by their contributions to the worldwide work.
10. Determining Who May Participate: The Congregation Service
Committee will select qualified baptized publishers to participate
in this feature of the ministry. Those selected should be ones who
present themselves in a dignified way. Their appearance and dress
should be professional, well-arranged, and modest. They should
demonstrate discernment and a willingness to witness in differ-
ent public settings, should enjoy and promote good relations with
others, should be committed to taking the assignment seriously,
and should be willing to cooperate with the body of elders. If a
parent is approved to participate in public witnessing, his well-
behaved minor child (baptized or not) may accompany him. The
service committee should use good judgment in deciding wheth-
er a mature baptized minor may be approved to participate in
public witnessing.
11. If it is possible and practical, the service overseer or someone
designated by the body of elders should organize a midweek and
weekend schedule for each selected location. There is an advan-
tage to having the literature displays set up in the same location,
on the same days, and at the same times. They serve as a con-
stant feature readily recognized by those in the area.
12. Providing Practical Training: The service overseer or someone
designated by the body of elders will provide the initial training
to field service group overseers, their assistants, and publishers
chosen to participate. The training should be based on Public Wit-

FIELD MINISTRY
nessing Guidelines (S-148), and a copy of that document should

be provided to those participating. The group overseer and his as-
sistant will monitor and assist publishers, and if additional train-
ing is needed, the group overseer and the service overseer will
provide reminders.
13. Publishers should widely publicize jw.org and should be trained
how to highlight its features. For example, those who hesitate to
converse with us or accept literature may be more inclined to in-
vestigate our website. (km 12/12 pp. 5-6) Publishers should know
how to help an interested person access material in his language
on jw.org, including sign-language videos that would appeal to
the deaf and audio recordings that would appeal to the visually
impaired.
14. Displaying Literature: Taking into account local circumstances
and interests, the service overseer will determine the quantity of
literature to be displayed. Discernment is needed to ensure that
literature will not be wasted or misused. (km 12/11 p. 2) The dis-
play should be neat and dignified. Experience has shown that
a simple, appealing arrangement of literature is best. In many
areas, it would be appropriate to feature just a few publications
from the Teaching Toolbox that have wide appeal. During the an-
nual campaigns for the Memorial and for the convention, the You
Are Invited poster may be displayed and invitations distributed.
Magazines and other literature in frequently-requested languages
may be kept on hand. If more literature is needed than the quanti-
ty allowed for request on jw.org, the Shipping Department should
be contacted. While Bibles should not be displayed on public wit-
nessing equipment, they may be kept on hand to offer to indi-
viduals who request one or who demonstrate sincere interest in
the truth. Additionally, a modest supply of the Return to Jeho-
vah brochure should be kept on hand (though not displayed) for
the benefit of any inactive ones who are encountered.
15. Use of Electronic Devices: If practical, a flat screen monitor con-
nected to a portable electronic device may be used at a literature

FIELD MINISTRY
table or kiosk. The monitor could be used to display approved

public witnessing posters, to demonstrate features of jw.org, or
to play a short video, such as Why Study the Bible?
16. Special Metropolitan Public Witnessing: If this separate initia-
tive has been arranged in your area, additional information will
be provided to the circuit overseers and congregations so that
all may work together in an orderly and organized manner.—km
7/13 pp. 4-6.
SCHOOLS AND UNIVERSITIES

17. Before setting up a literature display at a school or university, it
is usually best to approach the school principal, headmaster, or
dean. Those making such visits should be forthright in identify-
ing themselves as Jehovah’s Witnesses. Many educators gladly
receive and make good use of our literature, videos, and online
material once they are made aware of their availability and their
educational value. (g 1/09 p. 32; g 8/07 p. 32) Schools or orga-
nizations for the deaf or the blind may especially appreciate know-
ing that Jehovah’s Witnesses provide literature in formats that
may benefit such individuals. The service overseer may train well-
qualified publishers approved by the Congregation Service Com-
mittee to visit schools and universities.
NURSING HOMES AND RETIREMENT HOMES

18. Some publishers have had success in reaching elderly persons by
approaching the manager or activities director of the facility and
volunteering their time to encourage residents who might enjoy
Bible reading and discussion of Bible accounts. It may be ex-
plained that volunteers from the congregation would be pleased
to read Bible-based material, to conduct a free weekly Bible study,
or to show Bible-based videos to anyone who wishes to attend.
Oftentimes, the staff, volunteers, family members of patients, and

FIELD MINISTRY
other visitors will join in the study. The service overseer may train
well-qualified publishers approved by the Congregation Service
Committee to make such visits.—km 6/14 pp. 2-4.
HARBOR WITNESSING
19. Harbor witnessing is a specialized ministry that requires specif-
ic direction from the branch office. If there is a major harbor with-
in a congregation’s territory and the elders have not yet received
such direction, they should inform the Service Department of the
name, location, and size of the port.
PRISON WITNESSING
20. See Chapter 28.
WITNESSING DIFFICULTIES
21. Individuals have a right to privacy and the right to prohibit any-
one, including publishers, from entering their home or property.
If a householder insists that no further visits to his home be made
by Jehovah’s Witnesses, we respect his wishes. (Matt. 7:12; 10:
13) A dated note should be placed in the territory record so that
publishers working the territory in the future do not call at that
address. Annually, the service overseer should provide the Con-
gregation Service Committee the addresses of such households.
The service committee should assign elders to visit or send a let-
ter to these addresses every two years to confirm the person’s
wishes. The body of elders can decide if the circumstances in a
particular case make it advisable to handle things differently.
22. If a manager insists that no further visits be made by Jehovah’s
Witnesses to a subdivision or an apartment complex, publishers
should leave immediately. Thereafter, the elders should contact
the Legal Department. If a government official seeks to impose
some restriction on our ministry, the elders should contact the

FIELD MINISTRY
Legal Department. In such situations, publishers should always

respond in a polite and respectful manner.—Rom. 12:18; 1 Pet.
3:15.
23. If violent opposition arises, the elders should contact the Legal
Department. Elders should be guided by Bible principles and di-
rection from the branch office. (Matt. 5:44; 10:11-23; Rom. 12:17-
21) Publishers may need to carry out their ministry very discreet-
ly. (Acts 5:29) The elders should help publishers avoid unneces-
sary problems.—Prov. 14:15; 17:14.
SHOWING CONSIDERATION FOR THOSE

INVOLVED IN ADDITIONAL THEOCRATIC
ASSIGNMENTS
24. Some brothers and sisters serve as commuter Bethelites, remote
volunteers, or Bethel consultants. Others assist with construction
and maintenance of Kingdom Halls, Assembly Halls, and Bethel
facilities. Some brothers serve on Hospital Liaison Committees,
Patient Visitation Groups, Disaster Relief Committees, or Conven-
tion Committees. The field service and congregation activity of
those who care for these and other approved assignments in
support of the organization may be affected. Even if such ones
are not regular pioneers and thus do not receive hour credit for
this work, it would be helpful for them to include in the “Com-
ments” section of their Field Service Report (S-4) a description
of the theocratic responsibilities they cared for during that month.
The secretary should make a note of this in the “Remarks” col-
umn of the Congregation’s Publisher Record (S-21). The hours
spent working on an approved assignment should not be includ-
ed with the field service report submitted to the branch office.
The figure recorded in the “Hours” column of the Congregation’s
Publisher Record should reflect only the actual hours spent in
field service.—See Chapter 9, paragraphs 11-13, regarding how
to note hour credits for regular pioneers involved in other theo-
cratic activity.

FIELD MINISTRY
25. Elders can show their appreciation for those who care for extra
theocratic assignments by filling in for them when they must be
away and not being critical of their reduced field service activity.
Consideration along these lines should also be extended when
reviewing brothers’ qualifications for recommendation as elders
and ministerial servants.

FIELD MINISTRY

CHAPTER TWENTY-FOUR
Foreign-Language Field
Paragraphs
Forming Pregroups, Groups, and Congregations ....................... 2-5
Pregroups ........................................................................................................................ 2
Groups ......................................................................................................................... 3-4
Congregations ............................................................................................................. 5
Territory Coverage ................................................................................................ 6-10
Host Congregation .............................................................................................. 11-12
Meetings ...................................................................................................................... 13-23
Pregroups ..................................................................................................................... 13
Groups ..................................................................................................................... 14-15
Location ......................................................................................................................... 16
Recordings and Audio/Video Tie-In ................................................. 17-18
Interpretation ............................................................................................................ 19
Recording Attendance ....................................................................................... 20
Songs ............................................................................................................................... 21
Memorial ....................................................................................................................... 22
During the Visit of the Circuit Overseer ............................................. 23
Assisting Publishers ........................................................................................ 24-26
Circuit Assemblies and Conventions ........................................................ 27
Signs, Yeartext, and Invitations .................................................................... 28
1. Our objective is to reach everyone possible with the Kingdom

message and to make disciples. (1 Tim. 2:3, 4) Therefore, it
is good for bodies of elders to understand and cooperate with
arrangements made to support the foreign-language field.—od
pp. 92-96.

FOREIGN-LANGUAGE FIELD
FORMING PREGROUPS, GROUPS,

AND CONGREGATIONS
2. Pregroups: A foreign-language pregroup consists of a number of
publishers who are preaching in a foreign language even though
a qualified elder or ministerial servant is not available to conduct
a weekly meeting in that language. The branch office may rec-
ognize a congregation as hosting a pregroup if the following re-
quirements are met:
(1) A sizable population of people in the area speak

a language other than the language of the
congregation.
(2) At least a few publishers know the target language or

are willing to learn the language.
(3) The body of elders is willing to take the lead in

organizing the preaching in that language.
If the body of elders desires to host a pregroup, the elders should

consult with the circuit overseer. He may be aware of other con-
gregations attempting to preach to people of that language and
may provide valuable information that would help in determining
which congregation would be in the best position to host a pre-
group. Once that congregation has been determined, the elders
may send a letter to the Service Department and request approv-
al to be formally recognized as a congregation hosting a foreign-
language pregroup.
3. Groups: The branch office may recognize a congregation as host-

ing a foreign-language group if the following requirements are
met:
(1) There are sufficient interest and potential for growth in

a particular language field.

(2) At least a small number of publishers speak the

language or are learning the language.
(3) A qualified elder or ministerial servant is available to

take the lead and conduct at least one weekly meeting
—or one portion of a weekly meeting, such as a public
talk or a Watchtower Study—in that language.—See
24:14-15.
(4) The body of elders is willing to host the group.
When these requirements are met to a reasonable degree, the

body of elders should send a letter with complete details to
the Service Department requesting formal recognition as a con-
gregation hosting a foreign-language group. The elder or minis-
terial servant taking the lead would be considered the “group
overseer” or “group servant” responsible for taking care of the
group.
4. However, the group does not function independently. It works un-

der the oversight of the body of elders. The elders should provide
balanced direction and show initiative in caring for the group’s
needs, including training publishers in the group to take on ad-
ditional theocratic responsibilities. If the group is ever dissolved,
the elders should notify the Service Department.
5. Congregations: The circuit overseer helps the elders to prepare

the necessary paperwork and to verify that it is correct and
complete before he submits it to the Service Department. There
should be sufficient population in the target language to allow
the publishers to have a meaningful ministry. The publishers in-
volved must be spiritually strong and be able to keep the con-
gregation functioning actively. There is no specific number of el-
ders and ministerial servants needed to form a congregation.
However, the appointed brothers must be able to provide the nec-
essary spiritual oversight and to take the lead in the preaching

work. Any who are not native speakers should work diligently to
become conversant in the language of the congregation.
TERRITORY COVERAGE
6. The elders should be modest in deciding how much territory a
pregroup or group should work. The elders should direct the pub-
lishers and pioneers to focus on the areas where there is a high
concentration of those who speak the target language. In addi-
tion, since new ones will need to be directed to the host congre-
gation in order to progress, areas within a reasonable traveling
distance to the Kingdom Hall should receive the greatest atten-
tion. Once or twice a year, the elders may arrange to work more
distant areas. The elders should direct the coverage of the terri-
tory so that the publishers and pioneers use their strength and
valuable resources productively.—1 Cor. 9:26.
7. The search work is often a key to growth. As noted in the article
“Before Preaching, You May Need to Search” in the July 2012 Our
Kingdom Ministry, pages 4-7, the search work involves making
inquiries to locate those who speak a specific language. Imple-
menting the suggestions in the article will lead to a more pro-
ductive ministry.
8. A pregroup or group may engage in the preaching work outside
the territory of its host congregation. The service overseer of the
host congregation would take the lead in contacting the service
overseers of nearby congregations that have a large number in
their territory who speak the target language. However, the el-
ders should determine the number of congregations he will con-
tact. (See 24:6.) Good communication between the bodies of
elders and the circuit overseers involved will ensure that all lan-
guage groups receive a fine witness.
9. When a pregroup or group is ready to begin preaching in anoth-
er area, the service overseer may contact the body of elders of

the congregation there to request help in locating those who

speak the target language.
10. Congregation territory assignments in multilingual areas are
made according to language. The direction in chapter 9 of the
Organized book should be followed when working the territory.
At times there will be some overlapping of our efforts—for exam-
ple, when family members of the same household speak different
languages. By concentrating our ministry on people who best un-
derstand or prefer the language of the congregation we attend,
we can accomplish much good.
HOST CONGREGATION
11. The body of elders that hosts a pregroup or group must be will-
ing to take an active interest in developing the target-language
field. Generally, the host congregation should be in the proximi-
ty of the target-language community. Such a location enables the
publishers to make the most of their field service time and makes
it easier for interested persons to attend the meetings. Other fac-
tors to consider are the location of the publishers, the availabil-
ity of a suitable Kingdom Hall, and access to public transporta-
tion. At times, an adjustment may need to be made as to which
congregation serves as the host congregation. If so, the bodies
of elders involved should send a joint letter to the Service De-
partment explaining why the change is needed and stating that
the bodies of elders are in agreement with the change.
12. The body of elders should be reasonable in what they expect of
the publishers who are expending themselves in support of the
group. For example, it would be a kindness to consider reducing
the number of meeting parts that appointed brothers in the group
present on the program of the host congregation. Consideration
and mutual understanding will help all appointed brothers in the
congregation to work together in carrying the load of responsi-
bility.—Gal. 6:2, 5.

MEETINGS
13. Pregroups: Though a pregroup does not hold weekly meetings,
the body of elders of the host congregation may arrange for meet-
ings—or a portion of a weekly meeting, such as a public talk and/
or a Watchtower Study—to be held periodically in the language
of the pregroup. This would be helpful in determining the extent
of support for meetings and the potential for growth in that lan-
guage field.
14. Groups: In addition to the weekly meeting—or one portion of a
weekly meeting—held by a foreign-language group, the body of
elders of the host congregation may determine whether other
portions of congregation meetings should be added and how of-
ten the meetings should be held during the month. For example,
a group may hold a weekly Life and Ministry Meeting but arrange
a public talk once or twice a month.
15. A group should follow the meeting schedule as outlined in the
target-language edition of the Life and Ministry Meeting Work-
book. If the Life and Ministry Meeting Workbook is not produced
in the target language, the elders may request a Congregation
Bible Study schedule from the Service Department. The only por-
tion of the Life and Ministry Meeting that a foreign-language
group should not handle on its own is the local needs part when
it has been specifically chosen by the body of elders for the host
congregation.
16. Location: It is preferred that the meetings of pregroups and
groups be held in an auxiliary room while the host congregation
is conducting its meeting. In this way, those in the pregroup or
group will benefit from association with the host congregation.
However, if there is an exceptional circumstance and the elders
feel that such is not possible, the meeting of the pregroup or
group may be held at another time, preferably at the Kingdom
Hall. In such cases, all the bodies of elders using the Kingdom

Hall must give their approval. (See 21:33.) If the meeting of the
pregroup or group must be held at another time, publishers in
the pregroup or group are expected to attend the host congre-
gation’s regularly scheduled meetings.
17. Recordings and Audio/Video Tie-In: It is preferable for congre-

gation meetings to be conducted locally. However, if this is not
yet possible, a pregroup, group, or small or isolated congrega-
tion may request approval from their circuit overseer to view re-
corded meetings or portions of meetings in the target language,
preferably using JW Stream. (In most cases, the meetings avail-
able on JW Stream will be recorded on Monday evening and Sat-
urday morning. Thus, pregroups, groups, and small or isolated
congregations desiring to make use of such recordings should
hold their meetings at times that will allow them to view the cur-
rent week’s recordings.) The circuit overseer will approve which
pregroups, groups, or small or isolated congregations in his cir-
cuit will view such recordings and to what extent. (See 24:13-15.)
Some congregations may request approval to use the provision
occasionally for the public talk. If a small or isolated congrega-
tion is approved to view recorded meetings periodically, it should
strive to conduct all of its own meetings as soon as possible. Al-
though recordings may be used for the meetings, prayers should
be said locally.
18. If recordings of congregation meetings are not available, a pre-

group, group, or small or isolated congregation may request ap-
proval from the circuit overseer to tie in to the meetings or por-
tions of meetings of a congregation holding meetings in the target
language. (See 24:13-15.) The circuit overseer will approve which
pregroups, groups, or small or isolated congregations in his cir-
cuit will make use of this provision and to what extent. With the
exception of sign-language congregations or groups, congrega-
tions transmitting video should transmit only what transpires on
the stage. Footage of the audience or any other areas of the

venue should not be transmitted. It is important for the body of

elders of a host congregation to maintain good communication
with those in the pregroup or group and with the body of elders
of the congregation transmitting the meetings in the target lan-
guage.
19. Interpretation: Generally, simultaneous interpretation at the con-

gregation level for languages other than sign language is not rec-
ommended. (For direction on sign-language interpretation see
Chapter 20, paragraphs 28-35.) Some who are not fluent in the
language of the congregation find it helpful to prepare well for
the meetings in their mother tongue to the extent possible be-
fore listening to the meetings. Others may appreciate help in lo-
cating certain Bible texts. Publishers who know the target lan-
guage may also share the highlights of the meetings at another
appropriate time. However, if the body of elders feels there is mer-
it in having some of the program interpreted simultaneously, good
judgment is essential. If the number of qualified interpreters is
limited, it may not be possible to interpret each part. The parts
to be interpreted and who will interpret them should be assigned
well in advance. An auxiliary room should be used so as not to
distract others. Interpreters should be exemplary baptized pub-
lishers.
20. Recording Attendance: The attendance of the meetings of a pre-

group or group is included with that of the host congregation in
the Congregation Meeting Attendance Record (S-88). The only
exception to this is if streaming or recordings are used at a time
different from the host congregation’s meetings. In such cases,
the attendance would not be included with the host congrega-
tion’s, since it is expected that the pregroup or group would have
also attended the host congregation’s meeting. Neither would the
attendance of a pregroup or group that tied in to another con-
gregation’s meeting be included with the transmitting congrega-
tion’s attendance. In any case, a separate record of the atten-

dance of a pregroup or group may be kept so that the elders can

review its progress.
21. Songs: In rare instances when the song being sung in the main
auditorium is not available in the language of the pregroup or
group, it may be possible to turn off the sound from the main
auditorium and an alternate song may be selected and sung in
the auxiliary room, provided it does not cause disturbance for
those singing in the main auditorium.—od pp. 95-96 par. 44.
22. Memorial: If a qualified speaker is available, the body of elders
of the host congregation may make an arrangement to present
the Memorial talk in the language of the pregroup or group.—See
Chapter 20, paragraph 10, for direction on use of recordings of
the Memorial talk if a qualified speaker is not available.
23. During the Visit of the Circuit Overseer: A group may hold its
meetings even when the circuit overseer is visiting the host con-
gregation. However, the group will rejoin the host congregation
for all of the service talks and the public talk that the circuit over-
seer presents. Consideration could also be given to simultaneous
interpretation of the talks for the benefit of the group.
ASSISTING PUBLISHERS
24. A publisher desiring to support a foreign-language field should
be commended and encouraged to count the cost. (Luke 14:28)
This may involve learning a new language, adapting to a new cul-
ture, and traveling farther from home in order to support preach-
ing arrangements and meetings in the target language. Therefore,
elders should encourage publishers to do research in our publi-
cations and evaluate matters carefully and prayerfully. For exam-
ple, family heads must evaluate their children’s needs realistically,
putting their children’s spiritual well-being ahead of personal pref-
erences. (1 Cor. 10:24; w17.05 pp. 8-12; w16.10 pp. 13-17) Discus-
sions about what it takes to be successful in the foreign-language

field should be positive and realistic. If publishers decide to learn

another language, a copy of Suggestions for Publishers Learn-
ing Another Language (S-394) should be provided to them.
25. It may require considerable time for a publisher to become con-
versant in a new language. Many progress when they become ful-
ly absorbed in congregation activities. They should be encour-
aged to participate in the meetings as soon as possible, including
making themselves available to present student assignments on
the Life and Ministry Meeting. The elders may organize a special
reading class. (be p. 285) If appropriate and practical, arrange
for qualified publishers who are conversant in the language to
work in the ministry with those who are learning the language.
Use a simple vocabulary and speak clearly and correctly in your
conversations with them. Commend them for their efforts to prog-
ress in the language.
26. A publisher who has moved to a foreign-language congregation
may need personal assistance if his struggle with the language
is impeding his spiritual progress. Is the publisher beginning to
comprehend the congregation meetings? Does he participate at
the meetings, making brief comments? Does he give understand-
able presentations in the ministry? Is he staying spiritually strong,
cultivating the fruitage of the spirit, and working for the peace
of the congregation? The answers to such questions will guide
the elders in determining what may need to be recommended to
the publisher so that he maintains strong spirituality. In some
cases, they may recommend that the publisher consider return-
ing to a congregation in his native tongue.
CIRCUIT ASSEMBLIES AND CONVENTIONS

27. Questions regarding the interpretation of circuit assemblies and
conventions or tying in to or making use of recordings of foreign-
language circuit assemblies and conventions should be forward-
ed to the circuit overseer. If approval is given for foreign-language

pregroups or groups to view recordings of assemblies or conven-

tions in the target language, it is preferred that these record-
ings be viewed at the same time and in the same location that
their host congregation attends the event, perhaps in an auxilia-
ry room. If this is not possible, the pregroup or group should at-
tend the event with their host congregation and then tie in to or
watch a recording of the event in the target language at anoth-
er time and location.
SIGNS, YEARTEXT, AND INVITATIONS

28. Arrangements can be made for a Kingdom Hall sign to be post-
ed in the language of the group if it is determined that the group
is well-established and that it will continue to hold at least one
weekly meeting or portion of a meeting at the Kingdom Hall. (km
1/90 p. 8) If possible, the sign listing the schedule for the meet-
ing times of the congregations should also include the meeting
schedule of the group. Consideration can be given to display-
ing the yeartext in that language. (See 21:38.2.) The host con-
gregation may request invitations from the branch office in the
language of the group to advertise its weekly meeting(s). The
group should not make its own posters or flyers for advertising
its meetings.


CHAPTER TWENTY-FIVE
Shepherding
Paragraphs
Shepherding Calls ......................................................................................................... 3
Training Ministerial Servants ......................................................................... 4-6
Recognizing Spiritual Weakness ................................................................. 7-8
Giving Effective Counsel ......................................................................................... 9
Assisting Those With Marital Problems ........................................... 10-11
Assisting Sisters .......................................................................................................... 12
Assisting Inactive Ones ................................................................................. 13-18
Assisting Victims of Abuse ................................................................................ 19
Disfellowshipped or Disassociated Ones .............................................. 20
1. In imitation of Jehovah God and Jesus Christ, elders “shepherd

the flock of God” under their care. (1 Pet. 5:2, 3) This includes
protecting the congregation so that no one is lost through ne-
glect or because of the influence of Satan, the world, or apos-
tate “wolves.” (Acts 20:29, 30) It involves taking a loving and ac-
tive interest in the spiritual, emotional, and physical needs of
others. (Jas. 1:27; 2:15, 16) The objective of shepherding is to
impart a spiritual gift that is faith-strengthening and to provide
needed commendation and encouragement. (Rom. 1:11, 12) This
requires that elders maintain regular contact with each family
in the congregation. (Prov. 27:23) While group overseers should
arrange to shepherd periodically all in the groups, there is no
need for the body of elders to keep records of shepherding calls.
(See 7:2.4.) Nor is it necessary for the body of elders to assign
one elder to make general shepherding call assignments. Wheth-
er serving as group overseers or not, all elders should sense their

SHEPHERDING
personal responsibility to shepherd the members of the congre-

gation.—Eph. 4:15, 16.
2. One way elders shepherd the flock is by giving well-prepared

Scriptural talks. Another is by engaging members of the congre-
gation in positive, encouraging conversations before and after the
meetings and while sharing in the ministry. Still another means
is by making shepherding calls. Effective shepherding calls may
be made at the homes of the publishers, at the Kingdom Hall, or
at other appropriate locations. Shepherding may also be provid-
ed by telephone or by letter.—John 21:15-17.
SHEPHERDING CALLS
3. Elders and qualified ministerial servants who join the elders in
making shepherding calls should keep the following points in
mind:
(1) Prepare: Pray for Jehovah’s guidance as you consider

the needs and circumstances of the individual or family
to be visited. Although the visit should not be scripted,
it is appropriate to give advance thought to Scriptural
encouragement or counsel that will be most beneficial.
Do research in the publications of the faithful slave.
(Matt. 24:45; Heb. 12:12, 13) When making the visit, be
willing to be flexible, since the need may not be what
you had anticipated.
(2) Determine Whom to Take Along: It is usually best

for two elders or an elder and a qualified ministerial
servant to make a visit together. (See 25:12.) If you
expect to discuss a confidential or serious matter, two
elders should make the visit. Otherwise, a qualified
ministerial servant may join an elder, with the elder
taking the lead.—See 25:4-6.

SHEPHERDING
(3) Make an Appointment: It is usually best to make

an appointment. If there is a serious problem to be
discussed, use good judgment in deciding whether the
publisher should be informed of this before the visit.
(4) Be Encouraging: Maintain a relaxed and positive
atmosphere. Express genuine concern and be quick to
listen.—Jas. 1:19; 5:11.
(5) Use the Bible: The Bible should be the primary source
of direction and encouragement. Skillful use of God’s
Word allows Jehovah’s thoughts to reach the heart of
the publisher.—Isa. 30:21; Heb. 4:12.
(6) Duration of the Call: Keep to the agreed time. If
necessary, another visit can be arranged.—Eccl. 3:1;
Matt. 5:37.
(7) Pray: In your prayer, mention the person or family by
name and any adversity or trial they may be dealing
with.—Phil. 4:6, 7; Col. 4:12.
(8) Respect Privacy and Maintain Confidentiality: Do not
meddle in personal matters. (1 Thess. 4:11) Spiritual
shepherds promote a loving, familylike spirit in the
congregation by being trustworthy friends who are
known to maintain confidentiality.—Prov. 10:19; 20:19;
25:9.
TRAINING MINISTERIAL SERVANTS

4. Timothy learned by serving alongside the apostle Paul. (2 Tim. 2:
1, 2) Elders imitate Paul’s example by taking qualified ministeri-
al servants along on shepherding calls when appropriate. This
provides an opportunity for these ministerial servants to observe
firsthand the teaching, faith, patience, and love required of Chris-
tian overseers.—1 Tim. 3:1.

SHEPHERDING
5. Prior to making a shepherding call with a ministerial servant, the

elder should discuss with him how he hopes to handle the shep-
herding call. The ministerial servant could be asked to prepare an
encouraging Scriptural point or a faith-strengthening experience
that would fit the needs of the individual or family to be visited.
The ministerial servant could also be asked to conclude the vis-
it with prayer. After the visit, the elder should review with him
how the visit went, providing commendation and suggestions as
needed.
6. Under the direction of the elders, a group servant along with an-
other ministerial servant may make spiritually encouraging visits
on those in the group. The group servant should keep the elders
updated after each such visit. If a confidential or serious matter
comes up during the visit, the group servant should tactfully in-
form the publisher that it would be best for the matter to be han-
dled by the elders.
RECOGNIZING SPIRITUAL WEAKNESS

7. Symptoms of spiritual weakness may include loss of enthusiasm
for the truth, neglecting daily Bible reading and personal study
or attendance at congregation meetings, missing entire months
of field service activity, undue emphasis on the pursuit of plea-
sure or material things, or criticizing the elders and the organi-
zation.
8. When shepherds detect signs of spiritual weakness, they use the

Scriptures to remind the publisher of the importance of praying
for holy spirit; reading the Bible daily; studying Christian publica-
tions; meditating on Scriptural matters; regularly attending meet-
ings, assemblies, and conventions; regularly participating in field
service; and being willing to accept spiritual help from those tak-
ing the lead.—Ps. 1:1, 2; 77:12; Luke 11:13; Acts 20:20, 21; Heb.
10:23-25; 13:17.

SHEPHERDING
GIVING EFFECTIVE COUNSEL

9. Elders are alert to give Scriptural counsel before bad trends be-
come ingrained. (Prov. 27:5, 6) Prayerful advance thought to the
content of the counsel and how you will present it will increase
its effectiveness. (Gal. 6:1) The following points will be helpful:
(1) Take sufficient time to listen and get all the facts.
—Prov. 18:13; Jas. 1:19.
(2) The tone of the conversation should be warm and

loving. The publishers are Jehovah’s sheep and should
be treated with tenderness. (Ps. 100:3) Exhortation
should be prefaced by specific, sincere commendation.
(3) Elders should base their expressions on the Bible and

Bible-based publications, not their opinion.
(4) On sensitive matters, such as dress and grooming and

entertainment, it is wise to seek the observations of
another elder before providing counsel.—Eccl. 7:16.
ASSISTING THOSE WITH MARITAL PROBLEMS

10. If a Christian experiences marital difficulties resulting in one or
both parties approaching the elders to seek help, the elders
should provide loving counsel based on the Scriptures and Chris-
tian publications. If both mates are members of the congrega-
tion, it is usually best to have both present. However, if only one
mate is present, the elders will discuss what that one can do to im-
prove the situation. Because elders cannot know everything that
occurs in a marriage, they should avoid taking sides.—Prov. 18:13.
11. If a Christian is contemplating separation, the elders should di-
rect his attention to the Scriptures and Christian publications.
(1 Cor. 7:10, 11; lvs pp. 250-251) If the Christian is contemplat-
ing divorce, the elders should explain that a legal divorce of itself

SHEPHERDING
does not free an individual to remarry. (Matt. 19:9) Elders should

not encourage separation or divorce; neither should they forbid
such. These are personal matters, and each Christian will have to
accept the consequences of his decision. (Gal. 6:7) However, the
elders may determine that a publisher’s decisions in this area dis-
qualify the individual from receiving special privileges normally
given to those viewed as exemplary.—See 2:4; 8:9.
ASSISTING SISTERS
12. An elder or ministerial servant must never meet alone with or be-
come the sole confidant of a sister who is not closely related to
him. (Prov. 22:3; Jer. 17:9) If possible, the body of elders should
arrange for different pairs of elders to shepherd a sister who
needs ongoing assistance. It is appropriate for an elder to speak
with a sister while in full view of others at her home, at congre-
gation meetings, or in the field ministry.
ASSISTING INACTIVE ONES

13. Jehovah never forgets his worshippers who stray from the fold.
(Ezek. 34:11) Elders have the responsibility to search diligently
for sheep who have strayed. (Matt. 18:12-14; 1 Thess. 5:14; rj
pp. 4-5) Helping a fellow Christian who has become inactive calls
for prayerful reliance on God, the guidance of his spirit, and skill-
ful use of his Word. Elders may read scriptures, review an arti-
cle, discuss meeting highlights, pray with the inactive one, and
so forth. (2 Cor. 1:3-7; Jas. 5:13-15) A visit, a telephone call, or a
letter can accomplish much good.—w08 11/15 pp. 8-16; rj pp. 12-
15; cl pp. 240-249.
14. To ensure that inactive ones are not overlooked, the Congrega-
tion Service Committee should assign each one of such to a field
service group. Though the names of inactive ones should not ap-
pear on any list that is posted on the information board, the

SHEPHERDING
group overseer and his assistant should be made aware of the

person’s circumstances and contact information.
15. Each year prior to the special talk and Memorial, a special effort
should be made to contact all inactive ones living in the congre-
gation’s territory. If group overseers and their assistants need
help, the service committee may ask other elders and qualified
ministerial servants to work along with the group overseers. The
brothers making such visits should be warm and upbuilding. In
addition to extending an invitation to the special talk and the Me-
morial, ensure that the inactive publisher is provided a copy of
the Return to Jehovah brochure. If circumstances permit, Scrip-
tural encouragement tailored to the individual’s needs may be
shared.
16. If the inactive one expresses a desire to resume activity with the
congregation, a Bible study may be offered. If the study is ac-
cepted, the service committee will then determine who will con-
duct the study and for how long, as well as what publication
should be studied.
17. If a person has been inactive for only a short time, encourage-
ment and practical assistance from an experienced publisher may
be all that is needed to reactivate the individual. On the other
hand, before inviting a longtime inactive one to share in the min-
istry, two elders should meet with him to see if he meets the ba-
sic requirements. This is similar to the procedure for approving
new publishers as outlined in chapter 8 of Organized to Do Je-
hovah’s Will.
18. An inactive one who has been involved in serious wrongdoing and
desires to return to the congregation may feel that if he confess-
es his wrongdoing to the elders, he will be disfellowshipped. But
he will not be expelled from the congregation if he has discon-
tinued the unscriptural practice and is genuinely repentant.—Isa.
1:18; 55:7; 2 Cor. 7:10, 11; Jas. 5:13-16; w08 11/15 pp. 14-15
pars. 12-13; rj pp. 10-14.

SHEPHERDING
ASSISTING VICTIMS OF ABUSE

19. See 14:12-17.
DISFELLOWSHIPPED OR DISASSOCIATED ONES

20. There is no formal arrangement to visit disfellowshipped or dis-
associated individuals each year. Rather, elders should use good
judgment in determining whether and how to make brief contact
with such ones. For example, if a disfellowshipped individual gives
some evidence of changing his ways, an elder could provide him
with a copy of the Return to Jehovah brochure and remind him
of the steps he can take toward being reinstated. (Isa. 1:18; rj
pp. 10-14) Such brief contact could be made while an elder en-
gages in the house-to-house ministry. While shopping, an elder
may see a disfellowshipped person who has not been contacted
in years and choose to approach him. An elder may visit a dis-
fellowshipped person at any time that is appropriate or even make
contact by telephone. Elders should keep the coordinator of the
body of elders updated when such contact is made. Of course,
contact should not be made with active apostates, with those
who are trying to lead others into sin, or with those who have
made it known that they want nothing to do with the Christian
congregation.

CHAPTER TWENTY-SIX
Disasters and
Emergencies
Paragraphs
Preparedness ................................................................................................................ 1-6
Confirm Contact Information ......................................................................... 2
Make Arrangements for Those With Special Needs .................... 3
Secure Congregation Records ....................................................................... 4
Review Arrangements With the Body of Elders .............................. 5
Schedule a Local Needs Part ......................................................................... 6
Prepare Emergency Supplies ............................................................... 6.1
Have an Evacuation Plan ....................................................................... 6.2
Maintain Communication ....................................................................... 6.3
When a Disaster Occurs in the Local Area ..................................... 7-12
Contact All Publishers .......................................................................................... 7
Update the Coordinator of the Body of Elders ............................... 8
Update the Circuit Overseer ........................................................................... 9
Be Safety Conscious ........................................................................................... 10
Shepherd the Publishers .................................................................................. 11
Provide Ongoing Practical Support ........................................................ 12
When a Disaster Occurs in Another Area ............................................. 13
PREPAREDNESS
1. If advance warning of a disaster is given, elders should ensure
that all publishers are in a safe location and, if time permits,
should obtain and distribute any supplies that may be needed.

DISASTERS AND EMERGENCIES
The following steps should be taken in preparation for disasters

and various types of emergencies, even if it seems that such are
not likely in your area:
2. Confirm Contact Information: The secretary should maintain a
list containing the contact information and emergency contact
information for all publishers, including inactive ones. This list
should also include the circuit overseer’s contact information.
Whenever there is an update to this list, the secretary should
promptly provide a copy to all elders. Each elder should ensure
that he has ready access to this information. Keep in mind that
following a disaster, electronic files may not be accessible if pow-
er or Internet service is disrupted.
3. Make Arrangements for Those With Special Needs: The Con-
gregation Service Committee together with the field service group
overseers should develop a plan to assist those with special
needs, such as the elderly.
4. Secure Congregation Records: Congregation records and con-
fidential files should be secure and safely stored at all times. In
addition, the Congregation Service Committee should develop a
plan to protect the records in the event of an impending disas-
ter.—See 22:10.
5. Review Arrangements With the Body of Elders: Annually, dur-
ing a quarterly elders’ meeting, the local preparations should be
reviewed.
6. Schedule a Local Needs Part: Annually, use one of the local
needs parts on the midweek meeting to review with the congre-
gation how to prepare for a disaster or emergency. When doing
so, consider material from Awake! 2017 No. 5, page 4, under the
heading “Before—Prepare!” and the box on page 6, “Do You Have
What You Need?” Emphasize the following recommendations:
(1) Prepare Emergency Supplies: Store at least a
three-day supply of emergency items, including safe

drinking water, food, and medications, in a “go bag”

that can be quickly taken in an evacuation. This bag
should also include important documents, such as
passports and those related to identification,
insurance, property ownership, and prescriptions.
(2) Have an Evacuation Plan: Consider various safe
locations you may evacuate to, depending on the type
of emergency. Follow the directions of local authorities
and the elders. Consider what items should be taken in
an evacuation, such as emergency supplies and
important documents.
(3) Maintain Communication: Keep in regular
communication with your field service group overseer.
WHEN A DISASTER OCCURS

IN THE LOCAL AREA
7. Contact All Publishers: When the congregation is affected by a
disaster, elders should quickly make an assessment of the imme-
diate needs of the publishers. Group overseers should take the
lead in locating each family in their field service group, including
inactive ones, and should inquire of their well-being.
(1) Determine and address immediate needs, such as
medical care, food, water, shelter, clothing, and other
basic items.
(2) Determine the condition of the brothers. Are any
displaced, missing, injured, or deceased?
(3) Determine the basic condition of their homes. Are there
power or utility outages? Are any homes damaged or
destroyed?
8. Update the Coordinator of the Body of Elders: As soon
as possible (usually within one day), group overseers should

communicate their findings to the coordinator of the body of el-

ders, even if the information is incomplete or no one has been
affected. Continue to provide daily updates until all of the pub-
lishers have been accounted for.
9. Update the Circuit Overseer: Once this information is gathered,

the coordinator of the body of elders should immediately inform
the circuit overseer of any damage and the health condition of
congregation members. He should also inform the circuit over-
seer if the Kingdom Hall was damaged or destroyed. Continue to
provide daily updates until all of the publishers have been ac-
counted for. When the circuit overseer has received the report
from the elders, he will promptly contact the branch office. The
branch office will determine whether there is a need for further
assistance.
10. Be Safety Conscious: Before volunteers assigned by those coor-

dinating the relief effort arrive, it is expected that those in the af-
fected and surrounding areas will reach out to try to assist with
the immediate needs of those in their congregations. However,
when providing assistance, it is vital that all remember to use
modesty in what they are qualified to do. It may be that the sit-
uation is hazardous or that buildings could be susceptible to col-
lapse. No one should endanger himself for material possessions.
11. Shepherd the Publishers: Give spiritual and emotional support

to the congregation, and resume congregation meetings as quick-
ly as possible.—od p. 162 pars. 15-16.
12. Provide Ongoing Practical Support: If the damage was exten-

sive or the relief effort will continue for weeks or months, elders
should be alert to do the following:
(1) Identify congregation publishers who could offer

temporary accommodations for those who are
displaced or for construction volunteers.

(2) Ensure that relief supplies are distributed adequately

and equitably to families in need.—Acts 6:1.
(3) Accompany Local Design/Construction Department

(LDC) field personnel when visiting publishers to survey
property damage.
(4) Help publishers determine if they qualify to apply for

government aid. Before they submit an application for
such, ensure that publishers understand what would be
required of them after they receive the help. These are
personal matters for publishers to consider before
entering into an agreement.
(5) Help the LDC to determine which publishers qualify for

reconstruction assistance from the organization, based
on direction from the branch office.—od pp. 119-120
pars. 12-15.
WHEN A DISASTER OCCURS

IN ANOTHER AREA
13. If a disaster occurs in another area, elders can remind the pub-
lishers of the following points:
(1) We should remember our brothers and sisters in our

prayers.—2 Cor. 1:8-11.
(2) Those desiring to provide monetary assistance may

donate to the worldwide work. In this way, the
organization can help to care for the needs of any in
the worldwide brotherhood.
(3) Materials or supplies should not be sent to the disaster

area unless specifically requested by the brothers in
charge. This will ensure an orderly relief effort and the
proper distribution of goods.

(4) The branch office should not be called merely for

information, as this can tie up phone lines that are
needed to handle incoming calls from the disaster area.
(5) Publishers should not travel to the affected area to
help unless they have been invited to do so by those
coordinating the relief effort. Volunteers should have an
approved Local Design/Construction Volunteer
Application (DC-50) or Application for Volunteer
Program (A-19) on file.

CHAPTER TWENTY-SEVEN
Weddings
Paragraphs
Officiating at Weddings ...................................................................................... 2-5
Use of the Kingdom Hall ........................................................................................ 6
1. Weddings that are organized in harmony with Bible principles hon-

or Jehovah. This is especially true with regard to weddings that
are held at the Kingdom Hall.
OFFICIATING AT WEDDINGS
2. If available, an elder should be used to officiate at a Christian
wedding. A couple may request a specific elder to deliver their
wedding talk. Otherwise, the body of elders may select an el-
der to do so. In many lands, the government authorizes minis-
ters of Jehovah’s Witnesses to solemnize marriages.—w06 10/15
pp. 18-23.
3. An elder may officiate at a wedding of two Christians or of two un-
baptized publishers who are progressing toward baptism. (1 Cor.
7:39; 2 Cor. 6:14; w04 7/1 pp. 30-31) Before agreeing to do so,
he should consider the following:
(1) Confirm that the prospective bride and groom
are Scripturally and legally free to marry, and confirm
their standing in their respective congregations. (See
2:4.) Meet with the couple to make tactful but
straightforward inquiries about their conduct during
courtship.
(2) If either the prospective bride or groom was married
before, he or she should have provided convincing

WEDDINGS
evidence to the elders that establishes his or her

Scriptural freedom to remarry. (Heb. 13:4; see 12:71-
76.) The elder officiating at the wedding should confirm
this is the case and should review a copy of the
divorce decree to confirm that the divorce was
finalized. If there is any question about the matter of
Scriptural freedom, the body of elders should write to
the Service Department to clarify matters before the
wedding.
(3) An elder officiating a marriage must confirm that he
is permitted by law to solemnize a marriage in the town
or community where the wedding will take place. (Rom.
13:1) The local authorities may require that a minister
who performs weddings register and provide proof of
his ordination. In many cases, the authorities will
accept a letter signed by the body of elders confirming
the brother’s appointment as an elder in the local
congregation. If this does not suffice, the elder should
determine the exact requirements and then, if
necessary, write to the Service Department for
assistance. If the elder is not permitted by law to
administer the vows, another elder who meets such
legal requirements may administer the vows
immediately after the wedding talk. The elder who
administers the vows would complete the necessary
documents.
4. Those who are engaged to be married are in particular need of
shepherding by loving elders. Scriptural encouragement can help
them make a success of their wedding and their future marriage.
They should be encouraged to do research in the Bible and Chris-
tian publications. Such prayerful study will strengthen them to
remain chaste during courtship and will help them to plan their
wedding in a way that will honor Jehovah and leave them with a
clean conscience. (1 Cor. 10:31, 32) For example, if they are plan-

WEDDINGS
ning a wedding reception, they should be reminded to review the

latest material published by the faithful slave.—w06 10/15 pp. 18-
31; w00 5/1 pp. 19-22; w97 4/15 pp. 23-26; lvs pp. 180-181, 251-
252.
5. The wedding talk is based on the outline “Honorable Marriage in
God’s Sight” (S-41). The talk should highlight the God-given re-
sponsibilities that married couples must assume and carry out in
harmony with the Scriptures. The talk should be delivered with
love, warmth, dignity, honor, and seriousness. The speaker should
resist the temptation to make funny remarks just for the sake of
making the audience laugh, since this could betray a lack of re-
spect for the audience and for God.
USE OF THE KINGDOM HALL

6. A prospective bride and groom who wish to use a Kingdom Hall
for their wedding should submit a written request to the elders
well in advance of the wedding date indicating the specific day
and time they desire to use the hall. (od pp. 110-111; km 11/08
p. 3) The Congregation Service Committee should meet prompt-
ly to consider the following:
(1) Confirm that the prospective bride and groom are
Scripturally and legally free to marry and that they are
in good standing in their respective congregations.
(See 2:4.) If this is true of two unbaptized publishers
who are progressing toward baptism, they may be
approved to use the Kingdom Hall. An undocumented
alien may use the Kingdom Hall for his wedding if he
meets the civil marriage requirements and he is
otherwise qualified as outlined above.—See 29:3-7.
(2) The time of the wedding and any rehearsal should not
interfere with scheduled meetings or other scheduled
programs at the Kingdom Hall. If other congregations

WEDDINGS
share the hall, the service committee should confirm

the hall’s availability with the other service committees.
(3) The service committee decides whether there is a need
to make a brief announcement to the congregation
about the use of the Kingdom Hall for a wedding.
(4) The service committee should be kept up-to-date on
the couple’s plans regarding the use of the Kingdom
Hall. For example, any decoration of the Kingdom Hall
or rearrangement of the chairs must be approved by
the service committee. Only music from “Sing Out
Joyfully” to Jehovah should be used. The wedding
party should not include any disfellowshipped person
or anyone whose lifestyle grossly conflicts with Bible
principles; baptism is not a requirement. Anyone
assigned to take photographs or to record the
ceremony should do nothing that would cause a
distraction during the talk or that in other ways would
detract from the seriousness and dignity of the
occasion.
(5) If it is learned that the couple has engaged in serious
wrongdoing that will require handling by a judicial
committee, the couple may not use the Kingdom Hall. If
neither is disfellowshipped, it is left to the discretion of
the elder as to whether he will officiate the wedding at
another location.

CHAPTER TWENTY-EIGHT
Prisons
Paragraphs
Contact Congregation .......................................................................................... 2-4
Correspondence With the Branch Office ............................................ 5-7
Communication With Prison Officials ......................................................... 8
Referrals and Contact With Prisoners ........................................................ 9
Ministry ......................................................................................................................... 10-16
Literature ............................................................................................................... 10-12
Reporting Activity .......................................................................................... 13-14
Reporting Baptisms ............................................................................................. 15
Publishers Who Transfer to Another Facility ................................... 16
Conducting Meetings ....................................................................................... 17-20
Memorial ........................................................................................................................ 19
Extended Meetings ............................................................................................... 20
Inmates Serving in an Appointed Capacity ......................................... 21
Conducting Judicial Hearings With Inmates ...................................... 22
1. One or more prisons may be located within the congregation’s

assigned territory. Though visits to prisoners are often restrict-
ed, it may be possible for publishers to receive permission from
prison authorities to visit individuals who have requested spiritu-
al help. (Matt. 5:3) The guidelines in this chapter may apply to
other facilities where access to the general public is not allowed.
CONTACT CONGREGATION
2. The branch office will assign one or more congregations to serve
as contact congregations to take the lead in following up initial

PRISONS
interest and in caring for the long-term spiritual needs of pris-

oners who study the Bible and become Jehovah’s Witnesses.
3. The Congregation Service Committee of the contact congrega-

tion selects qualified, baptized, adult publishers to participate in
this feature of the ministry. (Matt. 10:16) The service overseer
takes the lead in coordinating their work. If needed, qualified pub-
lishers from nearby congregations may be included if approved
by their service committees. Appropriate portions of this chap-
ter should be shared orally with publishers approved to partic-
ipate in this aspect of the ministry.
4. If a congregation is unable to continue to serve as the contact

congregation, the service committee should send a letter to the
Service Department providing the reason. If the brothers know
of another congregation that is willing to serve in their place, the
letter should be approved by both service committees. The branch
office will indicate in writing whether or not the recommendation
is approved.
CORRESPONDENCE WITH
THE BRANCH OFFICE
5. The congregation secretary is responsible for sending correspon-
dence to the Preaching Needs Desk in the Service Department
regarding the work at the facility. The complete name and ad-
dress of the prison should always be included in the correspon-
dence. If there is a need to communicate about the spiritual needs
of a specific prisoner, include his name and identification num-
ber, if known.
6. The Prison Information (S-68) form is used to submit updated

information to the Service Department regarding facilities. If sev-
eral different yards or units are in the facility, a separate form for
each unit should be submitted.

PRISONS
7. For direction regarding an inmate who has been accused of child

abuse and who is now associating with a congregation, see Chap-
ter 14, paragraphs 9 and 27.
COMMUNICATION WITH PRISON OFFICIALS

8. A pleasant, persistent approach is often successful. Elders should
keep appointments with inmates and officials and adhere to the
regulations of the institution. When proof of ordination as a min-
ister is required, the elders should write an official letter using
the congregation’s letterhead. The letter should clearly identify
the individual as an ordained minister of the congregation, state
the date of his or her ordination (baptism), and be signed by the
Congregation Service Committee. If the letter is not accepted by
a facility, the elders may write to the Service Department for fur-
ther direction, including a copy of the letter that was rejected.
REFERRALS AND CONTACT

WITH PRISONERS
9. When the contact congregation receives a referral from the
branch office, the service overseer should follow up promptly. He
may be able to provide literature and assign qualified publishers
to visit regularly and, if possible, conduct one-on-one or group
studies at the facility. If personal contact is not possible, perhaps
a qualified publisher approved by the Congregation Service Com-
mittee could be assigned to correspond with a prisoner. Sisters
should correspond only with female prisoners and brothers should
correspond with male prisoners. The return address of the King-
dom Hall or another appropriate address may be used instead of
the publisher’s home address in order to protect the privacy of
the publisher. However, the return address of the branch office
should not be used.

PRISONS
MINISTRY
10. Literature: It is preferred that a prisoner initiate requests for vis-
its or literature through publishers approved to visit the facility
or by making a request directly to the branch office. This allows
the individual to give evidence of his genuine interest and may
assist publishers in being granted access to the facility. If need-
ed, the secretary of the contact congregation may contact the
Preaching Needs Desk in the Service Department on behalf of
the inmate. For example, some facilities do not allow visitors to
bring literature to inmates but do permit the branch office to
mail literature to the person. Disfellowshipped inmates may ob-
tain literature (including special-request items) upon request. Ba-
sic publications may also be provided for the library at such fa-
cilities.
11. When a facility permits publishers to deliver literature to inmates,
the congregation should request it as part of the regular congre-
gation literature request.
12. Only literature from the Teaching Toolbox and publications need-
ed for congregation meetings should be provided, depending on
the needs of Bible students. Special-request items should gen-
erally be provided only for baptized publishers, unbaptized pub-
lishers, and those who are progressing well in their studies. (See
28:10.) In such cases, the elders of the contact congregation will
request these items. Special consideration can be given to those
who suffer from impaired vision or when there are other exten-
uating circumstances.
13. Reporting Activity: Placements, video showings, and Bible stud-
ies conducted in a prison should be reported by publishers in the
usual manner. Even if many attend a Bible study being held in a
prison, one study is counted for the month and one return visit
is counted each time the study is conducted. While field service
time is not counted for conducting or participating in congrega-
tion meetings held in prison, pioneers may report hour credit for

PRISONS
such activity. (See 9:11-13.) Non-pioneers should be shown extra

consideration for their participation in this form of service.—See
23:24-25.
14. Unbaptized or baptized publishers who are inmates should be
counted as publishers in the contact congregation, and their field
service reports should be included in the congregation report.
15. Reporting Baptisms: The contact congregation should inform the
Service Department of baptisms performed in a prison if the cir-
cuit overseer did not already do so in connection with a circuit
assembly.
16. Publishers Who Transfer to Another Facility: When an inmate
is transferred to another facility, the Congregation’s Publisher Re-
cord (S-21) and a letter of introduction should be sent to the con-
tact congregation caring for that facility.
CONDUCTING MEETINGS
17. Extensions of regular congregation meetings can be established
when at least one baptized or unbaptized publisher will attend
regularly. The attendance should be included with the contact
congregation’s meeting attendance. The manner in which meet-
ings are conducted in prisons must, as closely as possible, mir-
ror the manner in which meetings are conducted at the Kingdom
Hall. Disfellowshipped individuals should be treated the same as
they would be at the meetings at the Kingdom Hall.
18. Only qualified elders and ministerial servants should conduct
meetings in prison. These brothers could be selected from the
contact congregation or from a neighboring congregation. (See
28:21.) If appointed brothers are not available, the inmates could
meet as a group to view a recording of the meeting or to con-
sider the material together. If an inmate who has been accused
of child abuse attends meetings in prison or otherwise associates
with a congregation, see Chapter 14, paragraphs 9 and 27.

PRISONS
19. Memorial: Every effort should be made to arrange for a qualified

elder or a ministerial servant to conduct the Memorial. If this is
not possible, the inmates may be able to view a recording of the
talk or they could discuss the Bible account at Matthew 26:17-
30; Luke 22:7-23, 28-30; and 1 Corinthians 11:20-31. (w93 2/1
p. 31) Memorial attendance figures should be added to the total
congregation count.
20. Extended Meetings: Some facilities allow for an annual or semi-
annual meeting at which the inmates are able to meet together
for a longer period of time than is usual. This could be a fine op-
portunity for baptisms, reviews of assembly and convention pro-
grams, and so forth. Such extended meetings should not include
arrangements in which congregation publishers, especially mem-
bers of the opposite sex, are able to mingle freely with the pris-
oners. It may be that inmates are allowed to invite family mem-
bers to attend an event. However, experience has shown that it
is best for those of the opposite sex, even though related to
prisoners, not to be invited to such meetings. Rather, invitations
should be extended only to those who will share in the program;
volunteers who participate regularly in witnessing at the prison;
and possibly a few responsible, experienced ones who would be
able to encourage and shepherd the inmates so that an excel-
lent witness is given. Elders in the circuit or from nearby congre-
gations who have presented assembly or convention parts could
be invited to present this information along with the parts pre-
sented by the local elders. The invitation process should be close-
ly monitored by the elders responsible for caring for the prison
witnessing.
INMATES SERVING
IN AN APPOINTED CAPACITY
21. While inmates who make spiritual progress may qualify to be bap-
tized, they do not qualify to serve as ministerial servants or el-

PRISONS
ders while in prison. (1 Tim. 3:2, 7, 10; Titus 1:6, 7) They also do
not qualify to serve as auxiliary or regular pioneers. Of course, if
an appointed person in the congregation is imprisoned for main-
taining his Christian integrity, the body of elders may determine
that he can continue serving in an appointed capacity even while
imprisoned.
CONDUCTING JUDICIAL HEARINGS

WITH INMATES
22. When a judicial committee endeavors to meet with an incarcer-
ated accused wrongdoer, the secular authorities may not allow
all three members to meet with him at the same time. If so, a
judicial committee should not handle the case over the telephone
by means of a conference call or a videoconference. The elders
should endeavor to arrange for two members of the committee
to meet with him in person in a confidential setting. Others should
not be present when the accused person is interviewed. After-
ward, the two brothers would discuss the case with the third
member of the committee, and the judicial committee may then
render a decision. Two members of the judicial committee should
inform him of the decision. If he is disfellowshipped, the elders
should inform him of his option to appeal, and so forth. If the
authorities allow only one elder at a time to speak with him, the
judicial committee should decide in advance what questions to
ask. Then two on the judicial committee should talk with him sep-
arately and ask the same questions. Thereafter, the judicial com-
mittee should convene to make a decision. In unusual cases, con-
tact the Service Department.

PRISONS

CHAPTER TWENTY-NINE
Legal Matters
Paragraphs
Personal Legal Advice ............................................................................................... 2
Undocumented Aliens ........................................................................................... 3-7
Social Events ..................................................................................................................... 8
Child Custody .................................................................................................................... 9
Charitable Donation Programs ....................................................................... 10
Matching Donation Programs ................................................................. 10.1
Volunteer Service Donation Programs ............................................ 10.2
Fund-Raising Programs ................................................................................ 10.3
1. In harmony with Matthew 22:21, 37, Romans 13:1-7, Philippians

1:7, and 1 Timothy 2:1-2, the congregation respects the relative
authority of secular governments. To ensure compliance with ap-
plicable laws, two elders, if possible, should call the Legal De-
partment immediately in the following situations:
(1) The elders receive a request or an order to disclose
confidential information, such as a request from an
individual, the authorities, an attorney, or the media.
(2) The elders learn of an accusation of child abuse,
abuse of the elderly, or abuse of the disabled.—See
Chapter 14.
(3) The elders learn of threatened or actual legal action
against the organization, the local congregation, or an
elder in connection with a congregation matter.
(4) A manager insists that no further visits be made by
Jehovah’s Witnesses to a subdivision or an apartment

LEGAL MATTERS
complex, a government official seeks to impose some

restriction on our ministry, or violent opposition to our
ministry arises.—See 23:21-23.
(5) A publisher while in the ministry or in any

other theocratic activity was involved in an incident
resulting in serious bodily injury or death. (See 21:30.)
If an elder is contacted by anyone who requests a
statement, he should not discuss the incident or
publishers involved, nor should he answer any
questions. Rather, the caller’s name, telephone number,
title, and the office he represents should be obtained,
and he should be told that the elders will contact an
attorney before responding to any questions.
PERSONAL LEGAL ADVICE

2. As spiritual shepherds, elders do not involve themselves in the
legal matters of individual Christians. (Gal. 6:5) In their role as
elders, they should not offer legal advice or encourage publish-
ers to contact the Legal Department for legal advice on person-
al legal questions. For example, if a publisher asks about a re-
straining order or an order of protection, the elders should politely
tell him that this is a personal legal matter that does not involve
the congregation. Elders should not try to enforce such orders
between private parties.
UNDOCUMENTED ALIENS
3. Elders take a keen interest in the spiritual, emotional, and phys-
ical needs of fellow believers who are “foreign residents.” (Ps.
146:9; 1 John 3:17, 18; w17.05 pp. 3-7) An individual who asks
about meeting the legal requirements for residency should be en-
couraged to consult Scriptural references such as Romans 13:1-7,

LEGAL MATTERS
Titus 3:1, and 1 Peter 2:13-17 and to do research in our publica-

tions.
4. A foreigner may wish to obtain qualified legal assistance for such
personal legal matters. It is not the responsibility of congrega-
tion elders to research and enforce secular laws involving undo-
cumented aliens.—Philem. 8-22; w77 pp. 191-192.
5. All Christians are obligated to obey the laws of the land in which
they live and thus give “the superior authorities” their relative
subjection. (Rom. 13:1) For this reason, an undocumented alien
would not qualify for appointment as an elder, a ministerial ser-
vant, or a regular or auxiliary pioneer until he has obtained legal
residency or taken genuine steps to procure such. (1 Tim. 3:7,
10) He may not be assigned to oversee any congregation respon-
sibility. Additionally, although he may assist with the cleaning and
construction of his own Kingdom Hall and with the cleaning of
his own Assembly Hall, he may not work with construction or
maintenance on other Kingdom Halls or Assembly Halls. However,
he may comment at congregation meetings and present student
parts in the midweek meeting. If he is exemplary in every other
way, he may be granted certain additional privileges, just as Paul
used Onesimus to a certain extent. (Col. 4:7-9; Philem. 13) For
example, he may be allowed to pass microphones and help with
literature. He may also be granted use of the Kingdom Hall for a
wedding if he meets the Scriptural and civil marriage require-
ments.—See 27:6.
6. When an undocumented alien requests in good faith or obtains
permission from the proper governmental authority to reside in
the country, his situation changes because he is thereby demon-
strating more fully his subjection to “the superior authorities.”
(Rom. 13:1) Once the publisher has sought permission to be in
the country, he is no longer viewed as a fugitive and thereafter
may enjoy privileges of service even if Caesar takes an extended
period of time to process the application. Thus, if he is otherwise

LEGAL MATTERS
spiritually qualified and, if employed, is working without resort-

ing to fraudulent means, he may serve as an elder, a ministerial
servant, or a regular or auxiliary pioneer. When recommendations
are submitted for such ones to be appointed to serve as elders
or ministerial servants, their situation should be fully explained
to the circuit overseer.—See Addendum to “Shepherd the Flock
of God”—1 Peter 5:2 for any additional direction that may apply
locally.
7. If a publisher makes a request for residency but is later denied
and remains in the country illegally, he would no longer qualify
to serve as an elder, a ministerial servant, or a regular or auxil-
iary pioneer. It is also not honest for a publisher to use falsified
documents of any kind or to submit what he knows to be inac-
curate information when applying to a government agency for a
certain status or privilege. If the government becomes aware of
this, the individual may face some sort of sanction on a charge
of fraud and the congregation could come into disrepute. In such
cases, further action on the part of the congregation may be nec-
essary. Before proceeding, elders should send a letter to the Ser-
vice Department for direction. However, if one applied for or ob-
tained legal status through such means before coming to an
accurate knowledge of Scriptural principles, the elders would not
make this an issue.—1 Cor. 6:11.
SOCIAL EVENTS
8. The congregation does not organize or sponsor social events. In-
dividuals who host social events bear personal responsibility for
what occurs at the event. Such individuals should not state or
imply that they are acting on behalf of the congregation. They
should not use terms such as “congregation picnic” or “congrega-
tion gathering.” (od pp. 127-128 par. 19) Thus, invitations should
not be posted on the information board, nor should announce-
ments regarding social events be made from the platform.

LEGAL MATTERS
CHILD CUSTODY
9. If publishers become involved in a lawsuit over child custody and
visitation matters, two elders should contact the Legal Depart-
ment if the answers to all of the following questions are yes:
(1) Has someone been served with papers to appear in
court?
(2) Is the litigation between two biological parents?
(3) Is the other party to the litigation not one of Jehovah’s
Witnesses?
(4) Is it evident that the publisher’s religious beliefs will be
at issue?
CHARITABLE DONATION PROGRAMS

10. Some charitable donation programs may be acceptable to a
Christian. The following are brief descriptions and comments
about their use:
(1) Matching Donation Programs: In these programs, a
company agrees to increase or match an individual’s
donation to a charitable organization. The company is
simply making an additional voluntary contribution.
Since the donation does not require the congregation’s
active participation, designating a charitable
organization in a matching donation program is a
personal decision. Publishers should not initiate such
an arrangement with the company but may take
advantage of an established program.
(2) Volunteer Service Donation Programs: In these
programs, a donor agrees to make a donation to a
charitable organization for which an individual
performs a required amount of volunteer service.

LEGAL MATTERS
Publishers should not designate the branch office or a

congregation to receive donations as a charitable
organization for which they do “volunteer service,” and
congregations should not participate in such programs.
All publishers perform their ministry motivated by their
dedication to Jehovah and their personal obedience to
Jesus Christ’s command, not in behalf of the
congregation or any other organization. This is the case
whether the publisher expends time working on
construction projects, in relief work, or any other
activity that advances Kingdom interests.
(3) Fund-Raising Programs: In these programs a donor
offers to donate to a designated charitable
organization based upon an individual’s commercial
activity with the donor. For example, a grocery store
may agree to donate a percentage of an individual’s
purchases from that store. Frequently, these programs
require the designated charitable organization to
participate actively, such as by encouraging its
members and others to do business with the donor.
The congregation, however, should not promote any
type of commercial activity or solicit funds. Thus,
publishers should not designate the branch office or a
congregation to receive donations from a fund-raising
program, and congregations should not participate in
this type of program.

A PPENDIX A
Work Performed at Kingdom Halls

(For additional direction on work performed at Kingdom Halls, see Chapter 21.)
Should the
congregation
Who provides Who
Type of Work Definition contact the
the funding? coordinates
LDC for
the work?
approval?
Work that includes such tasks as performing

scheduled inspections; adjusting, servicing, or
cleaning existing building elements and/or equip-
ment; checking proper operation of equipment or
fixtures; or replacing consumable parts at regular
Scheduled intervals. No Congregation Congregation
Maintenance
Examples: Replacing air conditioning filters, clean-
ing ventilation grilles, replacing light bulbs, check-
ing plumbing fixtures, checking and adjusting door
hardware, checking exit lights, changing engine oil
on lawn mower, touch-up painting.
Work that is required to restore an existing build-

ing element or piece of equipment to an acceptable Only if the
condition. This may involve replacement of various work will cost
components, but it is not a complete replacement more than
of a system, unless it is a simple replacement of three months’
Repair small items that have reached their end of life. worth of Congregation Congregation
average
Examples: Repairing or replacing light fixtures or Kingdom Hall
similar elements; repairing leaking toilet cisterns, operating
roof leaks, water heater element failures, or loose expenses
floor tiles.
Work that involves making any alterations to the

design of the building, performing end-of-life re-
Minor placement of a building element or of building fin-
Renovations, ishes, or installing new minor equipment. LDC or
Upgrades, Yes Congregation
Examples: Replacing or installing carpeting, roof- Congregation
and New
Installations ing (shingles, tiles, membrane), chairs/benches,
air conditioning systems, building finishes, fences,
parking lot surfaces, video systems.
Work that is required to convert a facility that is

not currently considered suitable into one that is
Major suitable. It may include end-of-life replacements
Renovations, for multiple building elements and any work that in-
Upgrades, volves changing, expanding, or modifying the pur- Yes Branch Office LDC
and New pose, use, or design intent of the facility.
Installations Examples: Replacement of all or most of the build-
ing’s finishes or the entire roof structure (trusses)
or moving interior or exterior walls.
New Work that involves construction of a new facility

Yes Branch Office LDC
Construction or significant expansion of an existing building.
APPENDIX A
APPENDIX A “SHEPHERD THE FLOCK OF GOD”

Index
A Appeals
Accounts deletion: 8:39
audits: 3:3.20 disassociation: 18:6
expenses disfellowshipping: 17
approval of: 3:3.20 discovery of new grounds for disfel-
lowshipping: 17:8
circuit overseer: 10:5-7
if appeal committee agrees with judi-
hospitality and travel for visiting cial committee: 17:9-10
speakers: 20:5
if appeal committee disagrees with ju-
Kingdom Hall: 21:20-22 dicial committee: 17:11-15
Kingdom Hall Operating Committee: informing of right to appeal: 16:26.2
21:20
unbaptized publishers: 12:53
oversight: 4:2.8
Application for Regular Pioneer Service
proper use of congregation funds: 10:8
(S-205): 9:1-3, 9
selection of accounts servant: 1:2.7
Appointments
Adultery
elder and ministerial servant: 8
adulterous marriage: 12:10-12
cautions before recommending certain
judicial files: 22:26-27 brothers: 8:6-11
letters of introduction: 22:7-8 baptized for many years but only
announced reproof: 16:20.1 now being recommended: 8:11
bearing on recommendation as elder or guilty of adultery in past: 8:8
ministerial servant: 8:8 previously reproved, disfellow-
confession to mate: 15:14; 16:10.5 shipped, or disassociated: 8:7
Scriptural freedom to remarry: 12:71-76 separated or unscripturally di-
Anger: 12:36-37 vorced: 8:9
Announcements served in an appointed position in
approval: 20:13 past: 8:10; 13:8
deletion congregation file: 22:19
elder or ministerial servant: 8:38 considering Scriptural qualifications:
pioneer: 9:4 8:1-5
disassociation: 18:5 prisoners: 28:21
disfellowshipping: 16:29-30 recommendations between circuit
overseer’s regular visits to congrega-
Memorial: 20:12
tion: 8:21
reinstatement: 19:12
recommendations during circuit over-
reproof: 16:20-21 seer’s regular visit to congregation:
special public talk: 20:12 8:15-20
unbaptized publisher: 12:49, 51, 54 when appointed brother moves into
wedding: 27:6.3 congregation: 8:13-14
Apostasy: 12:39 pioneer: 9:1-3
“SHEPHERD THE FLOCK OF GOD” INDEX

INDEX
“Are You Ready to Face a pornography: 13:4

Faith-Challenging Medical Situation?” sexting: 14:30
(kmi11/90): 11:1 unnecessary association with disfellow-
Assemblies: 20:16 shipped or disassociated individuals:
foreign-language: 24:27 12:17.1
JW Stream: 20:27 Brideprice: 12:34
prisons: 28:20
rooming: 2:3.5 C
Assistance for needy publishers Causing divisions: 12:39.4, 70
role of elders in determining: 1:2.20, 6.3 Charitable donation programs: 29:10
rooming for assemblies and conventions: fund-raising programs: 29:10.3
2:3.5 matching donation programs: 29:10.1
Association with disfellowshipped or dis- volunteer service donation programs:
associated individuals: 12:17.1 29:10.2
Attendants Child abuse: 14
approval: 1:2.8 child pornography: 14:3, 10
disruptive individuals: 20:37-38 congregation considerations: 14:11
oversight: 3:3.18 filing: 14:25
Audits: 3:3.20 investigating allegations: 14:18
B judicial committee: 14:19; 16:11
Bankruptcy: 8:29 legal considerations: 14:4, 6-10
Baptism prison inmates: 14:9, 27
communicable diseases: 11:16-17 moving to another congregation:
materials provided by secretary: 11:1 14:26-27
meeting one year after notification by secular authorities:
14:28
reminder: 4:2.7
scheduling: 3:3.6 providing spiritual assistance: 14:12-17
prisons: 28:15 questions asked of newly appointed
brothers: 8:17
review of questions with candidates:
3:3.3 reinstatement committee: 14:20-21;
validity: 12:60-62 19:3
Bethelites, wrongdoing by: 12:43 reporting: 14:4, 6-10
Blind: 5:2.4 restrictions: 14:22-24
Blood sexting: 14:3, 10, 30
(See Medical matters) sexual misconduct involving only minors:
Body of elders 14:29-30
elders’ meetings: 1:1, 3-11 Child custody: 29:9
pursue peace: 1:12-13 Circuit overseer
responsibilities: 1:2 accommodations and meals: 10:1-4
Boxing: 12:37 expenses during week of visit: 10:5-7
Brazen conduct: 12:16-17 meeting with elders during visit: 1:4
dating though not Scripturally free to meetings of pregroup or group during
remarry: 12:17.2 visit: 24:23
INDEX “SHEPHERD THE FLOCK OF GOD”

INDEX
recommendations for appointment publishers who regularly move to second

during visit: 8:15-20 residence: 8:14
between visits: 8:21 those involved in additional theocratic
recommendations for deletion assignments: 23:24
during visit: 8:34 Construction servant, wrongdoing by:
12:43
between visits: 8:35
Conventions: 20:17
Report on Circuit Overseer’s Visit With
Congregation (S-303): 1:6.1; 22:20 foreign-language: 24:27
Circumstantial evidence: 12:7-9 JW Stream: 20:27
Cleaning: 21:5-7 prisons: 28:20
coordinator: 21:7 role of secretary: 4:2.8
Kingdom Hall Operating Committee: rooming: 2:3.5
21:15, 17 Coordinator of the body of elders: 3
safety: 21:27-29 appointment: 3:1
Conferencing systems: 20:24 qualifications: 3:2
Confession responsibilities: 3:3
establishing wrongdoing: 12:40.1 Correspondence and records: 22
to innocent mate: 15:14; 16:10.5 congregation file: 22:10-27
Congregation Bible Study Application for Regular Pioneer Ser-
vice (S-205): 9:2
approval of conductors and readers:
1:2.8 appointment and deletion of elders
and ministerial servants: 22:19
conducting: 20:19
categories: 22:11
Congregation file
child abuse: 14:25
(See Correspondence and records)
confidentiality: 22:10
Congregation Job Hazard Analysis
Congregation Meeting Attendance
(DC-85): 21:29
Record (S-88): 22:18
Congregation Job Hazard Analysis Instruc- disaster preparedness: 26:4
tions (DC-85i): 21:29
durable power of attorney (DPA):
Congregation Meeting Attendance Record 11:1.1
(S-88): 22:18 field service reports: 22:12-17
Congregation Service Committee: 2 judicial file and other confidential
ministerial servants substituting as mem- reports: 22:21-27
bers of: 2:2; 8:15 Report on Circuit Overseer’s Visit With
responsibilities: 2:1, 3 Congregation (S-303): 22:20
Congregation Territory Assignment (S-54): security: 22:10
23:2 disfellowshipped or disassociated individ-
Congregation’s Publisher Record (S-21): uals who die: 19:10
22:12-17 disfellowshipped or disassociated individ-
hour credit: 9:13-14 uals who move: 22:9
infirm regular pioneers: 9:20 JW.ORG e-mail: 22:1-4
judicial information: 22:21-22 letters of introduction: 22:5-8
letter of introduction: 22:5 online storage services: 22:28

INDEX
role of Congregation Service Committee: Disasters and emergencies: 26

2:3.6-7 preparedness: 26:1-6
role of coordinator of the body of elders congregation records: 26:4
and secretary: 3:3.1 contact information: 26:2
visit of service overseer to field service local needs part: 26:6
group: 5:2.5 review of arrangements with body of
Counsel: 25:9 elders: 26:5
special needs: 26:3
D
response
Dating local area: 26:7-12
unbeliever contacting publishers: 26:7
marking: 12:77-80 practical support: 26:12
support by elder or ministerial servant: safety: 26:10
8:24 shepherding: 26:11
when not Scripturally free to remarry: updating circuit overseer: 26:9
12:17.2
updating coordinator of the body of
Deaf: 5:2.4 elders: 26:8
(See also Sign language) other area: 26:13
Death Disfellowshipped or disassociated individ-
disfellowshipped or disassociated person: uals
19:10 appointed brother allows to live in home:
elder or ministerial servant: 8:37 8:23
Deletions association with: 12:17.1
elders and ministerial servants: 8 contact by elders: 25:20
announcements: 8:38 death: 19:10
appealing: 8:39 monthly JW Broadcasting programs:
congregation file: 22:19 21:41
for judicial reasons or death: 8:37 moving: 22:9
pornography: 13:5-6 prisoners: 28:17
recommendations between circuit transportation to meetings: 20:39
overseer’s regular visits to congrega- Disfellowshipping: 16:26-31
tion: 8:35 Disruptive individuals: 20:37-38
recommendations during circuit over- Divorce
seer’s regular visit to congregation: assistance to those contemplating:
8:34 25:11
resignations: 8:36 bearing on recommendation as elder or
reviewing qualifications: 8:31-33 ministerial servant: 8:9; 25:11
Shepherd book: Intro:3 Scriptural freedom to remarry: 12:71-76
when appointed brother moves out of judicial hearings: 15:14
congregation: 8:12 weddings: 27:3.1-2, 6.1
pioneers: 9:4-5, 11-20; 13:5-6 “Do-not-calls”
Disassociations: 18 child abuser: 14:27-28

INDEX
request by householder: 23:21 request by householder: 23:21

request by manager: 23:22 request by manager: 23:22
Domestic violence: 12:36-37 foreign-language field: 24:1-10
Drugs: 12:15.4 harbor witnessing: 23:19
Drunkenness: 12:18-19 inactive: 25:17
Durable power of attorney (DPA) incidents resulting in injury or death
admission to hospital: 11:4 while engaging in: 29:1.5
elderly: 11:3 literature
Hospital Liaison Committee: 11:8.4; oversight: 5:2.4
20:15 selection of servant: 1:2.7
newly baptized publishers: 11:1 meetings for field service
conductors
E approval: 1:2.8
Emergencies groups: 7:2.2
(See Disasters and emergencies) scheduling: 5:2.2
Employment locations and meeting times: 2:3.1
false religion: 12:39.5 nursing homes: 23:18
gambling: 12:32 prisons: 28:10-16
neutrality: 18:3.4 literature: 28:10-12
Engagements: 27:4 publishers who transfer to another
Evidence establishing wrongdoing: facility: 28:16
12:40-42 reporting activity: 28:13-14
“Exemplary”: 2:4 reporting baptisms: 28:15
Expenses public witnessing: 23:4-16
approval of: 3:3.20 displaying literature: 23:14
circuit overseer: 10:5-7 electronic devices: 23:15
Kingdom Hall: 21:20-22; A equipment: 23:8-9
Extortion: 12:31-34 participants: 23:10-11
Eyewitnesses selecting suitable locations: 23:4-5
appeal hearing: 17:6 site permission and insurance cover-
establishing wrongdoing: 12:40.2 age: 23:6-7
judicial hearing: 16:2-3 special metropolitan: 23:16
training: 23:12-13
F reports and records: 22:12-17
False teachings: 12:39.3 collecting: 7:2.9
Field ministry: 23 pioneers: 9:10-18
Bible study with child of Christian parent: prisons: 28:13-14
2:3.3 publishers who regularly move to sec-
congregation territory assignment: ond residence: 8:14
23:1-3 retirement homes: 23:18
“do-not-calls” review of activity
child abuser: 14:27-28 field service group: 7:2.6

INDEX
pioneers: 9:14-18 “Are You Ready to Face a

showing consideration for those in- Faith-Challenging Medical Situation?”
volved in additional theocratic as- (kmi11/90): 11:1
signments: 23:24-25 Congregation Job Hazard Analysis
schools and universities: 23:17 (DC-85): 21:29
witnessing difficulties: 23:21-23 Congregation Job Hazard Analysis
Field missionaries: 22:15 Instructions (DC-85i): 21:29
Field service groups Congregation Meeting Attendance
assigning publishers: 2:3.1 Record (S-88): 22:18
assistant: 7:1 Congregation Territory Assignment
number: 1:2.2 (S-54): 23:2
overseer: 7 Congregation’s Publisher Record (S-21)
qualifications: 7:1 hour credit: 9:13-14
responsibilities: 7:2 infirm regular pioneers: 9:20
review of activity: 7:2.6 judicial information: 22:21-22
visit of service overseer: 5:2.5 letters of introduction: 22:5
Fits of anger: 12:36-37 publishers who regularly move to
Foreign-language field: 24 second residence: 8:14
assemblies: 24:27 durable power of attorney (DPA)
assisting publishers: 24:24-26 admission to hospital: 11:4
conventions: 24:27 elderly: 11:3
forming pregroups, groups, and congre- Hospital Liaison Committee: 11:8.4;
gations: 24:2-5 20:15
host congregation: 24:11-12 newly baptized publishers: 11:1
invitations: 24:28 Field Service Report (S-4)
meetings: 24:13-23 collecting: 7:2.9
audio/video tie-in: 24:17-18 pioneers: 9:10-18
during visit of circuit overseer: 24:23 publishers who regularly move to
groups: 24:14-15 second residence: 8:14
interpretation: 24:19, 23 “Honorable Marriage in God’s Sight”
(See also Sign language) (S-41): 27:5
locations: 24:16 “How Do I View Blood Fractions and
Memorial: 24:22 Medical Procedures Involving My Own
pregroups: 24:13 Blood?” (kmi11/06): 11:1
recording attendance: 24:20 How Parents Can Protect Their Children
recordings: 24:17-18 From Misuse of Blood (S-55): 11:2
songs: 24:21 Identity Card (ic): 11:8.4
signs: 24:28 Incident Report (TO-5): 21:30-31
territory coverage: 24:6-10 Incident Report Instructions (TO-5i):
yeartext: 24:28 21:30-31
Forms: 5:2.6 Kingdom Hall Information (S-5): 21:33
Application for Regular Pioneer Service Notification of Disfellowshipping or
(S-205): 9:1-3, 9 Disassociation (S-77): 22:22

INDEX
pioneer appointment letter (S-202): 9:9 “How Do I View Blood Fractions and Med-
pioneer welcome letter (S-236): 9:3 ical Procedures Involving My Own
Prison Information (S-68): 28:6 Blood?” (kmi11/06): 11:1
Public Witnessing Guidelines (S-148): How Parents Can Protect Their Children
23:12 From Misuse of Blood (S-55): 11:2
Public Witnessing Supplies (S-80): 23:9
I
Recommendations for Appointment of
Elders and Ministerial Servants (S-62): Identity Card (ic): 11:8.4
8:15, 21 Idolatry: 12:39.7
Renting Facilities for Theocratic Events “In good standing”: 2:4
(TO-19): 21:4 Inactive
Report of Meeting Attendance (S-3): field service records: 22:12, 16
22:18
Memorial and special talk: 25:15
Report on Circuit Overseer’s Visit With
Congregation (S-303): 1:6.1; 22:20 repentant wrongdoer: 25:18
Special Medical Needs Room Request shepherding: 25:13-18
(hlc-20): 11:10-15 wrongdoing by: 12:44-46
Suggestions for Publishers Learning Incident Report (TO-5): 21:30-31
Another Language (S-394): 24:24 Incident Report Instructions (TO-5i):
Working Together Safely—Standards for 21:30-31
Theocratic Construction and Mainte- Infirm regular pioneers: 9:19-20
nance (DC-82): 21:28 Information board: 21:34
Fraud: 12:24-28 inactive ones: 25:14
Funerals: 2:3.11; 21:19 social events: 29:8
G Interfaith: 12:39.2
Internet service
Gambling: 12:31-33
circuit overseer: 10:7
Gluttony: 12:20
Kingdom Hall: 21:36, 38.3
Greed: 12:31-34
Interpretation
Gross uncleanness, uncleanness with
greediness: 12:14-15 sign-language: 20:28-35
pornography: 13:3 attire: 20:32-34
sexting: 14:30 seating area: 20:28-29
songs: 20:35
H use of natural sign language:
Harbor witnessing: 23:19 20:30-31
Higher education: 8:30 simultaneous: 24:19, 23
Holidays: 12:39.1 Irregular publishers: 7:2.9
Homebound publishers: 20:24, 26-27
J
“Honorable Marriage in God’s Sight”
(S-41): 27:5 Joining another religion: 18:3.2
Hospital Liaison Committees: 11:6-15; Judicial committee
20:15 appeals
Hour credit: 9:11-14 (See Appeals)

INDEX
determining which congregation should child abuse: 14:19; 16:2

handle the matter: 12:63-65 drunkenness: 12:18-19
disassociations extortion: 12:34
(See Disassociations) fits of anger: 12:36-37
disfellowshipping: 16:26-31 fraud: 12:24-28
evidence establishing wrongdoing: gambling: 12:31-33
12:40-42 gluttony: 12:20
confession: 12:40.1 greed: 12:31-34
eyewitnesses: 12:40.2 gross uncleanness, uncleanness with
appeal hearing: 17:6 greediness: 12:14-15
judicial hearing: 16:2-3 extreme physical uncleanness:
files: 22:21-27 12:15.5
inactive: 25:18 immoral conversations over tele-
inviting accused to hearing: 15:7-11 phone or Internet: 12:15.2; 14:30
legal action: 15:18-20 misuse of tobacco or marijuana and
marking: 12:77-80 abuse of medical, illicit, or addic-
meeting with baptized minors and young tive drugs: 12:15.4
adults: 15:15 momentary touching of intimate
meeting with incarcerated ones: 28:22 body parts or caressing of
breasts: 12:15.1
meeting with marriage mates: 15:12-14
viewing abhorrent forms of pornog-
mental or emotional problems: 16:12
raphy: 13:3
news media: 15:19
lying: 12:22-23
offenses requiring review by elders:
manslaughter: 12:38
12:2-39
obscene speech: 12:15.2, 30
adulterous marriage: 12:10-12
pornography: 13:2-4
apostasy: 12:39
refusal to provide for family: 12:35
causing divisions, promoting sects:
12:39.4 reviling: 12:29
deliberately spreading teachings sexual immorality (por·neia): 12:3-6
contrary to Bible truth: 12:39.3 slander: 12:24-28
employment: 12:39.5 stealing: 12:21
holidays: 12:39.1 strong circumstantial evidence of sex-
idolatry: 12:39.7 ual immorality (por·neia): 12:7-9
interfaith: 12:39.2 violence: 12:36-37
spiritism: 12:39.6 permitting individuals to commit sexual
brazen conduct: 12:16-17 immorality in home: 12:67-70
dating though not Scripturally free preparing mind and heart to judge:
to remarry: 12:17.2 15:4-6
pornography: 13:4 recordings: 16:1
sexting: 14:30 reinstatements
unnecessary association with disfel- (See Reinstatements)
lowshipped or disassociated indi- repentance: 16:6-17
viduals: 12:17.1 reproof: 16:18-25

INDEX
restrictions dedications: 21:43

letter of introduction: 22:7 expenses: 21:20-22; A
reinstatement: 19:11-12, 14 funerals: 2:3.11; 21:19
reproof: 16:19, 22 incidents: 21:30-32
Scriptural freedom to remarry: 12:10-12, information board: 21:34
71-76 inactive ones: 25:14
selecting committee and chairman: social events: 29:8
15:1-3
inspections: 21:25
serious wrongdoing that occurred years
Internet service: 21:36, 38.3
in past: 12:57-59
suicide JW Broadcasting monthly programs:
21:41
attempt: 12:81
Kingdom Hall Operating Committee:
threat: 15:17
21:15-20
those having certain privileges of service:
monthly contribution: 1:2.16
12:43
those who have not associated for many library: 21:39-40
years: 12:44-46 maintenance and repair: 21:8-14; A
unbaptized publishers: 12:47-56 coordinator: 21:14
validity of wrongdoer’s baptism: Kingdom Hall Operating Committee:
12:60-62 21:15, 17-18
wrongdoing involving individuals from meeting times: 21:19, 20, 33
different congregations: 12:66 merging congregations: 21:23
JW Broadcasting: 21:41 moisture-related problems: 21:12
JW Library: 20:21 ownership: 21:2-3
JW.ORG phone answering system: 21:35
assigning roles: 2:3.12 property: 21:42
e-mail: 22:1-4 renovation: 21:22-24; A
local domain administrators: 3:3.15 rented facilities: 21:4, 13
JW Stream: 20:25-27 safety: 21:27-29
foreign-language field: 24:17 cleaning: 21:6-7, 17
Memorial and special talk: 20:10 maintenance: 21:8-9, 14, 17
K security: 21:26
signs
Kingdom Hall and Assembly Hall construc-
tion worldwide: 1:2.15 foreign-language field: 24:28
Kingdom Hall Information (S-5): 21:33 meeting times: 21:33
Kingdom Halls yeartext: 21:38.2; 24:28
cleaning: 21:5-7 upgrades: 21:22; A
coordinator: 21:7 video equipment: 21:37-38; A
Kingdom Hall Operating Committee: weddings: 27:6
21:15, 17 written agreement: 21:20
construction: 21:23-24; A yeartext: 21:38.2; 24:28
contact congregation: 21:3 Kingdom Ministry School: 8:13

INDEX
L prisons: 28:10-12
Legal matters: 29 public witnessing: 23:14
selection of literature servant: 1:2.7
charitable donation programs: 29:10
Local Design/Construction Department
fund-raising programs: 29:10.3
disasters: 26:12
matching donation programs: 29:10.1
inspections: 21:25
volunteer service donation programs:
maintenance and repair: 21:8-14; A
29:10.2
major renovation and new construction:
child abuse: 14:6-10
21:23-24; A
child pornography: 14:10 rented facilities: 21:4
prison inmates: 14:9, 27 security system: 21:26
sexting: 14:3, 10, 30 upgrades and minor renovation:
child custody: 29:9 21:22; A
incidents resulting in injury or death use of congregation property: 21:42
while engaging in theocratic activities: video equipment: 21:37; A
21:30; 29:1.5 Local needs parts: 20:14-15
news media: 15:19 assemblies: 20:16
officiating at weddings: 27:2-5 conventions: 20:17
personal legal advice: 29:2 disaster preparedness: 26:6
public witnessing: 23:6-7 Lying: 12:22-23
social events: 29:8
threats of legal action: 15:18-20 M
undocumented aliens: 29:3-7 Maintenance and repair: 21:8-14; A
witnessing difficulties: 23:21-23 coordinator: 21:14
Letters of introduction: 22:5-8 Kingdom Hall Operating Committee:
21:15, 17-18
child abusers: 14:26-27
safety: 21:27-29
elders and ministerial servants: 8:12-14
Manslaughter: 12:38
pioneers: 9:6-7
Marijuana: 12:15.4
Library: 21:39-40
Marking: 12:77-80
Life and Ministry Meeting
Marriage
assignments: 1:2.8; 3:3.17
adulterous: 12:10-12
auxiliary counselor: 1:2.5 judicial files: 22:26-27
chairman: 1:2.8 letters of introduction: 22:7-8
conducting: 20:19 Scriptural freedom: 12:71-76
Congregation Bible Study confirmation before wedding:
approval of conductors and readers: 27:3.1-2, 6.1
1:2.8 dating: 12:17.2
conducting: 20:19 resuming relations: 15:14
counselors for auxiliary classes: 1:2.5 shepherding: 25:10-11
overseer: 1:2.4 support of uneven yoking: 8:24
Literature Masturbation: 12:4
disfellowshipped individuals: 16:26.3 Medical matters: 11
oversight: 5:2.4 accepting blood: 18:3.3

INDEX
admission to hospital: 11:4 foreign-language: 24:13-23

baptism of individual with communicable audio/video tie-in: 24:17-18
disease: 11:16-17 during visit of circuit overseer: 24:23
communication with medical personnel: groups: 24:14-15
11:5
interpretation: 24:19, 23
elderly: 11:3
(See also Sign language)
Hospital Liaison Committee: 11:6-9
locations: 24:16
local needs parts: 20:15
Memorial: 24:22
newly baptized publishers: 11:1
parents and pregnant sisters: 11:2 pregroups: 24:13
Patient Visitation Group: 11:6 recording attendance: 24:20
traveling to care for medical needs: recordings: 24:17-18
11:10-15 songs: 24:21
Meetings: 20 informing of appointment: 8:17-19
attendance records: 22:18 informing of deletion: 8:34-35
foreign-language: 24:20 JW Library: 20:21
prison: 28:17 JW Stream: 20:25-27
attendants foreign-language meetings: 24:17
approval: 1:2.8 Memorial and special talk: 20:10
disruptive individuals: 20:37-38 Kingdom Hall Operating Committee:
oversight: 3:3.18 21:16
baptism meeting times: 21:19, 20, 33
candidates: 3:3.3 Memorial: 20:6-12
one year after chairman and announcements: 20:12
reminder: 4:2.7 foreign-language: 24:22
scheduling: 3:3.6 inactive: 25:15
conferencing systems: 20:24 JW Stream: 20:10
disruptive individuals: 20:37-38 meeting times: 20:8
elders’: 1:1, 3-11
other meetings week of: 20:9
arranging for: 3:3.4
prayers: 20:7
compiling and distributing
agenda: 1:7 prisons: 28:19
during meeting: 1:8-11 speaker: 20:6
length: 1:3 midweek (Life and Ministry Meeting)
reviewing qualifications: 8:31-33 announcements: 20:13
what to discuss: 1:5-6 assignments: 1:2.8; 3:3.17
when to hold: 1:4 auxiliary counselor: 1:2.5
field service chairman: 1:2.8
conductors Congregation Bible Study
approval: 1:2.8 approval of conductors and read-
group overseer: 7:2.2 ers: 1:2.8
scheduling: 5:2.2 conducting: 20:19
locations and meeting times: 2:3.1 counselors for auxiliary classes: 1:2.5

INDEX
local needs parts: 20:14-15 unbaptized publishers

assemblies: 20:16 desirous of becoming: 3:3.5
conventions: 20:17 with parents of minors involved in
disaster preparedness: 26:6 wrongdoing: 12:55
overseer: 1:2.4 video: 20:21
passing microphones: 1:2.8 approval of those working with: 1:2.8
pioneer oversight: 3:3.18
review of application: 9:1 sign-language: 20:36
review of field service activity: visual aids: 20:20
9:16-18 weekend
with elders in December/January: public talk
1:2.12 chairman
pornography: 13:1 approval: 1:2.8
prayer: 1:2.8 Memorial and special talk:
prisons: 28:17-20 20:12
extended meetings: 28:20 scheduling: 3:3.19
Memorial: 28:19 coordinator
recordings oversight: 3:3.18
Memorial: 20:10; 28:19 selection: 1:2.7
special public talk: 20:10 speakers: 20:1-5
resignations: 8:36 assignments: 20:1-2
sign-language: 20:28-36 hospitality and travel expenses:
audio during videos: 20:36 20:5
interpretation: 20:28-35 reading scriptures: 20:3
attire: 20:32-34 symposiums: 20:4
seating area: 20:28-29 special
songs: 20:35 chairman and announcements:
use of natural sign language: 20:12
20:30-31 inactive: 25:15
visual aids: 20:20 JW Stream: 20:10
songs: 20:21-23 speaker: 1:2.13
foreign-language: 24:21 Watchtower Study
sign-language: 20:35 conductor: 6
sound conducting study: 6:2-9
approval of those working with: 1:2.8 qualifications: 6:1
oversight: 3:3.18 paragraph readers
sign-language videos: 20:36 approval: 6:9
stage recordings: 6:9
approval of those working with: 1:2.8 scheduling: 3:3.19
oversight: 3:3.18 Memorial: 20:6-12
transportation for disfellowshipped: chairman and announcements: 20:12
20:39 foreign-language: 24:22

INDEX
inactive: 25:15 infirm: 9:19-20

JW Stream: 20:10 meeting with elders in December/
meeting times: 20:8 January: 1:2.12
other meetings week of: 20:9 prisoners: 28:21
prayers: 20:7 review of activity: 9:16-18
prisons: 28:19 special consideration: 9:14-15
speaker: 20:6 special pioneer
Merging congregations: 21:23 field service report: 22:15
Microphones, passing: 1:2.8 wrongdoing by: 12:43
Moisture-related problems: 21:12 welcome letter (S-236): 9:3
Moving Plea bargain: 12:40.1
child abusers: 14:26-27 Por·neia: 12:3-9
disfellowshipped or disassociated individ- Pornography: 13
uals: 22:9 child pornography: 14:3, 10
elders and ministerial servants: 8:12-14 determining whether a judicial hearing is
required: 13:2-4
letters of introduction: 22:5-8
reappointment of elders and ministerial
pioneers: 9:6-7
servants: 13:8
prisoners: 28:16 reviewing qualifications of appointed per-
wrongdoers: 12:64; 19:13-16 sons: 13:5-6
Murder: 12:38 shepherding: 13:7
N Prayer
elders’ meetings: 1:1
Neutrality: 18:3.4 public: 1:2.8
News media: 15:19 Pregroups
Notification of Disfellowshipping or Disas- (See Foreign-language field)
sociation (S-77): 22:22
Prisons: 28
Nursing homes: 23:18 child abuse: 14:9, 27
O communication with prison officials:
28:8
Obscene speech: 12:15.2, 30
contact congregation: 28:2-4
Online storage services: 22:28
correspondence with branch office:
P 28:5-7
inmates serving in appointed capacity:
Patient Visitation Groups: 11:6 28:21
Phone answering system: 21:35 judicial hearings: 28:22
Pioneers: 9 meetings: 28:17-20
appointment letter (S-202): 9:9 extended: 28:20
appointments: 9:1-3 Memorial: 28:19
changes to information: 9:8 ministry: 28:10-16
congregation changes: 9:6-7 literature: 28:10-12
deletions: 9:4-5 proof of ordination: 28:8
Field Service Reports (S-4): 9:10 publishers who transfer to another
hour credit: 9:11-14 facility: 28:16

INDEX
reporting activity: 28:13-14 Memorial: 20:10; 28:19

reporting baptisms: 28:15 paragraph reading: 6:9
referrals and contact with prisoners: special public talk: 20:10
28:9 Records
Public talk (See Correspondence and records)
chairman Reinstatements: 19
approval: 1:2.8 child abuse: 14:20-21
scheduling: 3:3.19 communication between committees:
coordinator 19:13-16
oversight: 3:3.18 hearings: 19:5-8
selection: 1:2.7 if the decision is not to reinstate: 19:9
speakers: 20:1-5 if the decision is to reinstate: 19:10-12
assignments: 20:1-2 requests for: 19:1-4
hospitality and travel expenses: 20:5 Refusal to provide for family: 12:35
reading scriptures: 20:3 Renovation: 21:22-24; A
symposiums: 20:4 Renting Facilities for Theocratic Events
special (TO-19): 21:4
inactive: 25:15 Repentance
speaker: 1:2.13 judicial hearings: 16:6-17
Public witnessing: 23:4-16 reinstatement hearings: 19:5-8
displaying literature: 23:14 Report of Meeting Attendance (S-3):
electronic devices: 23:15 22:18
equipment: 23:8-9 Report on Circuit Overseer’s Visit With
participants: 23:10-11 Congregation (S-303): 1:6.1; 22:20
selecting suitable locations: 23:4-5 Reproof: 16:18-25
site permission and insurance coverage: Resignations: 8:36
23:6-7 Restrictions
special metropolitan: 23:16 branch-imposed: 14:22-24
training: 23:12-13 judicial
letter of introduction: 22:7
R
reinstatement: 19:11-12, 14
Rape: 12:5, 41; 16:2 reproof: 16:19, 22
Reappointment of elders and ministerial Retirement homes: 23:18
servants: 13:8 Reviewing qualifications of elder or minis-
Recommendations terial servant: 8:31-33
(See Appointments) bankruptcy: 8:29
Recommendations for Appointment of El- disfellowshipped or disassociated family
ders and Ministerial Servants (S-62): member in home: 8:23
8:15, 21 higher education: 8:30
Recordings member of household involved in serious
assemblies and conventions: 24:27 wrongdoing: 8:22
foreign-language meetings: 24:17-18 past disfellowshipping offense never
judicial hearings: 16:1 addressed: 8:25-27

INDEX
supports marriage of a baptized Chris- disasters: 26:11

tian to an unbaptized person: 8:24 disfellowshipped or disassociated ones:
viewed pornography: 13:5-6 25:20
Reviling: 12:29 engaged individuals: 27:4
foreign-language field: 24:24-26
S inactive: 25:13-18
S-202 letter: 9:9 marital problems: 25:10-11
S-236 letter: 9:3 pornography: 13:7
Safety recognizing spiritual weakness: 25:7-8
disasters: 26:10 sisters: 25:12
Kingdom Hall: 21:27-29 training ministerial servants: 25:4-6
cleaning: 21:6-7, 17 Sign language: 20:28-36
maintenance: 21:8-9, 14, 17 audio: 20:36
Scriptural freedom to remarry: 12:71-76 interpretation: 20:28-35
adulterous marriage: 12:10-12 attire: 20:32-34
confirmation before wedding: seating area: 20:28-29
27:3.1-2, 6.1 songs: 20:35
dating: 12:17.2 use of natural sign language:
resuming relations: 15:14 20:30-31
Secretary: 4 visual aids: 20:20
qualifications: 4:1 Signs
responsibilities: 4:2 foreign-language field: 24:28
Sects: 12:39.4 meeting times: 21:33
Security: 21:26; 22:10 yeartext: 21:38.2; 24:28
Separation Slander: 12:24-28
assistance to those contemplating: Smoking: 12:15.4
25:11 Songs: 20:21-23
bearing on privileges: 8:9; 25:11 foreign-language: 24:21
refusal to provide for family: 12:35 sign-language: 20:35
Service overseer: 5 Sound
qualifications: 5:1 approval of those working with: 1:2.8
responsibilities: 5:2 oversight: 3:3.18
Serving where need is greater: 2:3.7 sign-language videos: 20:36
Sexting: 12:15.2, 30 Special Medical Needs Room Request
minors: 14:3, 10, 30 (hlc-20): 11:10-15
Sexual immorality (por·neia) Special metropolitan public witnessing:
judicial offense: 12:3-9 23:16
permitting in one’s home: 12:67-70 Special pioneer
Shepherd Addendum: Intro:2 field service report: 22:15
Shepherding: 25 wrongdoing by: 12:43
calls: 25:3 Special public talk
child abuse: 14:12-17 chairman and announcements: 20:12
counsel: 25:9 inactive: 25:15

INDEX
JW Stream: 20:10 foreign-language meetings: 24:17-18

speaker: 1:2.13 oversight: 3:3.18
Spiritism: 12:39.6 sign-language: 20:35-36
Stage: 3:3.18 Violence: 12:36-37
approval of those working with: 1:2.8 Visual aids: 20:20
oversight: 3:3.18 Voyeurism: 14:3
Stealing: 12:21
Suggestions for Publishers Learning W
Another Language (S-394): 24:24 Warning talk: 12:77-80
Suicide determining need and assigning speaker:
attempt: 12:81 1:2.11
threat: 15:17 permitting sexual immorality in one’s
Symposiums: 20:4 home: 12:70
T reproof: 16:23
unbaptized publisher: 12:50
Territory
Watchtower Study
congregation assignment: 23:1-3
conductor: 6
foreign-language field: 24:6-10
conducting the study: 6:2-9
oversight: 5:2.1
selection of territory servant: 1:2.7 qualifications: 6:1
Tobacco: 12:15.4 paragraph readers
Training: 1:6.4-5 approval: 6:9
body of elders: 1:6.4-5 recordings: 6:9
group overseer: 7:2.8 scheduling: 3:3.19
public witnessing: 23:12-13 Weddings: 27
shepherding: 25:4-6 information board: 21:34
officiating: 27:2-5
U
proof of ordination: 27:3.3
Unbaptized publishers receptions: 27:4
dating: 12:79 Scriptural freedom: 27:3.1-2, 6.1
durable power of attorney (DPA) and
support of uneven yoking: 8:24
Identity Card (ic): 11:8.4
unbaptized publishers: 27:3, 6.1
handling wrongdoing by: 12:47-56
meeting with those desirous of becom- undocumented aliens: 27:6.1
ing: 3:3.5 use of Kingdom Hall: 27:6
weddings: 27:3, 6.1 Witnessing difficulties: 23:21-23
Uncleanness: 12:14-15 Working Together Safely—Standards for
Undocumented aliens: 27:6.1; 29:3-7 Theocratic Construction and Mainte-
nance (DC-82): 21:28
V Written agreement: 21:20
Video: 20:21
approval of those working with: 1:2.8 Y
equipment: 21:37-38 Yeartext: 21:38.2; 24:28

Shepherd (SFL - E 2019) PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Shepherd (SFL - E 2019) PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Shepherd (SFL - E 2019) PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

“SHEPHERD

THE FLOCK OF GOD”

THIS BOOK HAS BEEN ISSUED TO

HOW ELDERS WORK TOGETHER AS A BODY.................................................. 1

CONGREGATION SERVICE COMMITTEE ............................................................ 2

COORDINATOR OF THE BODY OF ELDERS ...................................................... 3

SERVICE OVERSEER ............................................................................................ 5

WATCHTOWER STUDY CONDUCTOR ................................................................. 6

FIELD SERVICE GROUP OVERSEER ................................................................... 7

APPOINTMENT AND DELETION OF ELDERS

CIRCUIT OVERSEER ........................................................................................... 10

MEDICAL MATTERS ............................................................................................ 11

DETERMINING WHETHER A JUDICIAL COMMITTEE

CHILD ABUSE ..................................................................................................... 14

PREPARING FOR JUDICIAL HEARINGS ........................................................... 15

TABLE OF CONTENTS “SHEPHERD THE FLOCK OF GOD”

PROCEDURE FOR JUDICIAL HEARINGS ......................................................... 16

APPEAL HEARINGS ............................................................................................ 17

CORRESPONDENCE AND RECORDS ............................................................... 22

FIELD MINISTRY ................................................................................................. 23

FOREIGN-LANGUAGE FIELD ............................................................................. 24

DISASTERS AND EMERGENCIES...................................................................... 26

LEGAL MATTERS ................................................................................................ 29

A. WORK PERFORMED AT KINGDOM HALLS

“SHEPHERD THE FLOCK OF GOD” TABLE OF CONTENTS

1. As an appointed elder, you have the serious responsibility to “shep-

INTRODUCTION “SHEPHERD THE FLOCK OF GOD”

How Elders Work

1. Jehovah has appointed Jesus Christ as head of the Christian con-

“SHEPHERD THE FLOCK OF GOD” CHAPTER 1

impose personal viewpoints or arbitrary rules on

CHAPTER 1 “SHEPHERD THE FLOCK OF GOD”

congregations, selecting a brother or brothers to serve

(9) Deciding who is approved to deliver public talks in

(10) Assigning two elders to investigate accusations

“SHEPHERD THE FLOCK OF GOD” CHAPTER 1

(12) Deciding which elders will handle the annual meeting

CHAPTER 1 “SHEPHERD THE FLOCK OF GOD”

sisters who have a long history of faithful service,

4. When to Hold: In addition to the elders’ meeting held during each

5. What to Discuss: The body of elders may discuss any matters

6. Following are some matters that periodically merit the attention

“SHEPHERD THE FLOCK OF GOD” CHAPTER 1

(2) Consider whether and how the congregation can do

(5) Review the congregation assignments of all exemplary,

(6) Review published information on disaster preparedness.

CHAPTER 1 “SHEPHERD THE FLOCK OF GOD”

to discuss. If time permits, the circuit overseer may agree to in-

“SHEPHERD THE FLOCK OF GOD” CHAPTER 1

CHAPTER 1 “SHEPHERD THE FLOCK OF GOD”

“SHEPHERD THE FLOCK OF GOD” CHAPTER 2

including inactive ones, to ﬁeld service groups after

CHAPTER 2 “SHEPHERD THE FLOCK OF GOD”

such as auxiliary pioneering. Reviewing the ﬁeld service

(11) Approving use of the Kingdom Hall for weddings and

(12) Determining any additional jw.org roles assigned to

(13) Determining how to handle material in the conﬁdential

(14) Arranging for elders to visit or write a letter to

(15) Developing, along with the field service group